Canon EOS 1Dx Mark II Instruction Manual IM EN

User Manual: canon EOS 1Dx Mark II - Instruction Manual Free User Guide for Canon EOS Series Camera, Manual - page2

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 562 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

EOS-1D X Mark II (G)
ENGLISH
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Instruction manuals (PDF files) and software can be
downloaded from the Canon website (p.4).
www.canon.com/icpd
2
The EOS-1D X Mark II (G) is a digital single-lens reflex camera
featuring a full-frame CMOS sensor (approx. 35.9 mm x 23.9 mm) with
approx. 20.2 effective megapixels, Dual DIGIC 6+, normal ISO speed
range of ISO 100 - ISO 51200, viewfinder with approx. 100% field of
view coverage, high-precision and high-speed 61-point AF (up to 41
cross-type AF points), maximum continuous shooting speed of approx.
14.0 fps during viewfinder shooting or approx. 16.0 fps during Live View
shooting, 3.2-inch (approx. 1.62 million dots) LCD monitor, Live View
shooting, 4K 59.94p/50.00p movie shooting, High Frame Rate movie
shooting (Full HD at 119.9p/100.0p), Dual-Pixel CMOS AF, and GPS
function.
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.20-22) and “Handling Precautions” (p.23-25). Also, read
this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store
this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when
necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images of people and certain subjects for anything but private
enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,
etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.
Introduction
3
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
* Attach the Eyecup Eg to the viewfinder eyepiece.
* Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
Item Check List
Battery Pack
LP-E19
(with protective cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E19
(with protective covers)
Interface Cable
IFC-150U II
Camera
(with body cap and
battery compartment cap)
Wide Strap
Eyecup Eg
Cable
protector
Wired LAN Functions
To use wired LAN with the Ethernet RJ-45 terminal (p.28), refer to the
EOS-1D X Mark II (G) “Wired LAN Instruction Manual” (p.4).
Connecting to Peripheral Devices
When connecting the camera to a computer etc., use the provided interface
cable or one from Canon. When connecting an interface cable, also use the
provided cable protector (p.38).
4
Instruction Manuals
Instruction manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon
website.
Instruction manual (PDF files) download site:
• Camera Instruction Manual, Wired LAN Instruction Manual,
and Software Instruction Manuals
Xwww.canon.com/icpd
5
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of
capacity: If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized)
by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera
(p.74).
CF (CompactFlash) cards
* Type I, UDMA Mode 7 supported.
CFast card
* CFast 2.0 supported.
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with good enough
performances (fast enough reading and writing speeds) to handle the
movie recording quality. For details, see page 316.
Compatible Cards
Cards that Can Record Movies
In this manual, “CF card” refers to CompactFlash cards and “CFast card”
refers to CFast memory cards. “Card” refers to all memory cards.
*The camera does not come with a card for recording images/movies.
Please purchase it separately.
6
Quick Start Guide
1Insert the battery (p.47).
To charge the battery, see page 42.
2Insert the card (p.49).
The left slot is for CF cards, and the
right slot is for CFast cards.
* Shooting is possible as long as there is a CF card or CFast card in the
camera.
3Attach the lens (p.59).
Align the red mount index on the
lens with the red mount index on the
camera.
4Set the lens’s focus mode
switch to <f> (p.59).
5Set the power switch to <1>
(p.53).
7
Quick Start Guide
6Set the shooting mode to <d>
(p.228).
Press the <W> button.
Look at the top LCD panel and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select
<d>.
7Focus on the subject (p.62).
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
8Take the picture (p.62).
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
9Review the picture.
The image just captured will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
LCD monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.344).
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.271).
To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.344).
To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.386).
8
Icons in this Manual
<6> : Indicates the Main Dial.
<5> : Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
<9> : Indicates the Multi-controller.
<0> : Indicates the Setting button.
9/4/7/8: Indicates that each function remains active for
approx. 6 sec., 8 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. after you
let go of the button.
* In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons
and displayed on the LCD monitor are also used in this manual when discussing
relevant operations and functionality.
3: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button to change its settings.
(p.**) : Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is already set to <1> (p.53).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens as an example.
Conventions Used in this Manual
9
Chapters
Introduction 2
Getting Started 41
Setting the AF and Drive Modes 87
Image Settings 151
GPS Settings 211
Exposure Control for Photographic Expressions 227
Flash Photography 259
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
271
Shooting Movies 295
Image Playback 343
Post-Processing Images 391
Sensor Cleaning 401
Transferring Images to a Computer and Print Ordering
407
Customizing the Camera 417
Reference 477
Software Overview 549
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
13
14
1
5
10
1
Introduction 2
Item Check List................................................................................. 3
Instruction Manuals .......................................................................... 4
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Index to Features ........................................................................... 17
Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 20
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 23
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 26
Getting Started 41
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 42
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 47
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 49
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 53
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone .................................................. 55
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 58
Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 59
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 61
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 68
3 Menu Operations.................................................................. 71
Before You Start............................................................................. 74
Formatting the Card..................................................................... 74
Disabling the Beeper ................................................................... 76
Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ................................. 76
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................... 77
Contents
11
Contents
2
3
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings..............................77
l Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder .......................................81
Q Displaying the Electronic Level ...............................................82
Setting the Viewfinder Information Display .....................................84
Help ............................................................................................85
Setting the AF and Drive Modes 87
f:Selecting the AF Operation.......................................................88
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point .........................................91
AF Area Selection Modes ...............................................................96
AF Sensor.....................................................................................100
Lenses and Usable AF Points.......................................................102
Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics..........................................113
Customizing AF Functions ............................................................122
Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus........................................138
When Autofocus Fails ...................................................................144
MF: Manual Focus .....................................................................145
i Selecting the Drive Mode........................................................146
j Using the Self-timer .................................................................150
Image Settings 151
Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback ...........................152
Setting the Image-Recording Quality ............................................155
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos.................................163
Selecting a Picture Style...............................................................169
Customizing a Picture Style ..........................................................172
Registering a Picture Style............................................................175
B: Setting the White Balance....................................................177
Contents
12
4
5
O Custom White Balance .......................................................... 180
P Setting the Color Temperature .............................................. 185
u White Balance Correction ....................................................... 186
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast................................. 189
Setting Noise Reduction............................................................... 190
Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 193
Correction of Lens Aberrations..................................................... 194
Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 198
Setting the Color Space ............................................................... 200
Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 201
Changing the File Name............................................................... 203
File Numbering Methods .............................................................. 206
Setting Copyright Information....................................................... 208
GPS Settings 211
GPS Features............................................................................... 212
GPS Precautions.......................................................................... 214
Acquiring GPS Signals ................................................................. 215
Setting the Positioning Interval..................................................... 220
Setting Time from GPS on the Camera........................................ 221
Logging the Route Traveled ......................................................... 222
Exposure Control for Photographic Expressions 227
d: Program AE............................................................................. 228
s: Shutter-Priority AE ................................................................ 231
f: Aperture-Priority AE ............................................................. 233
Depth-of-Field Preview .............................................................. 235
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 236
13
Contents
6
7
8
q Selecting the Metering Mode ..................................................238
O Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation..........................241
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ...........................................243
A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock).........................245
bulb: Bulb Exposures ...................................................................246
P Multiple Exposures..................................................................248
2 Mirror Lockup.........................................................................256
Using the Eyepiece Shutter ..........................................................258
F Using a Remote Switch.............................................................258
Flash Photography 259
D Flash Photography....................................................................260
Setting the Flash Function ............................................................263
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 271
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ...............................................272
Shooting Function Settings...........................................................278
Menu Function Settings ................................................................280
Focusing with AF (AF Method) .....................................................284
MF: Focusing Manually.................................................................291
Shooting Movies 295
k Shooting Movies .....................................................................296
Autoexposure Shooting..............................................................296
Shutter-priority AE......................................................................297
Aperture-priority AE....................................................................298
Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................301
Shooting Function Settings...........................................................309
Setting the Movie Recording Quality.............................................311
Contents
14
9
Setting the Sound Recording ....................................................... 322
Silent Control................................................................................ 325
Setting the Time Code.................................................................. 326
Menu Function Settings................................................................ 330
Image Playback 343
x Image Playback ..................................................................... 344
B: Shooting Information Display.............................................. 346
x Searching for Images Quickly ................................................ 352
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)..... 352
I Jumping through Images (Jump Display)............................. 353
u Magnifying Images.................................................................. 355
b Rotating the Image.................................................................. 357
J Protecting Images................................................................... 358
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 361
K Recording and Playing back Voice Memos............................. 363
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 365
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 367
k Playing Back Movies .............................................................. 369
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................ 372
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies ........................................ 374
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 376
Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 379
a Copying Images...................................................................... 382
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 386
Changing Image Playback Settings ............................................. 389
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness....................................... 389
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ............................................... 390
15
Contents
10
13
12
11
Post-Processing Images 391
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera ...........................392
S Resizing JPEG Images ...........................................................397
N Cropping JPEG Images...........................................................399
Sensor Cleaning 401
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning...................................................402
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................403
Manual Sensor Cleaning...............................................................405
Transferring Images to a Computer and Print Ordering
407
d Transferring Images to a Computer........................................408
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)..........................................413
Customizing the Camera 417
Custom Functions.........................................................................418
Custom Function Settings.............................................................421
C.Fn1: Exposure ........................................................................421
C.Fn2: Exposure ........................................................................424
C.Fn3: Exposure ........................................................................427
C.Fn4: Drive ...............................................................................431
C.Fn5: Display/Operation...........................................................433
C.Fn6: Operation........................................................................436
C.Fn7: Others.............................................................................439
7 Custom Controls ...................................................................443
Custom Quick Control...................................................................459
Registering My Menu....................................................................463
Saving and Loading Camera Settings ..........................................468
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes ......................................472
Contents
16
15
14
Reference 477
B Button Functions.................................................................. 478
Checking the Battery Information ................................................. 482
Using a Household Power Outlet ................................................. 483
System Map ................................................................................. 484
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode.............................. 486
Menu Settings .............................................................................. 490
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................. 502
System Status Display ................................................................. 520
Error Codes .................................................................................. 523
Specifications ............................................................................... 524
Software Overview 549
Software Overview ....................................................................... 550
Installing the Software .................................................................. 551
Index............................................................................................. 552
17
Power
Charging the battery Î p.42
Battery level Î p.54
Battery information
check Î p.482
Household power outlet Î p.483
Auto power off Î p.76
Card
Formatting Î p.74
Recording function Î p.152
Selecting card Î p.154
Release shutter without
card Î p.50
Lens
Attaching Î p.59
Detaching Î p.60
Basic Settings
Language Î p.58
Date/Time/Zone Î p.55
Beeper Î p.76
Copyright information Î p.208
Clear all camera settings Î p.77
Viewfinder
Dioptric adjustment Î p.61
Eyepiece shutter Î p.258
Electronic level Î p.83
Grid Î p.81
Information display
in viewfinder Î p.84
Focusing Screen
Î p.433
LCD monitor
Brightness adjustment Î p.389
Electronic level Î p.82
LV touch control Î p.283
Help Î p.85
AF
AF operation Î p.88
AF area selection mode Î p.91
AF point selection Î p.94
AF point registration Î p.448
Lens group Î p.102
AI Servo AF
characteristics Î p.113
EOS iTR AF Î p.127
Customizing
AF functions Î p.122
AF point brightness Î p.136
AF Microadjustment Î p.138
Manual focusing Î p.145
Metering
Metering mode Î p.238
Multi-spot metering Î p.240
Drive
Drive mode Î p.146
Self-timer Î p.150
Maximum burst Î p.161
Recording Images
Recording function Î p.152
Selecting card Î p.154
Creating/Selecting a
folder Î p.201
Index to Features
18
Index to Features
File name Î p.203
File numbering Î p.206
Image Quality
Image size Î p.155
JPEG quality
(Compression rate) Î p.162
ISO speed (still photos) Î p.163
Picture Style Î p.169
White balance Î p.177
Auto Lighting Optimizer Î p.189
Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds Î p.190
Noise reduction for long
exposures Î p.191
Highlight tone priority Î p.193
Lens aberration
correction Î p.194
Reducing flicker Î p.198
Color space Î p.200
Shooting
Shooting mode Î p.32
Multiple exposures Î p.248
Mirror lockup Î p.256
Depth-of-field preview Î p.235
Remote Switch Î p.258
Quick Control Î p.68
Multi function lock Î p.66
Exposure
Exposure compensation Î p.241
Exposure compensation
with M+ISO Auto Î p.237
AEB Î p.243
AE lock Î p.245
Safety shift Î p.424
GPS
GPS Î p.211
Logging Î p.222
Flash
External Speedlite Î p.260
Flash exposure
compensation Î p.260
FE lock Î p.260
Flash function settings Î p.263
Flash Custom Function
settings Î p.268
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting Î p.271
AF method Î p.284
LV touch control Î p.283
Magnified view Î p.290
Manual focusing Î p.291
Silent LV shooting Î p.281
Movie Shooting
Movie shooting Î p.295
ISO speed (movie) Î p.330
AF method Î p.284
Movie Servo AF Î p.331
Movie Servo AF speed Î p.334
Movie Servo AF tracking
sensitivity Î p.335
LV touch control Î p.336
Movie recording quality Î p.311
24.00p Î p.317
High Frame Rate movie Î p.318
Sound recording Î p.322
Microphone Î p.323
19
Index to Features
Line input Î p.322
Headphones Î p.324
Wind filter Î p.323
Attenuator Î p.323
Silent control Î p.325
Time code Î p.326
HDMI output Î p.338
Playback
Image review time Î p.77
Single-image display Î p.344
Shooting information
display Î p.347
Index display Î p.352
Image browsing
(Jump display) Î p.353
Magnified view Î p.355
Image rotate Î p.357
Protect Î p.358
Rating Î p.361
Voice memo Î p.363
Movie playback Î p.369
Editing a movie’s first
and last scenes Î p.372
Frame Grab (4K) Î p.374
Slide show Î p.376
Viewing images on a
TV set Î p.379
Copying Î p.382
Erasing Î p.386
Quick Control Î p.365
Image Editing
RAW image processing Î p.392
Resizing JPEGs Î p.397
Cropping JPEGs Î p.399
Image Transfer / Print Ordering
Image transfer Î p.408
Print Order (DPOF) Î p.413
Wired LAN
Î Wired LAN Instruction Manual
Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn) Î p.418
Custom Controls Î p.443
Custom Quick Control Î p.459
My Menu Î p.463
Saving camera settings Î p.468
Custom shooting mode Î p.472
Sensor Cleaning and Dust
Reduction
Sensor cleaning Î p.402
Append Dust Delete Data Î p.403
Manual sensor cleaning Î p.405
Interface
Cable protector Î p.38
Errors / Cautions
Camera system
information Î p.520
Error codes Î p.523
Software
Overview Î p.550
Installation Î p.551
Instruction Manual Î p.4
20
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Safety Precautions
Warnings: Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.
To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries, or the
product if it is damaged.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable charging
(working) temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharge time indicated in
the Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries may cause a fire or an explosion.
If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,
electrical shock or burns if you keep using it.
Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage comes in contact with your
eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without
rubbing it. See a physician immediately.
Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
21
Safety Precautions
When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery
and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent
electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, and corrosion.
Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the exposed internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, keep the battery
away from metallic items and store it with its protective cover attached to prevent
short-circuit. This is to prevent fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, and burns.
Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter
outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing fire,
burns, or injuries.
A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent fire,
electrical shock, and burns.
Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
Safety Precautions
22
•
Cautions: Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury
or property damage may result.
Do not use or store the product in a high-temperature location such as inside a car
under the hot sun. The product may become hot and cause burns. Doing so may
also cause battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or
shorten the life of the product.
Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
an injury or an accident. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the
camera and lens.
Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.
Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.
If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other
components. When using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from
excessively loud volume.
While listening with headphones, do not change the sound-recording settings. Doing
so may cause a blast of loud sound that will hurt your ears.
23
Camera Care
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon
Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a clean, well-wrung wet
cloth.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
Use only a commercially-available blower to blow away dust when it adheres
to the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, focusing screen, etc. Do not use
cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For
stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
malfunction.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
Handling Precautions
Handling Precautions
24
If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera
yourself and make sure it is working properly.
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.
If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead
pixels displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less
pixels. Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images
recorded.
If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
The LCD monitor display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures, or
look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
25
Handling Precautions
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a case.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the
lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to
avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
26
Nomenclature
Mirror (p.256, 405)
Movie shooting
microphone (p.296)
Lens lock pin
Lens release
button (p.60)
Lens mount
Tripod socket
Contacts (p.25)
Serial No.
Vertical-grip depth-of-field
preview button (p.67, 235)
Vertical-grip Multi-function button 2
(p.67, 445)
Accessory positioning hole
Vertical-grip shutter button (p.67, 62)
Vertical-grip Main Dial (p.67, 63)
<B> Vertical-grip AF
area selection/
Multi function/FE Lock/
Multi-spot metering button
(p.67, 93/445/260/240)
Vertical-grip On/
Off switch (p.67)
Grip
Shutter button (p.62)
Self-timer lamp (p.150)
Multi function button 2 (p.445)
Depth-of-field preview button (p.235)
Lens mount index (p.59)
Body cap (p.59)
Hand strap mount (p.484)
27
Nomenclature
<B> White balance selection button
(p.177)
<U> LCD panel illumination button
(p.67)
Hot shoe
Flash sync contacts
Eyecup
(p.61)
LCD monitor
(p.71, 272, 296,
344, 389)
<Q> Quick Control
button (p.68, 279,
310, 365)
Touch pad (p.66, 325)
Speaker (p.364, 369)
<p> Vertical-grip AF start
button (p.62, 67, 89, 274)
<S> Vertical-grip AF point
selection button (p.67, 93, 94)
<O>
Exposure compensation/
Aperture setting button (p.241/236)
<B> AF area selection/
Multi function/FE Lock/
Multi-spot metering button
(p.93/445/260/240)
<i> ISO speed setting
button (p.163, 301)
<6> Main Dial
(p.63)
Strap mount (p.37)
<0> Setting
button (p.71)
<5> Quick Control
Dial (p.64)
Terminal cover
<9> Vertical-grip
Multi-controller
(p.65, 67)
<A> Vertical-grip AE
lock button (p.67, 245)
<F> Remote control
terminal (N3 type)
(p.258)
<9> Multi-controller
(p.65)
Nomenclature
28
<Q> Flash exposure
compensation/Metering mode
selection button (p.260/
238
)
<W> Shooting mode
selection button
(p.228, 272, 296)
<o>
Drive mode selection/
AF operation/AF method
selection button
(p.146/88/284)
<h> AEB setting
button (p.
243
)
System
extension
mounting hole
Terminal cover
System extension terminal
<Y> External microphone
IN/Line input terminal (p.323)
<n> Headphone terminal (p.324)
<D> PC terminal (p.261)
<F> Ethernet RJ-45 terminal
(9
Wired LAN Instruction Manual)
<Z> HDMI mini OUT
terminal (p.379)
<C> Digital terminal
(p.408)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.61)
Viewfinder eyepiece
Eyepiece shutter
lever (p.258)
<S> AF point
selection button
(p.93, 94)
<A> AE lock
button (p.245)
<p> AF start
button (p.62, 89, 274)
<A> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch
(p.272/295)
<0> Start/Stop button
(p.272, 296)
Top LCD panel (p.32, 33)
When connecting the interface cable to a digital terminal, use the provided
cable protector (p.38).
29
Nomenclature
<B> Info button
(p.275, 305, 344, 478)
<M> Menu
button (p.71)
Strap mount
(p.37)
<Y>
Network lamp
(9 Wired LAN
Instruction
Manual)
Battery release
handle (p.47, 483)
Battery (p.42, 47)
<x> Playback button
(p.344)
<H> Card/Image size
selection button
(p.154/155)
<u> Index/Magnify/
Reduce button
(p.352/355/290)
Rear LCD panel (p.34)
<L> Erase button (p.386)
<J/K> Protect/Voice memo button
(p.358/363)
Voice memo microphone (p.363)
Power/Multi function lock
switch (p.53/66)
Card slot cover release
handle (p.49)
Access lamp
(p.51)
CFast card
(Card 2)
eject button
(p.49)
CF card
(Card 1)
eject button
(p.49)
Card slot cover
(p.49)
CFast card (Card 2) slot
(p.49)
CF card (Card 1) slot
(p.49)
<V> Focal plane mark
Battery compartment cap (p.47)
Nomenclature
30
Viewfinder Information
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
* The AF points light up in red.
Electronic level (p.83)
Spot metering circle (p.239)
Focusing screen (p.433)
Grid (p.81)
Metering mode
(p.238)
Shooting mode
(p.32)
White balance (p.177)
Drive mode (p.146)
AF operation (p.88)
<z> Warning icon (p.436) <i> AF status
indicator (p.90)
<z> Battery
level (p.54)
<1> RAW icon
(p.159)
<p> JPEG icon
(p.159)
Max. burst (p.161)
Number of
remaining multiple
exposures (p.250)
Exposure level
indicator
(Metering/Flash
exposure levels)
Flicker detection
(p.198)
<S> AF point
<O> Spot AF point
(p.96)
Area AF frame (p.98)
Large Zone AF frame (p.98)
Overexposure
Flash overexposure
Exposure level
Exposure level/Flash
exposure compensation/
Multi-spot metering
Flash underexposure
Underexposure
Exposure level
scale
: 1 stop
: 1/3 stop
Standard
exposure index
31
Nomenclature
<i> ISO speed
(p.163)
Manual exposure
<A>AE lock (p.245)
AEB in-progress (p.243)
Multi-spot metering (p.240)
<D> Flash-ready (p.260)
Improper FE lock warning
<d>FE lock (p.260)
FEB in-progress (p.267)
<e> High-speed sync (p.267)
AF point selection
([ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
([ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2/1,2)
Card full warning (Full 1/2/1,2)
Shutter speed (p.231, 236)
Bulb (buLb) (p.246)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error codes (Err)
Aperture (p.233, 236)
AEB increment (p.243)
Dust Delete Data acquisition (- -)
Exposure level indicator (Set level)
Exposure compensation amount (p.241)
AEB range (p.243)
Possible shots
Card full warning (Full)
Card error warning (Err)
Error code number
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.193)
ISO speed (p.163)
Dust Delete Data acquisition
(- - - - - )
<e> AF status indicator (p.137)
<o> Focus indicator (p.89)
Nomenclature
32
Top LCD Panel
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Shutter speed
Bulb (buLb)
Bulb exposure time (min.:sec.)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
No card warning (Card)
Error codes (Err)
Shooting mode
dProgram AE
(p.228, 296)
fAperture-priority AE
(p.233, 298)
aManual exposure
(p.236, 301)
sShutter-priority AE
(p.231, 297)
w1/w2/w3
Custom shooting mode
(p.472)
Aperture
AEB increment
Dust Delete Data acquisition (- -)
AF point selection
([ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
([ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2/1,2)
Card full warning (Full 1/2/1,2)
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time (Hours)
Custom white balance
Acquisition display ([ * ])
Card full warning (Full)
Card error warning (Err)
Error code number
Remaining images to record
AF operation (p.88)
X One-Shot AF
Z AI Servo AF
Metering mode (p.238)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted average metering
<N> Auto Lighting Optimizer
(p.189)
<u> White balance correction
(p.186)
<2> Mirror lockup (p.256)
33
Nomenclature
<i> ISO speed (p.163)
<A> Highlight tone priority
(p.193)
White balance (p.177)
QAuto: Ambience
priority
QwAuto: White priority
WDaylight
EShade
RCloudy
YTungsten light
UWhite fluorescent
light
IFlash
OCustom
PColor temperature/
Personal white
balance
<0> Monochrome
shooting (p.170)
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.260) Exposure level indicator (Set level)
Exposure compensation amount
(p.241, 237)
AEB range (p.243)
Flash exposure compensation amount
(p.260)
<h> AEB (p.243)
Battery level (p.54)
<P> Multiple-exposure
shooting (p.248)
ISO speed
Color temperature
Custom white balance number
Personal white balance (PC-*)
Dust Delete Data acquisition (- - - - -)
Drive mode (p.146)
uSingle shooting
oHigh-speed continuous
shooting
pLow-speed continuous
shooting
6Silent single shooting
6o Silent HS continuous
shooting
6p Silent LS continuous
shooting
k10 sec. self-timer
l2 sec. self-timer
Nomenclature
34
Rear LCD Panel
*1: Appears when the built-in GPS is used.
*2: Appears when the camera is connected to a wired LAN.
*3: Appears when a computer or smartphone is connected.
*4: Appears when the camera is connected to a wireless LAN via Wireless File
Transmitter WFT-E8/WFT-E6.
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
<J> CFast card (Card 2)
selection icon (p.50)
<f> CF card (Card 1)
indicator (p.50)
<J> CF card (Card 1)
selection icon (p.50)
Image size (p.155)
3Large
KMedium1
5Medium2
6Small
1RAW
41 Medium RAW
61 Small RAW
Folder number (p.201)
File number (p.206)
<D> Wireless LAN
connection*4
<J> Data transfer
icon*3
<F> Wired LAN
connection*2
<x> Logging function
<r> GPS acquisition status*1
<g> CFast card (Card 2) indicator (p.50)
35
Nomenclature
Battery Pack LP-E19
Protective cover
Battery release
handle
Contacts
Lock lever
To charge the provided Battery Pack LP-E19, use the provided Battery
Charger LC-E19 (p.36). Battery Pack LP-E19 cannot be charged with
Battery Charger LC-E4N/LC-E4.
Battery Pack LP-E19 is also compatible with cameras that use Battery Pack
LP-E4N/LP-E4.
Nomenclature
36
Battery Charger LC-E19
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E19 (p.42).
Charge lamp/Performance check
lamp/Discharge time lamp
Calibration (Discharge) lamp
Battery slot
Power cord socket
Power cord
Protective covers (2)
Contacts
Performance
check button/
Calibration button
Provided Battery Charger LC-E19 can also charge Battery Pack LP-E4N/
LP-E4.
37
Nomenclature
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the
strap to take up any slack and make sure the
strap will not loosen from the buckle.
Attaching the Strap
Nomenclature
38
When connecting the camera to a computer or the Connect Station, use
the provided interface cable or one from Canon (shown in the System
Map on page 485).
When connecting the interface cable, also use the provided cable
protector. Using the cable protector prevents the cable from accidental
disconnection and the terminal from getting damaged.
Using the Provided Interface Cable and a Genuine HDMI Cable
(sold separately)
Using the Cable Protector
Provided interface cable
Clamp
12
34
Cable protector
HDMI cable (sold separately)
5
39
Nomenclature
Using a Genuine Interface Cable (sold separately)
If you use a genuine interface cable (sold
separately, p.485), run the cable through
the clamp before attaching the clamp to the
cable protector.
Clamp
To connect the camera to a TV set, using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) is recommended. Using the cable protector is also
recommended when connecting an HDMI cable.
Connecting interface cable without using the cable protector may
damage the digital terminal.
Do not use a USB 2.0 cable equipped with a Micro-B plug. It may
damage the camera’s digital terminal.
As shown in the lower-right illustration for step 4, check that the interface
cable is securely attached to the digital terminal.
40
41
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and the basic camera operations.
42
1
Connect the charger to a power outlet.
Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the power plug into
a power outlet.
When no battery is attached, all the
indicator lamps will be off.
2Remove the protective cover.
As shown in the illustration, detach
the charger’s protective cover
(provided) and the battery’s
protective cover (provided).
3Recharge the battery.
Slide the battery into the charger’s
slot as shown by the arrow, and make
sure it is securely attached.
You can attach the battery to either
slot or slot .
XCharging will start and the charge
lamp will blink or light up in green.
XWhen all three charge lamps light
up in green (50%/80%/100%), the
charging is complete.
To recharge a fully exhausted battery at room temperature (23
°
C/
73
°
F), it takes approx. 2 hr. 50 min. for the LP-E19 and approx. 2
hr. 20 min. for the LP-E4N/LP-E4.
(The battery recharge time varies
widely depending on the ambient temperature and the battery’s
remaining capacity.)
For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take a longer time (up to approx. 5 hours only when
charging Battery Pack LP-E19).
Charging the Battery
If two batteries are attached to the charger, the battery attached first will
be charged first, then the other battery will be charged.
Provided Battery Charger LC-E19 can also charge Battery Pack LP-E4N/LP-E4.
43
Charging the Battery
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be
used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose
its capacity.
After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
When not using the battery and charger, attach the protective covers
provided.
Use the battery in an ambient temperature range of 0°C - 45°C /
32°F - 113°F.
To attain best battery performance, an ambient temperature of 10°C
- 30°C / 50°F - 86°F is recommended. In low temperatures, battery
performance and operation time of the camera may temporarily
decrease.
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small
amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the
battery’s performance.
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
To charge the provided Battery Pack LP-E19, use the provided Battery
Charger LC-E19. Battery Pack LP-E19 cannot be charged with Battery
Charger LC-E4N/LC-E4.
Provided Battery Charger LC-E19 can only charge provided Battery
Pack LP-E19 and Battery Pack LP-E4N/LP-E4.
Depending on the battery’s condition, it may not reach a 100% charge.
Charging the Battery
44
The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/
60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available
plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any
portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can
damage the battery charger.
Check the battery performance.
While the battery is recharging, press the charger’s
<PERFORMANCE> button to check the battery’s performance level
indicated by the charge level indicator.
: Battery’s recharge performance is fine.
: Battery’s recharge performance is slightly degraded.
: Purchasing a new battery is recommended.
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.44, 482) and purchase
a new battery.
45
Charging the Battery
This is a recommendation that you calibrate (discharge) the battery
so that the camera can accurately determine its capacity and display
its battery level accurately.
It is recommended that you perform calibration if the <CAL> lamp
blinks in green. If you want to just recharge the battery, you can let
the battery start recharging automatically after approx. 10 sec.
If you want to do the calibration, press the <CALIBRATE> button
while the <CAL> lamp is blinking in green. When the <CAL> lamp
lights up in green, the battery will start to discharge.
After the battery is finished discharging, the battery will start
recharging automatically. Note that the less depleted the battery, the
longer the discharging will take. The <14h>, <4h>, and <2h> figures
respectively indicate the approximate number of hours it will take to
complete the power discharge. If the <14h> indicator blinks in green,
it will take approx. 4 up to approx. 16 hours to complete the
discharge.
The calibration (power discharge) will completely drain the battery’s
power. Therefore, it will take approx. 2 hr. 50 min. to fully charge the
LP-E19. If you want to stop the calibration before it is completed and
start recharging the battery, remove the battery from the charger and
attach it again.
The <CAL> lamp blinks
If the battery is recharged and used repeatedly without calibration, the
battery level (p.54) may not be displayed accurately.
Although one battery can be recharged and another calibrated at the
same time, two batteries cannot be recharged or calibrated at the same
time.
For battery calibration, performing with a battery nearly exhausted is
recommended. When calibrating a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19, it
will take approx. 18 hr. 50 min. before calibration is complete and the
battery is recharged. With the same charge status, it will take approx. 15
hr. 20 min. with the LP-E4N, and approx. 14 hr. 20 min. with the LP-E4.
Charging the Battery
46
If the charging starts and only the lamp with the <100%> mark lights
up in green right away, it means the battery’s internal temperature is
outside the required temperature range. The battery will start
recharging automatically when the internal temperature is within the
range of 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F.
When two batteries are attached to the charger and only the lamp
with the <100%> mark on the second battery side lights up in green,
it indicates that it is in a waiting status.
The charger cannot charge batteries other than the provided LP-E19
and LP-E4N/LP-E4. The three charge lamps and <CAL> lamp will
blink in green.
While charging a battery, if the three charge lamps blink in green
consecutively or if they blink consecutively in green with the <CAL>
lamp blinking in green, remove the battery from the charger. Contact
your dealer or the nearest Canon Service Center.
If the three charge lamps blink during calibration, remove the battery
from the charger. Contact your dealer or the nearest Canon Service
Center.
Right after attaching the battery, only the lamp with
the <100%> mark lights up
All three charge lamps blink
47
Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19 or LP-E4N/LP-E4 into the
camera.
The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is
installed, and darkens when the battery is removed. Also, when
the camera has no battery, the viewfinder image will look blurred
and you cannot focus.
1Remove the battery compartment
cap.
2Insert the battery.
Insert the battery firmly all the way,
and turn the battery release handle
as shown by the arrow.
Installing and Removing the Battery
Installing the Battery
If the battery’s rubber lining (to repel water) is dirty, use a
moist cotton swab to wipe it clean.
Rubber lining
When using a battery that has not been used in the camera before, it
may take some time for the camera to turn on.
The camera cannot use batteries other than the provided Battery Pack
LP-E19 or LP-E4N/LP-E4.
Installing and Removing the Battery
48
Turn the battery release handle
and take out the battery.
Check that the power switch is set to
<2> (p.53).
Flip out the battery release handle,
turn it as shown by the arrow, and pull
it out.
To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
provided protective cover (p.42) to
the battery.
When not using the camera, attach
the battery compartment cap (p.29).
The Battery Pack LP-E19 (provided) or the Battery Pack LP-E4N/LP-E4
can be used with the camera. The camera can also use the household
power outlet accessories (sold separately, p.483).
Note that the maximum continuous shooting speed will vary depending
on the battery (power source), shooting conditions (viewfinder shooting
or Live View shooting), ISO speed, battery level, battery temperature,
etc. For details, see page 148.
Removing the Battery
Compatible Batteries
49
You can use CF cards and CFast cards with this camera. Images can
be recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera.
If cards are inserted in both slots, you can select which card to record
images to or record the same images simultaneously on both cards
(p.152).
1Open the cover.
Lift the card slot cover release handle
and turn it in the direction of the arrow
to open the cover.
2Insert the card.
The left slot is for CF cards, and the
right slot is for CFast cards.
The CF card is [f] (Card 1) and the
CFast card is [g] (Card 2).
With the CF card’s label side
facing you, insert the end with the
small holes into the camera. If the
card is inserted in the wrong way,
it may damage the camera.
XThe CF card eject button (gray) will
stick out.
Insert the CFast card into the slot,
with the smaller of the two grooves
on its edge facing down, and push
in the card. If the card is inserted in
the wrong way, it may damage the
camera.
XThe CFast card eject button (orange)
will stick out.
Installing and Removing the Card
Installing the Card
Cover release handle
CF card (Card 1)
CFast card (Card 2)
Smaller groove
Installing and Removing the Card
50
3 Close the cover.
Press the cover until it snaps shut.
4
Set the power switch to <
1
>
(p.53)
.
XThe number of possible shots will be
displayed on the top LCD panel.
XThe rear LCD panel will indicate
which card(s) has been installed.
The images will be recorded to the
card indicated by the arrow < >
icon.
CF card indicator
CFast card indicator
Card selection icon
Possible shots
The camera cannot use Type II CF cards or hard disk cards.
Ultra DMA (UDMA) CF cards can also be used with the camera. UDMA
cards enable faster data writing.
The number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining
capacity of the card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
Even if the actual number of possible shots is 2000 or higher, “1999” will
be displayed on the top LCD panel.
Setting [z3: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.491).
51
Installing and Removing the Card
1Open the cover.
Set the power switch to <2>.
Check that the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
If [Recording...] is displayed on the
LCD monitor, close the cover.
2Remove the card.
Push the eject button to eject the
card.
Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
Removing the Card
Access lamp
Caution
During Live View shooting or movie shooting, if the red icon E appears,
do not remove the card right away. The card may be hot due to the
camera’s high internal temperature. Set the power switch to <2> and stop
shooting for a while. Then remove the card. If you take out the card while it is
still hot after shooting, you may drop the card and damage it. Be careful when
taking out the card.
Installing and Removing the Card
52
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.
Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power
outlet accessories (sold separately, p.483) are used).
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.206).
If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the
images and then format the card with the camera (p.74). The card may
then return to normal.
53
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 55 to set the date/time/zone.
<1> : The camera turns on.
<R>: The camera turns on. The
Multi function lock will take
effect (p.66).
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not function. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
Whenever you set the power switch
to <1/R> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be performed
automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>.
You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.62) to stop cleaning and take a picture.
If you turn on/off the power switch <1/R><2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after
approx. 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just
press the shutter button halfway (p.62).
You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.76).
Turning on the Power
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
3 Auto Power Off
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
Turning on the Power
54
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon <b> indicates
that the battery will soon be exhausted.
Number of Possible Shots
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19, no Live
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing
standards.
z Battery Level Indicator
Display
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20
Display
Level (%) 19 - 10 9 - 1 0
Temperature Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots Approx. 1210 shots Approx. 1020 shots
Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses
may exhaust the battery faster than others.
For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 273.
See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery condition (p.482).
55
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone
have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow
the steps below to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time
zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply
change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the
camera will automatically adjust the date/time.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
2Under the [52] tab, select [Date/
Time/Zone].
Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
Turn the <5> dial to select [Date/
Time/Zone], then press <0>.
3Set the time zone.
[London] is set by default.
Turn the <5> dial to select [Time
zone], then press <0>.
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
56
Turn the <5> dial to select [Zone],
then press <0>.
Turn the <5> dial to select the time
zone, then press <0>.
If your desired time zone is not listed,
press the <
M
> button, then
proceed to the next step to set it (with
the time difference from the
Coordinated Universal Time, UTC).
To set the time difference from UTC,
turn the <5> dial and select (+/-/
hour/minute) for [Time difference].
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Turn the <5> dial to set, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
After entering the time zone and time
difference, turn the <5> dial to
select [OK], then press <0>.
4 Set the date and time.
Turn the <5> dial to select an item.
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Turn the <5> dial to set, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
57
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
5Set the daylight saving time.
Set it if necessary.
Turn the <5> dial to select [Y].
Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Turn the <5> dial to select [Z],
then press <0>.
When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hr. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hr.
6Exit the setting.
Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],
then press <0>.
XThe date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
The date/time/zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is
exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this
happens, set the date/time/zone again.
After changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time
are set.
When using a wired LAN or wireless file transmitter to [Sync time
between cameras], it is recommended that you use multiple EOS-1D X
Mark II cameras. If you perform [Sync time between cameras] using
different models, the time zone or time may not be set correctly.
The date/time that were set will start from when you select [OK] in step 6.
In step 3, the time displayed in [Time zone] is the time difference
compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [1 min.], [2 min.], or [4 min.], the
auto power off time will be approx. 6 min. when the [52: Date/Time/
Zone] setting screen is displayed.
Automatic time update is possible with GPS function (p.221).
58
1Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
2Under the [52] tab, select
[LanguageK].
Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
Turn the <5> dial to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.
3Set the desired language.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
language, then press <0>.
XThe interface language will change.
3 Selecting the Interface Language
59
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses. The camera
cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses.
1Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
2Attach the lens.
Align the red mount index on the lens
with the red mount index on the
camera and turn the lens as shown by
the arrow until it clicks in place.
3Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
<AF> stands for autofocus.
<MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
4Remove the front lens cap.
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Attaching a Lens
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
60
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
Detaching the Lens
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
Minimizing Dust
When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
61
1Detach the eyecup.
While grasping both sides of the
eyecup, slide it upward to detach it.
2Make the adjustment.
Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
Attach the eyecup.
To obtain sharp images, hold the
camera still to minimize camera shake.
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the
other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Holding the Camera
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg (sold separately) is recommended.
Vertical
shooting
Horizontal
shooting
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 271.
Basic Operation
62
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the top LCD panel for approx. 6
sec. (metering timer/9).
Pressing Completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is
called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent
camera shake, note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press
the shutter button completely.
Shutter Button
Pressing the <p> button will be the same as pressing the shutter
button halfway.
If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway
first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it
completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes
the picture.
Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to
shooting-ready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.
63
Basic Operation
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
When you press a button such as
<W>, <o>, <Q>, or
<i>, the respective function remains
selected for approx. 6 sec. (9). During
this time, you can turn the <6> dial to
change the setting.
When the function selection timer ends
or if you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will be ready to
shoot.
Use the dial to select or set the
shooting mode, AF operation,
metering mode, AF point, ISO speed,
exposure compensation (when the
<O> button is pressed), card, etc.
(2) Turn the <6> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or top
LCD panel, turn the <6> dial to
change the setting.
Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
6 Main Dial
The operations in (1) are possible even when the power switch is set to
<R> (Multi function lock, p.66).
Basic Operation
64
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
When you press a button such as
<W>, <o>, <Q>, or
<i>, the respective function remains
selected for approx. 6 sec. (9). During
this time, you can turn the <5> dial to
change the setting.
When the function selection timer ends
or if you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will be ready to
shoot.
Use the dial to select or set the
shooting mode, drive mode, flash
exposure compensation, AF point,
ISO speed, exposure compensation
(when the <O> button is pressed),
white balance, image size, etc.
(2) Turn the <5> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or top
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial to change
the setting.
Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
5 Quick Control Dial
The operations in (1) are possible even when the power switch is set to
<R> (Multi function lock, p.66).
65
Basic Operation
The <9> consists of an eight-direction key and a button at the center.
Use your thumb to tilt the <9> in the desired direction.
Use it to select the AF point, correct
the white balance, move the AF point
or magnifying frame during Live View
or movie shooting, scroll around
magnified images during playback,
set the Quick Control, etc.
You can also use it to select and set
menu items.
For menus and Quick Control, the
Multi-controller works only in the
vertical and horizontal directions. It
does not work in diagonal directions.
Use the <B> button for AF area
selection (p.93), FE lock (p.260), multi-
spot metering (p.240), and other
functions.
To select the AF area, press the <S>
button (9), then press the <B>
button.
9 Multi-controller
B Multi Function Button
Basic Operation
66
During movie shooting, the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, ISO speed, sound-
recording level, and headphone volume (p.325).
This function works when [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h].
After pressing the <Q> button,
tap on the <5> dial’s inner ring
at the top, bottom, left, or right.
With [86: Multi function lock] set
(p.437) and the power switch set to
<R>, it prevents the Main Dial,
Quick Control Dial, and Multi-controller
from turning or tilting and changing a
setting inadvertently.
h Touch Pad
R Multi Function Lock Switch
If the power switch is set to <R> and you try to operate any of the
locked camera controls, <L> will appear in the viewfinder and on the top
LCD panel. Also, [LOCK] will appear on the Quick Control screen (p.67).
By default, with the power switch set to <R>, the <5> dial will be
locked.
67
Basic Operation
You can illuminate the top and rear LCD
panels by pressing the <U> button.
Turn on (9) or off the LCD panel
illumination by pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the
shutter button completely will turn off the
LCD panel illumination.
The camera bottom has vertical-grip buttons, a dial, and a Multi-
controller (p.26, 27).
When using the vertical-grip controls,
set the vertical-grip ON/OFF switch to
<1>.
When not using the vertical-grip
controls, set the switch to <2> to
prevent accidental operation.
After you press the <B> button a
number of times (p.478), the Quick
Control screen (p.480) or Custom Quick
Control screen (p.461) will appear. You
can then check the current shooting
function settings.
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.68). Then you can press the <B> button to turn
off the screen.
U LCD Panel Illumination
Vertical Shooting
Displaying the Quick Control Screen
The vertical grip’s Multi function button 2 and aperture button (p.26) will
work even when the Vertical-grip ON/OFF switch is set to <2>.
68
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.
The basic operating procedures are the same for the Quick Control
screen (p.480) and the Custom Quick Control screen (p.461).
1Press the <Q> button (7).
XThe Quick Control screen will appear.
2Set the desired functions.
Use <9> to select a function.
XThe setting of the selected function is
displayed.
Turn the <5> or <6> dial to
change the setting.
3Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
XThe captured image will be displayed.
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
69
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can customize the layout of the Quick Control screen. This feature
lets you display and position the shooting functions on the Quick
Control screen as desired. This feature is called “Custom Quick Control
(screen)”. For the Custom Quick Control, see page 459.
Settable Functions with the Quick Control
Custom Quick Control
Aperture (p.233)
Metering mode (p.238)
Shutter speed
(p.231)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.189)
White balance correction (p.186)
Picture Style (p.169)
Exposure compensation/AEB setting
(p.241, 237/243)
ISO speed (p.163)
Custom Controls (p.443)
Drive mode (p.146)
Flash exposure
compensation (p.260)
AF operation (p.88)
White balance
(p.177)
For the Quick Control screen, see page 480.
On the Custom Quick Control screen, if you press the <Q> button and
there are no functions you can set with Quick Control, the Quick Control
icon on the lower left of the screen will be displayed in orange.
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
70
Select the desired function and press
<0>. The function setting screen will
appear.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change some of the settings. There
are also functions that are set by
pressing the button.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
When you select < > (p.443) and
press the <M> button, the
previous screen will reappear.
Quick Control
<0>
Ð
71
You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-
recording quality, date/time, etc.
3 Menu Operations
<5> Quick Control
Dial
<M> button
<6> Main Dial
LCD monitor
<0> button
<Q> button
Menu items Menu settings
z: Shooting
5: Set-up
9: My Menu
3: Playback
8: Custom Functions
Main tabs
Secondary tabs
2: AF
3 Menu Operations
72
1Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
2Select a tab.
Each time you press the <Q> button,
the main tab (group of functions) will
switch.
Turn the <6> dial to select a
secondary tab.
For example, the [z4] tab refers to
the screen displayed when the z
(Shooting) tab’s fourth dot “ ” from
the left is selected.
3Select the desired item.
Turn the <5> dial to select the item,
then press <0>.
4Select the setting.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
desired setting.
The current setting is indicated in
blue.
5Set the setting.
Press <0> to set it.
6Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to shooting-ready.
Menu Setting Procedure
73
3 Menu Operations
Example: Highlight tone priority
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.
Dimmed Menu Items
The explanation of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
You can also use <9> to operate and set menu functions. (Except for
[31: Erase images] and [51: Format card].)
To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
For details about each menu item, see page 490.
Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.
With [54: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to
the default settings (p.77).
74
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera.
1Select [Format card].
Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
2Select the card.
[f] is the CF card, and [g] is the
CFast card.
Select the card, then press <0>.
3Format the card.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
XThe card will be formatted.
Before You Start
3 Formatting the Card
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data
to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.
75
Before You Start
The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full of images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.523).
Card’s file formats
Cards with 128 GB or lower capacity will be formatted in FAT32.
Cards with a capacity higher than 128 GB will be formatted in
exFAT. CFast cards will be formatted in exFAT regardless of
capacity.
When shooting a movie with a CF card larger than 128 GB or with a
CFast card formatted in exFAT, the movie will be recorded in a
single file even if it exceeds 4 GB. (The movie file will exceed 4 GB.)
Format the card in the following cases:
If you format a card with a capacity over 128 GB with this camera and
then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed and the
card may become unusable. Certain OS of a computer or card reader
may not recognize a card formatted in exFAT.
When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, destroy the card physically to prevent personal data from being
leaked.
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
Before You Start
76
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved.
1Select [Beep].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Beep],
then press <0>.
2Select [Disable].
XThe beeper will not sound.
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set
time of idle operation elapses. The default setting is 1 min., but this
setting can be changed. If you do not want the camera to turn off
automatically, set this to [Disable]. After the power turns off, you can
turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other
buttons.
1Select [Auto power off].
Under the [52] tab, select [Auto
power off], then press <0>.
2Set the desired time.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
3 Disabling the Beeper
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off
Regardless of the [z3: Beep] setting, touchscreen operation sound is
disabled during Live View shooting and movie shooting. However, when
focus is achieved with AF, the beeper (focus confirmation beep) will sound
depending on the [z3: Beep] setting.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after
approx. 30 min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)
77
Before You Start
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after shooting. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To
not have the image displayed, set [Off].
1Select [Image review].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>.
2Set the desired time.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults.
1Select [Clear all camera settings].
Under the [54] tab, select [Clear all
camera settings], then press <0>.
2Select [OK].
XClearing all the camera settings will
reset the camera to the default
settings on pages 78-80.
3 Setting the Image Review Time
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time
elapses.
For details on setting a Custom Function, see page 420.
Before You Start
78
Shooting Function Settings AF
Shooting mode d (Program AE)
Case 1 - 6
Case1/Parameter
settings of all
cases cleared
AF operation One-Shot AF
AF area selection
mode
Single-point AF
(Manual selection) AI Servo 1st
image priority Equal priority
AF point selection
Center
Registered AF point
Canceled AI Servo 2nd
image priority Equal priority
Metering mode q (Evaluative
metering) Lens electronic
MF
Enable after
One-Shot AF
ISO speed settings
ISO speed Automatic setting
(Auto)
AF-assist beam
firing Enable
Range for stills Minimum: 100
Maximum: 51200
One-Shot AF
release priority Focus priority
Auto range Minimum: 100
Maximum: 25600
Auto AF pt
sel.:EOS iTR AF
EOS iTR AF
(Face priority)
Minimum shutter
speed for auto
Auto Lens drive when
AF impossible
Continue focus
search
Drive mode u
(Single shooting)
Selectable AF
point All points
Exposure
compensation/AEB
Canceled Select AF area
selection mode
All items
selected
Flash exposure
compensation Canceled AF area selection
method M-Fn button
Multiple
exposure Disable Orientation linked
AF point
Same for both
vertical/horizontal
Anti-flicker
shooting Disable Initial AF point,
AI Servo AF Auto
Mirror lockup Disable
Viewfinder display AF point
selection pattern
Stops at AF area
edges
Electronic level Hide
Grid display Hide AF point display
during focus
Selected AF
point
Show/hide in
viewfinder
Only flicker
detection selected AF point
brightness Normal
Custom
Functions Unchanged AF operation
display in
viewfinder
Displayed in
viewfinder
External Speedlite control
Flash firing Enable
E-TTL II flash
metering
Evaluative flash
metering AF
Microadjustment
Disable/
Adjustment
amount retained
Flash sync. speed
in Av mode
Auto
79
Before You Start
Image Recording Settings Camera Settings
Image size 3 (Large) Auto power off 1 min.
JPEG quality 8 Beeper Enable
Picture Style Standard Release shutter
without card Enable
Auto Lighting
Optimizer Standard Image review time 2 sec.
Lens aberration correction Highlight alert Disable
Peripheral illumination
correction
Enable AF point display Disable
Playback grid Off
Chromatic aberration
correction
Enable Histogram display Brightness
Movie playback
count Unchanged
Distortion correction
Disable
Diffraction correction
Enable Magnification
(Approx.)
2x (magnify
from center)
White balance Q (Ambience
priority) Control over HDMI Disable
Custom WB data Registered
setting retained
Image jump w/6e (10 images)
Auto rotate vertical
images OnzD
Personal WB Registered
setting retained LCD brightness
White balance shift Canceled Date/Time/Zone Unchanged
White balance
bracketing Canceled Video system Unchanged
z button display
options
All items
selected
Color space sRGB
Long exposure
noise reduction Disable Custom Quick
Control Unchanged
High ISO speed
noise reduction Standard Language Unchanged
Auto cleaning Enable
Highlight tone
priority Disable Communication
settings Unchanged
Record function card/folder selection
GPS Disable
Record function Standard Custom shooting
mode Unchanged
Record and
playback Unchanged
Copyright information
Unchanged
File numbering Continuous System status
display Saved
File name Preset code
Dust Delete Data Erased
Configure: MY MENU
Unchanged
Menu display Normal display
Before You Start
80
Live View Shooting Settings
Live View
shooting Enable
AF method u+Tracking
Grid display Hide
Exposure
simulation Enable
Silent LV
shooting Mode 1
Metering timer 8 sec.
LV touch control
Standard
Movie Shooting Settings
ISO speed settings Movie Servo AF Speed
ISO speed
Automatic setting
(Auto)
When active Always on
AF speed 0 (Standard)
Range for
movies
Minimum: 100
Maximum: 25600
Movie Servo AF
track sensitivity 0
Range for H Minimum: 100
Maximum: 12800
Metering timer 8 sec.
LV touch control
Standard
Movie Servo AF Enable Time code
AF method u+Tracking Count up Unchanged
Grid display Hide
Start time setting
Unchanged
Movie recording quality
Movie
recording count
Unchanged
MOV/MP4 MOV
Movie
recording size
NTSC:
L6X
PAL: L5X
Movie
playback count
Unchanged
24.00P Disable HDMI Unchanged
High Frame
Rate Disable Drop frame Unchanged
Silent Control Disable h
Sound recording
Auto V button
function /-
Wind filter Disable
Attenuator Disable HDMI display a
HDMI frame rate
Auto
81
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera
tilt or compose the shot.
1Select [Viewfinder display].
Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2Select [Grid display].
3Select [Show].
XWhen you exit the menu, the grid will
appear in the viewfinder.
l Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder
You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and
before you start shooting a movie (p.280, 333).
82
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder to help you correct the camera tilt.
1Press the <B> button.
Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
Display the electronic level.
If the electronic level does not
appear, set [52: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
(p.478).
2Check the camera’s tilt.
The horizontal and vertical tilts are
displayed in 1° increments.
When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is almost
corrected.
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
Vertical level Horizontal level
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.
If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be
larger.
During Live View shooting and before movie shooting, you can also display
the electronic level as described above (except with u+ Tracking).
83
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder.
Since this indicator is displayed during shooting, you can take the
picture while checking the camera tilt.
1Select [Viewfinder display].
Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2Select [Electronic level].
3Select [Show].
4Press the shutter button halfway.
XThe electronic level will be displayed
on the upper part of the viewfinder.
This level also works with vertical
shooting.
3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
1° or greater
4°
1°
or greater
7.5°
7°
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.
84
The shooting function settings (Shooting mode, Metering mode, White
balance, Drive mode, AF operation, Flicker detection) can be displayed
in the viewfinder.
By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [X].
1Select [Viewfinder display].
Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2Select [Show/hide in viewfinder].
3Checkmark [X] the information to
be displayed.
Select the information to display and
press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
Repeat this procedure to add a
checkmark [X] to all the information
to be displayed. Then select [OK].
XWhen you exit the menu, the
checkmarked information will appear
in the viewfinder (p.31).
3
Setting the Viewfinder Information Display
When you press the <W>, <o>, <Q>, or <B> button,
operate the lens’s focus mode switch, or when a lens equipped with an
electronic manual focusing function is used and the AF/MF switches as the
lens’s focusing ring is turned (p.124), the respective information will appear
in the viewfinder regardless of whether it is checkmarked.
85
When [z Help] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the
feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. The Help screen is
displayed only while you hold down the <B> button. If the Help fills
more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. To
scroll, hold down the <B> button and turn the <5> dial.
Example: [21: Case 2]
Example: [24: Orientation linked AF point]
Example: [86: Multi function lock]
Help
B
Î
Scroll bar
B
Î
B
Î
86
87
2
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The AF points in the viewfinder
are arranged to make AF shooting
suitable for a wide variety of
subjects and scenes.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
88
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject.
1Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
2Press the <o> button
(9).
3Select the AF operation.
While looking at the top LCD panel or
in the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
X: One-Shot AF
Z: AI Servo AF
f: Selecting the AF Operation
When the AF area selection mode (p.96) is set to Automatic selection
AF, Large Zone AF, or Zone AF, AF is possible while using the face
detection and subject’s color information (p.127).
AF is also possible by pressing the <p> button.
89
f: Selecting the AF Operation
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
The AF point which achieves focus
flashes in red, and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder will also light
up.
With evaluative metering (p.238), the
exposure setting will be set at the
same time as focus is achieved.
While you hold down the shutter
button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the
shot if desired.
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Focus
indicator
AF point
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder
will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter
button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again
or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.144).
If [z3: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a
subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is useful
when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered by the Area
AF frame.
When a lens equipped with electronic manual focusing function is used,
after achieving focus, you can focus manually by turning the lens
focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway.
f: Selecting the AF Operation
90
This AF operation is suited for
moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you
hold down the shutter button halfway,
the camera will keep focusing on the
subject continuously.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
When the AF area selection mode (p.96) is set to Automatic
selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF
frame covers the subject.
When you press the shutter button
halfway and the camera is focusing with
AF, the <i> icon will appear on the
lower right of the viewfinder.
In One-Shot AF mode, the icon also
appears if you press the shutter button
halfway after focus is achieved.
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
AF Operation Indicator
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
The AF operation indicator can be displayed outside the viewfinder’s image
area (p.137).
91
The camera has 61 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF
area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.
You can select one of seven AF area selection modes. For the selection
procedure, see page 93.
Single-point Spot AF
(Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing.
Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
Select one AF point to focus.
AF point expansion
(Manual selection )
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and four adjacent AF points <w> (above,
below, on the left, and on the right) are
used to focus.
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
AF Area Selection Mode
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable
AF points, AF point patterns, Area AF frame, etc. will differ. For details,
see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 102.
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
92
AF point expansion (Manual
selection, surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and the surrounding AF points <w> are
used to focus.
Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of nine focusing zones is used to
focus.
Large Zone AF
(Manual Zone Selection)
One of three focusing zones (left, center,
and right) is used to focus.
Automatic selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is
used to focus.
93
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
1Press the <S> button (9).
2Press the <B> button.
Look through the viewfinder and
press the <B> button.
Each time you press the <B>
button, the AF area selection mode
changes.
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode
With [24: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the selectable
AF area selection modes to only those you want to use (p.131).
If you set [24: AF area selection method] to [S9Main Dial], you
can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S> button,
then turning the <6> dial (p.132).
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
94
You can manually select the AF point or zone.
1Press the <S> button (9).
XThe AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
In AF point expansion modes,
adjacent AF points will also be
displayed.
In the Zone AF or Large Zone AF
mode, the selected zone will be
displayed.
2Select an AF point.
The AF point selection will change in
the direction you tilt <9>. If you
press <9> straight down, the center
AF point (or center zone) will be
selected.
You can also select a horizontal AF
point by turning the <6> dial and
select a vertical AF point by turning
the <5> dial.
In the Zone AF and Large Zone AF
modes, turning the <6> or <5>
dial will change the zone (in a looping
sequence for Zone AF).
Selecting the AF Point Manually
When [24: Initial AF pt, AI Servo AF] is set to [Initial AF pt
selected] (p.134), you can use this method to manually select the AI
Servo AF’s initial position.
When you press the <
S
> button, the top LCD panel displays the following:
• Zone AF, Large Zone AF, Automatic selection AF: AF
• Spot AF, 1 pt AF, Expand AF Area:
SEL
(Center),
SEL AF
(Off
center)
95
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point
Pressing the <S> button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF
points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are
horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see pages 100-108.
You can register a frequently-used AF point to the camera.
When you use the button set with the [86: Custom Controls] (p.443)
menu’s detailed settings screens for [Metering and AF start], [Switch
to registered AF point], [Direct AF point selection], or [Register/
recall shooting func], you can instantly switch from the current AF
point to the registered AF point.
For details on registering the AF point, see page 448.
AF Point Display Indications
Registering the AF point
96
For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than
with single-point AF. Select one AF point <O> to
focus.
Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing on
overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage.
Since Single-point Spot AF covers a very small
area, focusing may be difficult during hand-held
shooting or for a moving subject.
Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.
The manually-selected AF point <S> and adjacent AF points <w>
(above, below, on the left, and on the right) are used to focus. Effective
when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point.
With AI Servo AF, the initial manually-selected AF point <S> must
focus-track the subject first. However, it is superior to Zone AF in
focusing on the target subject.
With One-Shot AF, when focus is achieved with expanded AF points,
the expanded AF points <S> will also be displayed along with the
manually-selected AF point <S>.
AF Area Selection Modes
Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection)
Single-point AF (Manual selection)
AF point expansion (Manual selection )
97
AF Area Selection Modes
The manually-selected AF point <S> and surrounding AF points <w>
are used to focus. Focusing is performed over a wider area than with
AF point expansion (manual selection ). Effective when it is difficult to
track a moving subject with just one AF point.
AI Servo AF and One-Shot AF work in the same way as with AF point
expansion (manual selection ) mode (p.96).
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. All the AF
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection. It is superior to single-point AF or AF point expansion in
achieving focus, and it is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
AF point expansion (Manual selection, surrounding points)
Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
AF Area Selection Modes
98
The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right)
for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF and all
the AF points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection, it is superior to single-point AF and AF point expansion in
tracking the subject, and it is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target is may be more difficult.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. The AF point(s)
achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are
displayed, it means they all have achieved focus.
This mode tends to focus on the nearest subject.
With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s
initial position with [f4: Initial AF pt, AI
Servo AF] (p.134). As long as the Area AF frame
can track the subject during shooting, focusing
will continue.
Large Zone AF (Manual Zone Selection)
Automatic selection AF
99
AF Area Selection Modes
When AI Servo AF mode is set for Automatic selection AF, Large Zone
AF, or Zone AF, the active AF point <S> will keep switching to track the
subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the
subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject.
With Single-point Spot AF, focusing with an EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite’s AF-assist beam may be difficult.
If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle or telephoto lens is used,
achieving focus may be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite’s AF-assist beam. In such a case, use the center AF point or
an AF point close to the center.
In low temperatures, it may be difficult to see the Area AF frame and
Large Zone AF frame.
It may be difficult to see the AF points when looking through the
viewfinder while wearing polarized sunglasses or similar equipment.
With [24: Orientation linked AF point], you can set the AF area
selection mode + AF point or only the AF point separately for the
horizontal and vertical orientations (p.132).
With [24: Selectable AF point], you can change the number of
manually selectable AF points (p.130).
100
The camera’s AF sensor has 61 AF points. The illustration below shows
the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. When using
lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster, high-precision AF is
possible at the viewfinder center.
AF Sensor
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable
AF points, AF point patterns, the shape of Area AF frame, etc. vary. For
details, see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 102.
Diagram
Cross-type focusing:
f/4 horizontal + f/5.6 or f/8 vertical
f/5.6 or f/8 vertical focusing Dual cross-type focusing:
f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal
f/5.6 or f/8 vertical + f/5.6 or f/8 horizontal
Cross-type focusing:
f/5.6 or f/8 vertical + f/5.6 or f/8 horizontal
101
AF Sensor
These focusing sensors are geared to obtain
higher precision focusing for lenses with a
maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster. A diagonal
cross pattern makes it easier to focus subjects
that may be difficult to focus. They cover the five
AF points vertically aligned at the center.
These focusing sensors are geared to obtain
high-precision focusing for lenses with a
maximum aperture of f/4 or faster. Since they
have a horizontal pattern, they can detect
vertical lines.
These focusing sensors are geared for lenses
with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster
(greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8 with an
Extender attached). Since they have a
horizontal pattern, they can detect vertical lines.
They cover the three columns of AF points at
the viewfinder center.
These focusing sensors are geared for lenses
with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster
(greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8 with an
Extender attached). Since they have a vertical
pattern, they can detect horizontal lines. They
cover all 61 AF points.
102
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group A
Although the camera has 61 AF points, the number of usable AF
points, focusing patterns, and Area AF frame configuration vary
depending on the lens. The lenses are thereby classified into
eleven groups from A to K.
When using a lens in groups G to K, fewer AF points will be usable.
See which group each lens belongs to on pages 109-112. Check
which group the lens in use belongs to.
When you press the <S> button, the AF points indicated by the mark
will blink. (The / / AF points will stay lit.) Regarding lighting up or
blinking of the AF points, see page 95.
Regarding new lenses marketed after the EOS-1D X Mark II (in the first
half of 2016), check the Canon website to see which group they belong
to.
Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.
103
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
:
Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
Group B
Group C
Group D
Lenses and Usable AF Points
104
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
If an Extender is attached (Extender compatible lenses only) and the
maximum aperture is f/8 (greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8), AF
will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
Group E
Group F
If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low-
contrast or low-light subjects.
If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (exceeding f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.
105
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Autofocusing with only the 47 points shown in the diagram is possible.
(Not possible with all 61 AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are
selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame
marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 61-point
Automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Autofocusing with only the 33 points shown in the diagram is possible.
(Not possible with all 61 AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are
selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame
marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 61-point
Automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
:
AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group G
Group H
Lenses and Usable AF Points
106
Autofocusing with only the 13 points shown in the diagram is possible.
Only the following AF area selection modes are selectable: Single-point
Spot AF, Single-point AF, AF point expansion (manual selection ),
Zone AF (Manual selection of zone), and 13-point automatic selection
AF.
If an Extender is attached (Extender compatible lenses only) and the
maximum aperture is f/8 (greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8), AF
will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines (AF points in line extending left
and right through center AF point) or
vertical lines (top and bottom AF
points adjacent to the center AF
point).
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group I
Even when AF point expansion (manual selection ) is set, AF point
expansion will be applied to the 13 AF points. If the manually selected
AF point does not have all four AF points on the top, bottom, left, or right,
it will expand only to those active AF points that are adjacent to it.
If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low-
contrast or low-light subjects.
If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (exceeding f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.
107
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Autofocusing with only the 9 points shown in the diagram is possible.
Only the following AF area selection modes are selectable: Single-point
Spot AF, Single-point AF, AF point expansion (manual selection ),
and 9-point automatic selection AF.
If an Extender is attached (Extender compatible lenses only) and the
maximum aperture is f/8 (greater than f/5.6 but not exceeding f/8), AF
will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines (AF points in line extending left
and right through center AF point) or
vertical lines (top and bottom AF
points adjacent to the center AF
point).
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group J
Even when AF point expansion (manual selection ) is set, AF point
expansion will be applied to the 9 AF points. If the manually selected AF
point does not have all four AF points on the top, bottom, left, or right, it
will expand only to those active AF points that are adjacent to it.
If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low-
contrast or low-light subjects.
If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (exceeding f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.
Lenses and Usable AF Points
108
AF is possible with the center AF point and the adjacent AF points
above, below, on the left, and on the right. Only the following AF area
selection modes are selectable: Single-point Spot AF, Single-point AF,
and AF point expansion (manual selection ).
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and high-
precision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines (left and right AF points
adjacent to the center AF point) or
vertical lines (top and bottom AF
points adjacent to the center AF
point). Not manually selectable. It
works only when AF point expansion
(manual selection ) is selected.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group K
109
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF14mm f/2.8L USM B
EF14mm f/2.8L II USM B
EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye B
EF20mm f/2.8 USM B
EF24mm f/1.4L USM A
EF24mm f/1.4L II USM A
EF24mm f/2.8 B
EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM B
EF28mm f/1.8 USM A
EF28mm f/2.8 D
EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM B
EF35mm f/1.4L USM A
EF35mm f/1.4L II USM A
EF35mm f/2 A
EF35mm f/2 IS USM A
EF40mm f/2.8 STM D
EF50mm f/1.0L USM A
EF50mm f/1.2L USM A
EF50mm f/1.4 USM A
EF50mm f/1.8 A
EF50mm f/1.8 II A
EF50mm f/1.8 STM A
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro C
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
+ LIFE SIZE Converter F
EF85mm f/1.2L USM A
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM A
EF85mm f/1.8 USM A
EF100mm f/2 USM A
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro C
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM F
EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM C
EF135mm f/2L USM A
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III C
EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus) A
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM H
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H
EF200mm f/1.8L USM A
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A*
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III C*
EF200mm f/2L IS USM A
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III A
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III C
EF200mm f/2.8L USM A
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM A
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F
EF300mm f/2.8L USM A
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C*
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F*
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM A
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM A
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F
EF300mm f/4L USM C
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
Lens Group Designations (As of January 2016)
Lenses and Usable AF Points
110
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x III I (f/8)
EF300mm f/4L IS USM C
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III I (f/8)
EF400mm f/2.8L USM A
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C*
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F*
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM A
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C*
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F*
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM A
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM A
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM C
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III F (f/8)
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM C
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x III F (f/8)
EF400mm f/5.6L USM F
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II J (f/8)
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III F (f/8)
EF500mm f/4L IS USM C
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III F (f/8)
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM C
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x III F (f/8)
EF500mm f/4.5L USM F
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II J (f/8)
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III F (f/8)*
EF600mm f/4L USM C
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F*
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x III F (f/8)*
EF600mm f/4L IS USM C
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III F (f/8)
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM C
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x III F (f/8)
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM G
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III J (f/8)
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM H
111
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III J (f/8)*
EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM C
EF11-24mm f/4L USM E
EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM A
EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM A
EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM C
EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM A
EF17-40mm f/4L USM C
EF20-35mm f/2.8L A
EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM F
EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM G
EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM B
EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM A
EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM C
EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM F
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM F
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM C
EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM A
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 G
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II G
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM C
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 G
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM G
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II G
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM G
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM G
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM G
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM G
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 F
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM F
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II F
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM F
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III F
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM F
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM F
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 G
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM G
EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM F
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 F
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM F
EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM F
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5 G
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A G
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 G
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ G
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM G
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II G
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III G
EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5 F
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 K
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM K
EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5 F
EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM F
EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM G
EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6 F
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5 F
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L F
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM F
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM F
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM A
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C**
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F**
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM A
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM A
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III C
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III F
EF70-200mm f/4L USM C
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x III I (f/8)
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM C
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
Lenses and Usable AF Points
112
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x III I (f/8)
EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM F
EF70-210mm f/4 C
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM F
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM F
EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM F
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 F
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM F
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II F
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM F
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III F
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM F
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM F
EF80-200mm f/2.8L A
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 F
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM G
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II G
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 F
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM F
EF100-200mm f/4.5A F
EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM F
EF100-300mm f/5.6 F
EF100-300mm f/5.6L F
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM F
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II J (f/8)
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III F (f/8)
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM F
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II J (f/8)
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III F (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x E
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x: Built-in Ext.1.4x used F
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III F
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x: Built-in Ext.1.4x used
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II J (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x: Built-in Ext.1.4x used
+ Extender EF1.4x III F (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x + Extender EF2x I/II J (f/8)
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x + Extender EF2x III F (f/8)
TS-E17mm f/4L C
TS-E24mm f/3.5L C
TS-E24mm f/3.5L II C
TS-E45mm f/2.8 A
TS-E90mm f/2.8 A
If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group
designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use tilt or shift function.
If Extender EF2x (I/II/III) is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
lens, AF is not possible.
When using a lens and Extender EF1.4x III/EF2x III in a combination
marked with an asterisk (*) or a lens and extender in a combination
marked with two asterisks (**), precise focus may not be achieved with
AF. In such a case, refer to the Instruction Manual of the lens or extender
used.
113
You can easily fine-tune AI Servo AF to suit a particular subject or
shooting scene just by selecting an option from case 1 to case 6. This
feature is called the “AF Configuration Tool”.
1Select the [21] tab.
2Select a case.
Turn the <5> dial to select a case
icon, then press <0>.
XThe selected case will be set. The
selected case is indicated in blue.
As explained on pages 118 to 120, case 1 to 6 are six setting
combinations of “Tracking sensitivity”, “Acceleration/deceleration
tracking”, and “AF point auto switching”. Refer to the table below to
select the case applicable to the subject or shooting scene.
3
Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
Case 1 to 6
Case Icon Description Applicable Subjects Page
Case 1 Versatile multi purpose
setting For any moving subject. 114
Case 2 Continue to track subjects,
ignoring possible obstacles
Tennis players, butterfly
swimmers, freestyle skiers,
etc.
114
Case 3
Instantly focus on subjects
suddenly entering AF
points
Starting line of a bicycle
race, alpine downhill skiers,
etc.
115
Case 4
For subjects that
accelerate or decelerate
quickly
Soccer, motor sports,
basketball, etc. 115
Case 5 For erratic subjects moving
quickly in any direction Figure skaters, etc. 116
Case 6 For subjects that change
speed and move erratically Rhythm gymnastics, etc. 117
3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
114
Standard setting suited for any moving
subject. Works with various subjects and
scenes.
Select [Case 2] to [Case 6] for the
following: When an obstacle cuts across
the AF points or the subject tends to
stray from the AF points, when you want
to focus on a subject appearing
suddenly, when the speed of a moving
subject changes suddenly, or when the
subject dramatically moves horizontally
or vertically.
The camera will try to continue focusing
on the subject even if an obstacle cuts
across the AF points or if the subject
strays from the AF points. Effective when
there may be an obstacle blocking the
subject or when you do not want to focus
on the background.
Case 1: Versatile multi purpose setting
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Case 2: Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible obstacles
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: Locked on: -1
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF
points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the
target subject, setting [Tracking sensitivity] to [-2] may give better results
(p.118).
115
3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
Once an AF point starts tracking the
subject, this setting enables the camera
to consecutively focus on subjects at
different distances. If a new subject
appears in front of the target subject, the
camera will start focusing on the new
subject. Also effective when you want to
always focus on the closest subject.
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly.
Effective for subjects having sudden
movements, sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration, or sudden stops.
Case 3: Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity:
Responsive: +1
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Case 4: For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly
If you want to quickly focus on a subject appearing suddenly, setting
[Tracking sensitivity] to [+2] may give better results (p.118).
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in speed,
setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results (p.119).
3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
116
Even if the target subject moves
dramatically up, down, left, or right, the
AF point will switch automatically to
focus-track the subject. Effective for
shooting subjects that move dramatically
up, down, left, or right.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
expansion (manual selection ), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF, Large
Zone AF, and Automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF or Single-point
AF mode, the tracking action will be the
same as with Case 1.
Case 5: For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: +1
If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right, setting
[AF pt auto switching] to [+2] may give better results (p.120).
117
3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly. Also, if the target subject
moves dramatically up, down, left or right
and it is difficult to focus, the AF point
switches automatically to track the
subject.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
expansion (manual selection ), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF, Large
Zone AF, and Automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF or Single-point
AF mode, the tracking action will be the
same as with Case 4.
Case 6: For subjects that change speed and move erratically
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: +1
If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in
speed, setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results
(p.119).
If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right,
setting [AF pt auto switching] to [+2] may give better results (p.120).
3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
118
Tracking sensitivity
Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity
during AI Servo AF when an obstacle
cuts across the AF points or when the
subject strays from the AF point.
0
Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an
obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the
AF points. The -2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the target
subject longer than the -1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take
slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different
distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when you
want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is more
responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next subject.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an unintended
subject.
Parameters
[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]
in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.
119
3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
This sets the tracking sensitivity for
moving subjects whose speed can
momentarily change dramatically by
starting or stopping suddenly, etc.
0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in
moving speed).
-2 / -1
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in
moving speed). It is effective when 0 is set but focus is unstable due
to the subject’s slight movement or an obstacle in front of the
subject.
+2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden
acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving
subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera
continues to focus on the target subject. For example, for an
approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus
behind it to avoid subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the
camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can
track dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than
with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight
movements of the subject, the focusing may become unstable for
short periods.
3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
120
AF point auto switching
This sets the switching sensitivity of the
AF points as they track the subject
moving dramatically up, down, left, or
right.
This setting takes effect when the AF
area selection mode is set to AF point
expansion (manual selection ), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF, Large
Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF.
0
Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
+2 / +1
Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right
and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to
neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The
camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus on the
subject based on the subject’s continual movement, contrast, etc.
Setting +2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point
than with +1.
However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the
subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with the
unintended AF point.
121
3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics
You can manually adjust each case’s three parameters: 1. Tracking
sensitivity, 2. Acceleration/deceleration tracking, and 3. AF point auto
switching.
1Select a case.
Turn the <5> dial to select the icon
of the case you want to adjust.
2Press the <J/K> button.
The selected parameter will be
highlighted with a purple frame.
3Select the parameter to adjust.
Select the parameter to adjust, then
press <0>.
If you select [Tracking sensitivity] or
[Accel./decel. tracking], the setting
screen will appear.
4Make the adjustment.
Adjust the setting, then press <0>.
XThe adjustment is saved.
The default setting is indicated by the
light gray [C] mark.
To return to the screen in step 1,
press the <J/K> button.
Changing Cases’ Parameter Settings
In step 2, if you press the <J/K> button, then press the <L> button,
you can revert the 1, 2, and 3 parameter settings above for each case to
their defaults.
You can also register the 1, 2, and 3 parameter settings to My Menu
(p.463). Doing so will change the selected case’s settings.
When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted, select the
adjusted case, then take the picture.
122
With the [22] to [25] menu tabs, you
can set the AF functions to suit your
shooting style or subject.
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for the first shot with AI Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
shutter release.
: Release priority
Pressing the shutter button takes the
picture immediately even if focus has
not been achieved. Useful when you
want to give priority to capturing the
image rather than achieving focus.
: Focus priority
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is
achieved. Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing
the image.
3 Customizing AF Functions
22: AI Servo
AI Servo 1st image priority
123
3 Customizing AF Functions
With AI Servo AF for continuous shooting, you can preset the AF
operation characteristics and shutter-release timing for all shots to be
taken after the first during continuous shooting.
0: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
continuous shooting speed. In low
light or with low-contrast subjects,
shooting speed may slow down.
-2/-1: Shooting speed priority
Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of achieving
focus. With -2, decrease of continuous shooting speed can be better
prevented than with -1.
+2/+1: Focus priority
Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting
speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Although
focus can be achieved easier in low-light conditions with +2 than with
+1, continuous shooting speed may decrease.
AI Servo 2nd image priority
Under shooting conditions which activate flicker reduction (p.198), even if
[Shooting speed priority] is set to [-1] or [-2], the continuous shooting
speed may become slower or the shooting interval may become irregular.
If focus cannot be achieved in low-light conditions when [0: Equal priority]
is set, setting [Focus priority] to [+1] or [+2] may give better results.
3 Customizing AF Functions
124
With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with electronic
manual focusing function, you can set whether to use electronic manual
focusing.
* As of January 2016.
: Enable after One-Shot AF
After AF operates, if you keep
pressing the shutter button halfway,
you can adjust the focus manually.
: Disable after One-Shot AF
After AF operates, manual focusing
adjustment is disabled.
OFF: Disable in AF mode
When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, manual focusing
is disabled.
23: One Shot
Lens electronic MF
EF50mm f/1.0L USM EF300mm f/2.8L USM EF600mm f/4L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L USM EF400mm f/2.8L USM EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM EF400mm f/2.8L II USM EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF50mm f/1.8 STM EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
125
3 Customizing AF Functions
Enables or disables the EOS dedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist
beam.
ON: Enable
The external Speedlite emits the AF-
assist beam when necessary.
OFF: Disable
The external Speedlite will not emit
the AF-assist beam. Useful when the
AF-assist beam may disturb others.
IR: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist
beam will be emitted. Useful when you do not want to fire a series of
small flashes as the AF-assist light (Intermittent flash method).
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on as the AF-assist light.
AF-assist beam firing
If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to
[Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist beam
will not be emitted.
3 Customizing AF Functions
126
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for One-Shot AF.
: Focus priority
The picture will not be taken until
focus is achieved. Useful when you
want to achieve focus before
capturing the image.
: Release priority
Priority is given to the timing of
shutter release instead of achieving
focus. This gives priority to capturing
the image rather than achieving
precise focus.
Note that the picture will be taken
even if focus has not been
achieved.
One-Shot AF release priority
127
3 Customizing AF Functions
EOS iTR* AF performs autofocus by recognizing faces and subject
colors. EOS iTR AF works when the AF area selection mode is set to
Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF.
* intelligent Tracking and Recognition: The function that the metering sensor
identifies the subject to make the AF points tracking it.
u: EOS iTR AF (Face priority)
The AF point is automatically
selected based not only on AF
information, but also the human face
and the subject’s color information.
With AI Servo AF, the subject is tracked while giving higher priority to
using facial information than with the [EOS iTR AF] setting. This makes
it easier to keep track of the subject than when only AF information is
available.
In One-Shot AF mode, EOS iTR AF makes focusing human faces
easier, so you can shoot while concentrating on the composition.
ON: EOS iTR AF
The AF point is automatically selected based not only on AF
information, but also the human face and the subject’s color
information. With AI Servo AF, the subject is tracked giving weight to
the information on where (AF point) focus was first achieved, as well as
facial information. The One-Shot AF operation will be the same as the
[EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] setting.
OFF: Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.
(The AF does not use facial information or the subject’s color
information.)
24
Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF
3 Customizing AF Functions
128
If [EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] or [EOS iTR AF] is set, the camera may
take longer to focus than when [Disable] is set.
Even if you set [EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] or [EOS iTR AF], the
desired result may not be obtained depending on the shooting conditions
and subject.
Under light so low that the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite emits the
AF-assist beam automatically, AF points are selected automatically
based only on AF information.
Face detection may not work if the face is small or under low-light
conditions.
129
3 Customizing AF Functions
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera
keep searching for the precise focus or have it stop searching.
ON: Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with
autofocus, the lens is driven to search
for the precise focus.
OFF: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far
off or if focus cannot be achieved, the
lens drive will not be performed. This
prevents the lens from becoming
grossly out of focus due to focus
search drive.
Lens drive when AF impossible
When using super telephoto lenses or other lenses with wide focusing
drive ranges during focus search, the focus may become blurred and it
may take more time to achieve focus next time. Setting [Stop focus
search] is recommended.
Even if [Continue focus search] is set, focus search may not be
performed when a wide-angle lens is used.
3 Customizing AF Functions
130
You can change the number of manually selectable AF points. With
Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF set, AF will be
performed with the selected AF area selection mode (Zone AF, Large
Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF) regardless of the [Selectable AF
point] setting.
: All points
All AF points will be manually
selectable.
: Only cross-type AF points
Only cross-type AF points will be
manually selectable. The number of
selectable AF points will vary
depending on the lens used.
: 15 points
Fifteen major AF points will be
manually selectable.
: 9 points
Nine major AF points will be manually
selectable.
Selectable AF point
With a lens from groups G to K (p.105-108), the number of manually
selectable AF points will be lower.
Even with settings other than [All points], AF point expansion (manual
selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points),
Zone AF, and Large Zone AF are still possible.
When you press the <S> button, the AF points that are not manually
selectable will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
131
3 Customizing AF Functions
You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your
shooting preferences. Select the desired selection mode and press
<0> to add a checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the setting.
The AF area selection modes are explained on pages 96-98.
: Manual select.:Spot AF
: Manual selection:1 pt AF
: Expand AF area:
: Expand AF area:Surround
: Manual select.:Zone AF
: Manual select.:Large Zone
AF
: Auto selection AF
Select AF area selection mode
The [X] mark cannot be removed from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].
If the attached lens belongs to group I, J or K, you cannot use certain AF
area selection modes even if you add a [X] in [Select AF area selec.
mode] (p.106 - 108).
3 Customizing AF Functions
132
You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
9 M-Fn button
After you press the <S> button,
pressing the <B> button changes
the AF area selection mode.
9 Main Dial
After you press the <S> button,
turning the <6> dial changes the
AF area selection mode.
You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point
separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
: Same for both vert/horiz
The same AF area selection mode
and manually-selected AF point (or
zone) are used for both vertical
shooting and horizontal shooting.
AF area selection method
Orientation linked AF point
When [S 9 Main Dial] is set, use the <9> to move the AF point
horizontally.
133
3 Customizing AF Functions
: Separate AF pts: Area+pt
The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set
separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with
the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the
bottom).
When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point
(or zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will be
registered for the respective orientation. Whenever you change the
camera orientation during shooting, the camera will switch to the AF
area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or zone) set
for that orientation.
: Separate AF pts: Pt only
The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation (1.
Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with
the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area
selection mode, the AF point will switch automatically for the
respective camera orientation.
When you manually select the AF point for each of the three camera
orientations, it will be registered for the respective orientation. During
shooting, the AF point will switch to the manually-selected one
depending on the camera orientation. Even if you change the AF
area selection mode to Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt
AF, Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area: Surround, the AF point
set for the respective orientation will be retained.
If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF or Large Zone
AF, the zone will switch to the manually-selected one for the
respective camera orientation.
If you clear the camera settings to their defaults (p.77), the setting will be
[Same for both vert/horiz]. Also, your settings for the three camera
orientations (1, 2 and 3) will be cleared and all three will revert to Single-
point AF with the center AF point selected.
If you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group (p.102-
108, particularly group I, J, or K), the setting may be cleared.
3 Customizing AF Functions
134
You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area
selection mode is set to Auto selection AF.
: Initial AF pt selected
AI Servo AF will start with the
manually-selected AF point when the
AF operation is set to AI Servo AF
and the AF area selection mode is set
to Auto selection AF.
: Manual AF pt
If you switch from Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,
Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround to Auto selection
AF, AI Servo AF will start with the AF point that was manually
selected before the switch. Useful if you want AI Servo AF to start
with the AF point that was selected before the AF area selection
mode was switched to Auto selection AF.
After setting the AF area selection mode to Auto selection AF with
the [86: Custom Controls] menu’s [Metering and AF start]
(p.448), [Switch to registered AF func.] (p.450) or [Register/recall
shooting func] (p.456), during shooting with Manual select: Spot
AF, Manual selection: 1 pt AF, Expand AF area: , or Expand AF
area: Surround, you can press the assigned button to start shooting
with Auto selection AF set for the AI Servo AF using the last used AF
point as the initial AF point.
AUTO: Auto
The AF point which AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to
suit the shooting conditions.
Initial AF Point, AI Servo AF
When [Manual AF pt] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone
that corresponds to the manually-selected AF point even if you switch AF
area selection mode to Zone AF or Large Zone AF.
135
3 Customizing AF Functions
During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the
outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side.
: Stops at AF area edges
Useful if you often use an AF point
along the edge.
: Continuous
Instead of stopping at the outer edge,
the selection of AF point continues to
the opposite side.
You can set whether to display the AF point(s) when AF starts, during
AF, when focus is achieved, and while the metering timer is active after
focus is achieved.
: Selected AF point
: All AF points
: Selected pt (focused, )
:
Selected AF pt (focused)
OFF : Disable display
25
AF point selection pattern
AF point display during focus
With [24: Initial AF pt, AI Servo AF] set to [Initial AF pt
selected], the above setting will also work when you are selecting the initial
AF point for AI Servo AF.
3 Customizing AF Functions
136
: Normal
: Brighter
The AF points in the viewfinder will be
displayed brighter.
k: Displayed, l: Not displayed
AF point display
during focus
With AF point
selected
Before AF starts
(Camera
shooting-ready)
At AF start
Selected AF point klk
All AF points klk
Selected pt (focused, ) klk
Selected AF pt (focused) klk
Disable display kll
AF point display
during focus During AF Focus
achieved
Metering active
after achieving
focus
Selected AF point kkk
All AF points kkk
Selected pt (focused, ) lkk
Selected AF pt (focused) lkl
Disable display lll
AF point brightness
When Large Zone AF or Automatic selection AF is set, the Large Zone AF
frame or Area AF frame is displayed. Therefore, the AF point displayed/not
displayed status will differ from the table above.
137
3 Customizing AF Functions
The AF status icon indicating AF operation can be displayed in the
viewfinder’s field of view or outside the field of view.
: Show in field of view
The AF status icon <i> is displayed in
the lower right of the viewfinder’s field of
view.
: Show outside view
The <e> icon is displayed below the
focus indicator <o> outside the
viewfinder’s field of view.
You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s point of focus. For details,
see “Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus” on the next page.
AF status in viewfinder
AF Microadjustment
See page 90 for the AF operation display.
138
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder
shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the
adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” and
“Notes for AF Microadjustment” on page 143.
Set the adjustment amount manually by repeatedly making
adjustments, shooting, and checking the results until the desired result
is achieved. During AF, regardless of the lens used, the point of focus
will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
1Select [AF Microadjustment].
Under the [25] tab, select [AF
Microadjustment], then press <0>.
2Select [All by same amount].
3Press the <B> button.
XThe [All by same amount] screen
will appear.
3
Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
Adjust All by Same Amount
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment
only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent
accurate focusing from being achieved.
139
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
4Make the adjustment.
Set the adjustment amount. The
adjustable range is ±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
After making the adjustment, press
<0>.
Select [All by same amount], then
press <0>.
5Check the result of the
adjustment.
Take a picture and play back the
image (p.344) to check the
adjustment result.
If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
If [All by same amount] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be
possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
140
You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment
in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.
When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the
point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
Set the adjustment manually by repeatedly making adjustments,
shooting, and checking the results until the desired result is achieved. If
you use a zoom lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle (W) and
telephoto (T) ends.
1Select [Adjust by lens].
2Press the <B> button.
XThe [Adjust by lens] screen will
appear.
3Check and change the lens
information.
Displaying the Lens Information
Press the <Q> button.
XThe screen will show the lens name
and a 10-digit serial number. When
the serial number is displayed, select
[OK] and go to step 4.
If the lens’s serial number cannot be
confirmed, “0000000000” will be
displayed. In this case, enter the
number by following the instructions
on the next page.
Regarding the asterisk “ * ” displayed
in front of some lens serial numbers,
see the next page.
Adjust by Lens
Registered number
141
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
Entering the Serial Number
Select the digit to be entered, then
press <0> so <r> is displayed.
Enter the number, then press <0>.
After entering all the digits, select
[OK].
Lens Serial Number
In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial
number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.
Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain displayed.
The serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number
displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a malfunction.
If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers.
If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last
ten digits.
The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.
Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a
lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.
If [Adjust by lens] is selected and an Extender is used, the adjustment
will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.
If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After
you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you
can register another lens.
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
142
4Make the adjustment.
For a zoom lens, select the wide-
angle (W) or telephoto (T) end.
Pressing <0> will turn off the purple
frame and make the adjustment
possible.
Set the adjustment amount, then
press <0>. The adjustable range is
±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
For a zoom lens, repeat this
procedure and adjust it for the wide-
angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
After completing the adjustment,
press the <M> button to return to
the screen in step 1.
Select [Adjust by lens], then press
<0>.
5Check the result of the
adjustment.
Take a picture and play back the
image (p.344) to check the
adjustment result.
If the shooting result comes out with focus in front of the targeted
point, adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it comes out with focus behind
the targeted point, adjust toward the “-: ” side.
If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
Single focal length lens
Zoom lens
143
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
When [ Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the
<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [All by same
amount] and [Adjust by lens].
Clearing All AF Microadjustments
When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the
AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments
made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or
telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the
intermediate range.
General Cautions for AF Microadjustment
The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject
conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.
Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not
be achieved at the suitable position.
The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum
aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus
repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.
The adjustment will not be applied to AF during Live View shooting or
movie shooting.
The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings
(p.77). However, the setting itself will be [Disable].
Notes for AF Microadjustment
It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will
shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.
Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.
To check the result of the adjustment, set the image size to JPEG 3
(Large) and the JPEG quality (compression) to 8 or higher.
144
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator <o>
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Subjects Difficult to Focus
Subjects with very low contrast
(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)
Subjects in very low light
Strongly backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)
Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point
(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)
Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
Subjects with repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
Subjects with finer patterns than an AF point
(Example: Faces or flowers as small as, or smaller than an AF point,
etc.)
In such cases, focus by doing either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.89).
(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually
(p.145).
When Autofocus Fails
Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly
recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.
For conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View
shooting or movie shooting, see page 289.
145
When Autofocus Fails
1Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
2Focus on the subject.
Focus by turning the lens’s focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
MF: Manual Focus
Focusing ring
If you manually focus while pressing the shutter button halfway, the focus
indicator <o> will light up when focus is achieved.
With Automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves focus,
the focus indicator <o> will light up.
146
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the
drive mode suiting the scene or subject.
1Press the <o> button
(9).
2Select the drive mode.
While looking at the top LCD panel or
in the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
u: Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be
taken.
o(): High-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at approx. 14.0 shots/sec. maximum (with LP-E19 /
DR-E19+AC-E19 (p.483)).
Under [84: Continuous shooting speed], if you set [High speed]
to [14 (16) fps] (p.431), you can shoot continuously at approx. 16.0
shots/sec. maximum during Live View shooting.
The maximum continuous shooting speed will vary depending on the
shooting conditions. For details, see pages 148-149.
p: Low-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot
continuously at approx. 3.0 shots/sec. maximum.
i Selecting the Drive Mode
147
i Selecting the Drive Mode
6(B): Single: Silent shooting
You can shoot one image at a time while suppressing the
mechanical sound during viewfinder shooting. The internal
mechanical operation is not executed until you return the shutter
button to its halfway position.
6o(V): Silent HS shooting
You can shoot continuously at approx. 5.0 fps maximum while
suppressing the mechanical sound during viewfinder shooting (as
compared to the <o> setting).
6p(M): Silent LS shooting
You can shoot continuously at approx. 3.0 fps maximum while
suppressing the mechanical sound during viewfinder shooting (as
compared to the <p> setting).
k(): 10-sec. self-timer
l: 2-sec. self-timer
For self-timer shooting, see page 150.
During Live View shooting or when [Enable: Mirror down w/s] is set
for mirror lockup, even if drive mode is set to <6>, <6o>, or
<6p>, these silent drive modes will not further reduce the mechanical
sound. (The only reduction of the mechanical sound is the effect of the
Silent Live View shooting or mirror lockup mechanism.)
If the camera’s internal temperature is high and the drive mode icon is
blinking, the maximum continuous shooting speed will become slower to
prevent internal damage to the camera. Set the power switch to <2>
and let the camera rest for a while.
The continuous shooting speed indicated for each drive mode is the
camera’s default speed. With [84: Continuous shooting speed], you can
set the continuous shooting speed for each drive mode (p.431).
i Selecting the Drive Mode
148
Under [84: Continuous shooting speed], with [High speed] set to
[14 (16) fps] (p.431), the maximum speed for <o> high-speed
continuous shooting will be as follows:
The <o> high-speed continuous shooting speed is the maximum
attained under the following conditions: with a fully-charged battery
pack, 1/1000 sec. or faster shutter speed, maximum aperture (varies
depending on the lens)*, and no drive mode icon blinking.
* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off
when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-
5.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
<o> High-Speed Continuous Shooting Speeds
(Max. approx. fps)
Power Source ISO speed
Viewfinder shooting
Live
View
shooting
Flicker reduction
No
Flicker
reduction
With Flicker
reduction
100 Hz
light
source
120 Hz
light
source
With Battery
Pack LP-E19
(provided)
ISO 51200 or lower (at low
temperatures: ISO 25600 or lower)
14.0 11.1 10.9 16.0
H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400)
or higher (at low temperatures:
ISO 32000 or higher)
10.0 14.0
With Battery
Pack
LP-E4N/LP-E4
ISO 51200 or lower (at low
temperatures: ISO 25600 or lower)
12.0 11.1 10.9 16.0
H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400)
or higher (at low temperatures:
ISO 32000 or higher)
10.0 14.0
With household
power outlet
accessories
(p.483)
DR-E19+AC-E19
ISO 51200 or lower (at low
temperatures: ISO 25600 or lower)
14.0 11.1 10.9 16.0
H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400)
or higher (at low temperatures:
ISO 32000 or higher)
10.0 14.0
With AC
Adapter Kit
ACK-E4
– 8.0 7.7 8.0 14.0
149
i Selecting the Drive Mode
The continuous shooting speed for <o> high-speed continuous
shooting may become slower depending on the power source type,
battery level, temperature, ISO speed, flicker reduction, shutter speed,
aperture, subject’s conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, shooting
function settings, etc.
As shown on the table on the preceding page, with H1 (equivalent to ISO
102400) or higher ISO speeds (ISO 32000 or higher if the camera’s
internal temperature is low), the maximum continuous shooting speed
will become slower.
When ISO Auto is set (p.165) or when safety shift (p.424) automatically
changes the ISO speed, the maximum continuous shooting speed will be
controlled according to the conditions shown in the table on the
preceding page.
With [z3: Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable] (p.198), shooting under
flickering light will decrease the maximum continuous shooting speed.
Also, the continuous shooting may become irregular and the time lag
until the shot is taken may become longer.
With AI Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may
become slower depending on the subject’s conditions and the lens used.
The maximum continuous shooting speed may decrease if the battery
level is lower than 50% or if you shoot under low-light conditions.
If the camera’s internal temperature is high and the drive mode icon is
blinking, the maximum continuous shooting speed will become slower to
prevent internal damage to the camera. If you keep shooting and the
camera’s internal temperature keeps increasing, the maximum
continuous shooting speed will greatly decrease or the camera will stop
shooting until the internal temperature goes down. If the drive mode icon
is blinking, set the power switch to <2> and stop shooting for a while.
In low temperatures and the battery becomes extremely cold, the
maximum continuous shooting speed may decrease to approx. 10.0 fps.
If <6>, <6o>, or <6p> is set, the time lag from when you press
the shutter button completely until the picture is taken will be longer than
normal.
When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be
temporarily disabled (p.161).
150
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.
1Press the <o> button
(9).
2Select the self-timer.
While looking at the top LCD panel or
in the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
k: Shoot in approx. 10 sec.
l: Shoot in approx. 2 sec.
3Take the picture.
Look through the viewfinder, focus on
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
XYou can check the self-timer
operation with the blinking of self-
timer lamp and countdown display (in
seconds) on the top LCD panel.
XThe lamp’s blinking will become
faster two seconds before the picture
is taken.
j Using the Self-timer
The <l> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera mounted
on a tripod. This prevents camera vibration blur when you shoot still lifes
or long exposures.
After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.344) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.89) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
Even if [z3: Beep] is set to [Enable], there will be no beeping during
the self-timer.
To cancel the self-timer, set the power switch to <2>.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,
close the eyepiece shutter before shooting (p.258). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
151
3
Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style,
white balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction,
highlight tone priority, lens aberration correction, anti-
flicker shooting, and other functions.
152
If either a CF card or CFast card is inserted in the camera, you can
start recording captured images. When only one card is inserted,
you do not have to follow the procedures described on pages 152-
154.
If you insert both cards, you can select the recording method and select
which card to use for recording and playing back images.
[f] indicates the CF card, and [g] the CFast card.
1Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
2Select [Record func.].
3Select the recording method.
Select the recording method, then
press <0>.
3
Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
153
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
Standard
Images will be recorded to the card selected with [Record/play].
Auto switch card
Same as with the [Standard] setting, but if the card becomes full,
the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record
images. When the card is automatically switched, a new folder will
be created.
Rec. separately
You can set the image-recording quality for each card (p.155). Each
image is recorded to both the CF and CFast cards at the image-
recording quality you set. You can freely set the image-recording
quality, such as to 3 and 1, 5 and 61, etc.
Rec. to multiple
Each image is recorded to both the CF and CFast cards
simultaneously at the same image size. You can also select
RAW+JPEG.
If [Rec. separately] is set and different image sizes are set for the CF
card and CFast card, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
decrease (p.158).
Movies cannot be recorded simultaneously to the CF card and CFast
card. Movies will be recorded to the card set for [Playback].
[Rec. separately] and [Rec. to multiple]
The same file number is used for recording to both the CF card and
CFast card.
The viewfinder and top LCD panel will display the number of possible
shots of the card having the lower number.
If one of the cards becomes full, [Card* full] will be displayed and
shooting will be disabled. If this happens, either replace the card or set
[Record func.] to [Standard], and select the card with remaining
capacity to continue shooting.
Regarding the [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] menu’s [Folder],
see page 201.
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
154
If [Record func.] is set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], select the
card for recording and playing back images.
If [Record func.] is set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple],
select the card for playing back images.
Using the Menu Screen to Select the Card
Select [Record/play].
Select [Record/play], then press
<0>.
f:
Record images to and play back
images from the CF card.
g:
Record images to and play back
images from the CFast card.
Select the card, then press <0>.
Select [Playback].
Select [Playback], then press <0>.
f: Play back the CF card’s
images.
g: Play back the CFast card’s
images.
Select the card, then press <0>.
Using the Rear LCD Panel to Select the Card
1Press the <H> button (9).
2Select the card.
Turn the <6> dial to select a card.
The card marked with <J> can be
used for [Record/play] or
[Playback].
Selecting the CF or CFast Card for Recording and Playback
an
ar
Auto switch card
ec. separa
e
y
Rec. to multiple
155
You can set the image size (number of recorded pixels for JPEG/RAW)
and JPEG quality (compression rate).
JPEG is indicated by 3, K, 5, and 6, and RAW is 1, 41, and
61. After shooting, you can process RAW images with Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software, p.550). Note that 1 images can also be
processed with the camera (p.392).
You can set the image size in one of the two ways below.
Using the Rear LCD Panel to Select the Image Size
1Press the <H> button (9).
2Select the desired image size.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image size.
If 1/41/61 and 3/K/5/6
are displayed at the same time, the
RAW and JPEG images will be
recorded simultaneously to the card.
Turn the <6> dial to select the card
to record or play back images
(p.154).
Setting the Image-Recording Quality
H Selecting the Image Size
When [Record func.] is set to [Rec. separately] (p.153), turn the <6>
dial to select a card and set the image size for the respective card.
In this manual, the image size and JPEG quality (p.162) are specified as
the image-recording quality.
Setting the Image-Recording Quality
156
Using the Menu Screen to Set the Image Size
1 Select [Img type/size].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Img
type/size], then press <0>.
2Set the image size.
To select a RAW image size, turn the
<6> dial. To select a JPEG image
size, turn the <5> dial.
On the screen, the “***M
(megapixels) **** x ****” number
indicates the recorded pixel count,
and [****] is the number of possible
shots (displayed up to 9999).
Press <0> to set it.
Under [51: Record func+card/
folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to
[Rec. separately], select CF card
[f] or CFast card [g], then press
<0>.
Select the desired image size, then
press <0>.
an
ar
u
o sw
c
card / Rec. to multiple
Rec. separately
157
Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples
3 only
61+51+3
1 only
If [-] is set for both the RAW and JPEG image sizes, 3 will be set.
The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 in the
viewfinder and on the top LCD panel.
Setting the Image-Recording Quality
158
The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an 8
GB card.
The maximum burst is with Canon’s standard testing CF card (Standard: 8 GB,
High speed: UDMA 7, 64 GB) and CFast card (CFast 2.0, 128 GB), and based
on the following conditions set by the Canon’s testing standard: Viewfinder
shooting, <o> High-speed continuous shooting, JPEG quality 8, ISO 100,
and Standard Picture Style.
The file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst will vary
depending on the subject, card brand, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom
Functions, and other settings.
“Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the card becomes full with that
image size.
Guide to Image Size Settings (Approx.)
Image
Size
Pixels
Recorded
Print
Size
File
Size
(MB)
Possible
Shots
Maximum Burst
CF Card CFast
Card
Standard
High
Speed
JPEG
320 M A2 6.2 1160 140 Full Full
K13 M A3 4.3 1650 190 Full Full
58.9 M A3 3.4 2120 250 Full Full
65.0 M A4 2.2 3180 740 Full Full
RAW
120 M A2 23.2 300 59 73 170
41 11 M A3 18.5 370 72 94 330
61 5.0 M A4 12.7 530 100 170 Full
RAW+JPEG
1
3
20 M
20 M A2+A2
23.2+6.2
230 48 54 81
41
3
11 M
20 M A3+A2
18.5+6.2
280 53 65 100
61
3
5.0 M
20 M A4+A2
12.7+6.2
360 54 70 130
159
Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Even if you use a UDMA CF card or CFast card, the maximum burst
indicator remains the same. However, the maximum burst shown in the
table on the preceding page applies to continuous shooting.
If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image-
recording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with
the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for
RAW).
In accordance with the selected image size, the <p> or <1> icon will
be displayed on the right side in the viewfinder.
The image size icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41 (Medium RAW),
61 (Small RAW), JPEG, 3 (Large), K (Medium 1), 5 (Medium 2),
6 (Small).
Setting the Image-Recording Quality
160
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.
A 1 image can be processed with [32: RAW image processing]
(p.392) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images cannot
be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of
JPEG images with various processing conditions.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.550) to
process RAW images. You can make various adjustments to images
depending upon how they will be used and generate JPEG, TIFF, or
other types of images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.
RAW Images
RAW Image Processing Software
To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken
with this camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your
computer, update it with the EOS Solution Disk (p.551). (The previous
version will be overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot
process RAW images taken with this camera.
Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.
161
Setting the Image-Recording Quality
With Custom Controls, you can assign the image size to the <B>
button, Multi function button 2, or depth-of-field preview button so you
can switch to it temporarily. If you assign [One-touch image quality
setting] or [One-touch image quality (hold)] to one of these buttons,
you can switch the image-recording quality quickly and shoot.
For details, see Custom Controls (p.443).
The approximate maximum burst is
displayed on the viewfinder’s right
side, on the Quick Control screen,
and on the bottom of the Custom
Quick Control screen.
If the maximum burst for
continuous shooting is 99 or
higher, “99” will be displayed.
One-touch Image Quality Setting
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to [Rec.
separately], you cannot switch to the One-touch image quality setting.
The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the
camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower
and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the top LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled
temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will
increase. After all the captured images are written to the card, you can
resume continuous shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the
table on page 158.
Setting the Image-Recording Quality
162
For JPEG images, the recording quality (compression rate) can be set
separately for each image size: 3, K, 5, and 6.
1Select [JPEG quality].
Under the [z2] tab, select [JPEG
quality], then press <0>.
2Select the desired image size.
Select the image size, then press
<0>.
3Set the desired quality
(compression rate).
Select the number, then press <0>.
The higher the number, the higher the
quality will be (lower compression).
For 6 - 10, <7> is displayed. For 1 -
5, <8> is displayed.
3 Setting the JPEG Quality
The higher the recording quality, the fewer the number of possible shots will
be. On the other hand, the lower the recording quality, the higher the
number of possible shots will be.
163
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level.
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 299 and
302.
1Press the <i> button (9).
2Set the ISO speed.
While looking at the top LCD panel or
the viewfinder, turn the <6> or
<5> dial.
ISO speed can be set within ISO 100
- ISO 51200 in 1/3-stop increments.
“A” indicates ISO Auto. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
(p.165).
ISO Speed Guide
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
i
: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
ISO speed Shooting Situation
(No flash) Flash Range
L (50), ISO 100 - ISO 400 Sunny outdoors
The higher the ISO speed,
the farther the effective
flash range will be.
ISO 400 - ISO 1600 Overcast skies or
evening time
ISO 1600 - ISO 51200,
H1 (102400), H2 (204800),
H3 (409600)
Dark indoors or night
You can also set the ISO speed with the [z2: ISO speed settings] menu’s
[ISO speed] screen.
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
164
As H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400), H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800), and
H3 (equivalent to ISO 409600) are expanded ISO speed settings, noise
(dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more noticeable,
and the resolution lower compared with the standard setting.
As L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the
dynamic range will be somewhat narrower compared with the standard
setting.
If [z2: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.193), L (equivalent
to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400), H2
(equivalent to ISO 204800), and H3 (equivalent to ISO 409600) cannot
be selected.
When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure,
or multiple exposure, image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding,
etc.) and irregular colors may become noticeable.
When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
If H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400) or higher (ISO 32000 or higher if the
camera’s internal temperature is low) has been set, the maximum
continuous shooting speed during high-speed continuous shooting will
be no faster than approx. 10.0 fps during viewfinder shooting or approx.
14.0 fps during Live View shooting. For details, see page 148.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], you can use [Range for stills] to
expand the settable ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H1
(equivalent to ISO 102400), H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800), and H3
(equivalent to ISO 409600) (p.166).
Depending on the ISO speed setting, the shutter sound at the end of
shooting may differ.
165
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway.
As indicated below, the ISO speed will
be set automatically to suit the shooting
mode.
*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]
settings set in [Auto range].
*2: If fill-in flash will cause overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO will be set.
(Except in the <a> and <bulb> modes.)
*3: In the <d> mode, if you use bounce flash with an external Speedlite, ISO 400 -
ISO 1600 will be set automatically.
ISO Auto
Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting
No Flash With Flash
d/s/f/aISO 100 - ISO 51200*1
ISO 400*1*2*3
bulb ISO 400*1
If H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400) or higher (ISO 32000 or higher if the
camera’s internal temperature is low) has been set automatically, the
maximum continuous shooting speed during high-speed continuous
shooting will be no faster than approx. 10.0 fps during viewfinder shooting or
approx. 14.0 fps during Live View shooting. For details, see page 148.
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
166
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to
ISO 50) to H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800), and the maximum limit within
ISO 100 to H3 (equivalent to ISO 409600).
1Select [ISO speed settings].
Under the [z2] tab, select [ISO
speed settings], then press <0>.
2Select [Range for stills].
3Set the minimum limit.
Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
4Set the maximum limit.
Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
5Select [OK].
3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range
167
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO
100 - ISO 51200. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO
25600, and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 51200 in 1-stop
increments.
1Select [Auto range].
2Set the minimum limit.
Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
3Set the maximum limit.
Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
4Select [OK].
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also be applied to the ISO
speed safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speeds (p.424).
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos
168
You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set
automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set.
This is effective in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wide-
angle lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens.
It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
1Select [Min. shutter spd.].
2Set the desired minimum shutter
speed.
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
If you select [Auto], turn the <6>
dial to set the desired speed, slower
or faster compared to the standard
speed, then press <0>.
If you select [Manual], turn the <6>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <0>.
3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
Automatically set
Manually set
If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter
spd.] will be set to obtain the standard exposure.
This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting.
When [Auto: 0] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of
the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to
a single shutter speed stop.
169
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
1Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
XThe Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
2Select a Picture Style.
Select a Picture Style, then press
<0>.
XThe Picture Style will be set and the
menu will reappear.
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,
particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.173), you can adjust the skin tone.
3 Selecting a Picture Style
Picture Style Characteristics
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
3 Selecting a Picture Style
170
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
u Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
S Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors
and subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
U Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a
subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K
will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.175). Any User
Defined Picture Style that is not set will have the same settings as
the [Standard] Picture Style.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. Be
careful not to leave the [Monochrome] setting on when you want to shoot
photos in color again. When [Monochrome] is selected, <0> will appear
on the top LCD panel.
You can set to display <z> in the viewfinder for when [Monochrome] is
set (p.436).
171
3 Selecting a Picture Style
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] of [Sharpness], [Contrast], and other parameters. The
numerals indicate the set values for these parameters set for the
respective Picture Style.
Symbols
Symbols
g
Sharpness
AStrength
BFineness
CThreshold
hContrast
iSaturation
jColor tone
kFilter effect (Monochrome)
lToning effect (Monochrome)
During movie shooting, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and
[Threshold] of [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
172
You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the
parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or
[Threshold] of [Sharpness], and [Contrast], and other parameters
from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take test shots.
To c ust om ize [Monochrome], see page 174.
1Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
XThe Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
2Select a Picture Style.
Select a Picture Style, then press the
<B> button.
3Select a parameter.
Select the parameter (such as
[Sharpness] - [Strength]) to be set,
then press <0>.
The settings and effects are
explained on the next page.
3 Customizing a Picture Style
173
3 Customizing a Picture Style
4Set the parameter.
Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
XAny parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the
number, the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the
more the outline with low contrast difference can be emphasized. However,
noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
Parameter Settings and Effects
g
Sharpness
AStrength 0: Less sharp outline 7: Sharp outline
BFineness*11: Fine 5: Grainy
CThreshold*21: Low 5: High
h Contrast -4: Low contrast +4: High contrast
i Saturation -4: Low saturation +4: High saturation
j Color tone -4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone
For movie shooting, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot
be set (not displayed).
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter
settings of the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted
Picture Style, then shoot.
3 Customizing a Picture Style
174
Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as
[Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] of [Sharpness],
you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
kFilter effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
lToning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in the
selected color. Effective when you want
to create more impressive images.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
V Monochrome Adjustment
Filter Sample Effects
N: None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will
look crisper.
Or: Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper
and brighter.
G: Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will
look crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
175
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. Useful when you want to preset multiple
Picture Styles with different settings.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered
to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.550).
1Select [Picture Style].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
XThe Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
2Select [User Def. *].
Select [User Def. *], then press the
<B> button.
3Press <0>.
With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
4Select the base Picture Style.
Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that is registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software),
select the Picture Style here.
3 Registering a Picture Style
3 Registering a Picture Style
176
5Select a parameter.
Select the parameter (such as
[Sharpness] - [Strength]) to be set,
then press <0>.
6Set the parameter.
Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” (p.172).
Press the <M> button to register
the modified Picture Style. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
XThe base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
XIf the settings in a Picture Style
registered under [User Def. *] have
been modified from the base Picture
Style settings, the Picture Style’s
name will be displayed in blue.
If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the
base Picture Style in step 4 will clear the parameter settings of the
previously registered User Defined Picture Style.
If you perform [Clear all camera settings] (p.77), all the [User Def. *]
styles and settings will revert to their defaults.
To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, select the registered [User
Def. *], then shoot.
Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.4).
177
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will
obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be
obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light
source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
1Press the <B> button (9).
2Select a white balance setting.
While looking at the top LCD panel or
in the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
(Approx.)
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
B: Setting the White Balance
Display Mode Color Temperature
(K: Kelvin)
QAuto (Ambience priority, p.179) 3000 - 7000
QwAuto (White priority, p.179)
WDaylight 5200
EShade 7000
RCloudy, twilight, sunset 6000
YTungsten light 3200
UWhite fluorescent light 4000
DFlash use Automatically set*
OCustom (p.180) 2000 - 10000
PColor temperature (p.185) 2500 - 10000
B: Setting the White Balance
178
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is
decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and
then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look
white. With this function, pictures with natural color tones can be taken.
White Balance
You can also set this with the [z1: White balance] screen.
To switch between Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) and [Qw] (White
priority), use the [z1: White balance] screen (p.179).
To set Personal white balance, select [P: PC-*] in step 2 on the
preceding page. To register a Personal white balance to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.4).
179
B: Setting the White Balance
With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you
select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast.
If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS camera
models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).
1Select [White balance].
Under the [z1] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
2Select [Q].
With [Q] selected, press the <B>
button.
3Select the desired item.
Select [Auto: Ambience priority] or
[Auto: White priority], then press
<0>.
Q: Auto: Ambience priority
Qw: Auto: White priority
Q Auto White Balance
Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)
The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the warm color
cast of the picture may not be lessened.
When using flash, the color tone will be the same as [Q] (Ambience
priority).
180
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source. Make sure to perform this procedure under
the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
Up to five sets of Custom white balance data can be registered to the
camera. You can also append a name (caption) to the registered
Custom white balance data.
There are two ways to register Custom white balance data. You can either
take a picture and register it, or register an image already saved in the card.
Record and register WB
1Select [Set Custom WB].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Set
Custom WB], then press <0>.
2Select the Custom WB number to
be registered.
Press <0>.
Turn the <5> dial to select 1 to 5 for
<O*>, then press <0>. The
Custom WB data will be registered
under the selected number.
3Select [Record and register WB].
XThe LCD monitor will turn off, and the
selected number will blink on the top
LCD panel.
O Custom White Balance
3 Registering Custom White Balance
181
O Custom White Balance
4 Photograph a solid-white object.
Look through the viewfinder and aim
the entire dotted line box (shown in
the illustration) over a plain, white
object.
Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
You can use any white balance
setting.
XThe Custom WB data will be
registered to the camera.
To use the Custom white balance,
see “Selecting and Shooting with the
Registered Custom WB Data”
(p.183).
If the exposure obtained in step 4 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
Custom WB data can also be registered as follows:
1. Press the <B> button and turn the <5> dial to select <O>
(p.177).
2. Then turn the <6> dial to select the number under which the
Custom WB is to be registered.
3. Press the <J> button.
9 The number selected in step 2 will blink on the top LCD panel.
4. Follow step 4 above to photograph a solid-white object.
9 The Custom WB data will be registered under the selected
number.
If [Correct WB may not be obtained with the selected image] is
displayed in step 4, go back to step 1 and shoot again.
The image captured in step 4 will not be recorded to the card.
Instead of a white object, shooting a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially-available) can produce a more accurate white balance.
O Custom White Balance
182
Select image on card
1Shoot a solid-white object.
Follow step 4 on the preceding page
and photograph a solid-white object.
2Select [Set Custom WB].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Set
Custom WB], then press <0>.
3Select the Custom WB number to
be registered.
Press <0>.
Turn the <5> dial to select 1 to 5 for
<O*>, then press <0>. The
Custom WB data will be registered
under the selected number.
4Select [Select image on card].
XThe images saved in the card will be
displayed.
5Select the image to be used for
registering the Custom WB data.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
6Select [OK].
XThe Custom WB data will be
registered.
Select [OK] to return to the screen in
step 3.
183
O Custom White Balance
1Select the Custom WB number.
On the [Set Custom WB] screen,
select the number of the registered
Custom white balance.
2Select [Set as white balance].
XThe white balance will be set to the
registered <O*>.
3Take the picture.
XThe picture will be taken with the
<O*> setting.
3 Selecting and Shooting with the Registered
Custom WB Data
In step 5, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured with
the Picture Style set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure images, Frame
Grab from 4K movies, and images shot with another camera.
To shoot with a registered Custom white balance, first select the number of
the registered Custom white balance.
Registered image
You can also select the Custom WB number while looking at the top LCD
panel. Press the <B> button and turn the <5> dial to select <O>. Then
turn the <6> dial to select the registered Custom WB number.
O Custom White Balance
184
You can also append a name (caption) to the five registered Custom
white balance data (Custom WB No. 1-5).
1Select the Custom WB number.
On the [
Set Custom WB
] screen,
select the number of the Custom white
balance you want to append a name to.
2Select [Edit WB name].
3Enter text.
Operate the <
5
>, <
6
>, or <
9
> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <
0
> to enter it.
You can enter up to 20 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
4Exit the setting.
After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
XThe information will be saved and the
screen will return to step 2.
XThe entered name will be displayed
below <O*>.
3 Naming the Custom WB Data
Character palette
If you cannot enter text in step 3, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
Entering a name that indicates the location where you registered the
Custom white balance or the light source type of the registered Custom
white balance is convenient.
185
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This
function is for advanced users.
1Press the <B> button (9).
2Select <P>.
Look at the top LCD panel and turn
the <5> dial to select <P>.
3Set the color temperature.
Turn the <6> dial to set the color
temperature.
The color temperature can be set
from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in
100 K increments.
P Setting the Color Temperature
When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.
If you set <P> to the reading taken with a commercially-available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
You can also set this with the [z1: White balance] screen.
186
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same
effect as using a commercially-available color temperature conversion filter or
color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users, particularly for those users who understand the
use of color temperature conversion and color compensating filters and their effects.
1Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
Under the [z1] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
2Set the white balance correction.
Use <9> to move the “ ” mark to the
appropriate position.
B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted toward
the color in the direction of the move.
On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting.
u White Balance Correction
White Balance Correction
Sample setting: A2, G1
During the white balance correction, <u> will be displayed on the top
LCD panel.
You can set to display <z> in the viewfinder for when white balance
correction is set (p.436).
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color
temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color
temperature conversion filter.)
187
u White Balance Correction
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current
white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias and magenta/green bias. This function is called white balance
bracketing (WB-BKT). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3
levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “ ” (3 points).
Turning the dial to the right sets the
B/A bracketing, and turning it to the
left sets the M/G bracketing.
XOn the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
White Balance Auto Bracketing
B/A bias ±3 levels
u White Balance Correction
188
During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous
shooting will be lower.
Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image to the card.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
When white balance bracketing is set, the white balance icon will blink.
You can change the sequence (p.422) and number of shots (p.423) for
the white balance bracketing.
“Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
189
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
1Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
2Select the setting.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
3
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and the image is too
bright, set [Low] or [Disable].
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
When you set multiple exposures (p.248) or highlight tone priority
(p.193), [Auto Lighting Optimizer] will be automatically set to [Disable].
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and remove the [X] mark for
[Disabled in M or B modes] setting, the [Auto Lighting Optimizer] can be
set even in the <a> and <bulb> modes.
190
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker
parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.
1Select [High ISO speed NR].
Under the [z2] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
2Set the level.
Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
3 Setting Noise Reduction
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
191
3 Setting Noise Reduction
For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and
banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced.
1Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
Under the [z2] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
2Set the desired setting.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
3 Setting Noise Reduction
192
With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. During
noise reduction, shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst
indicator in the viewfinder shows “1” or higher.
Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
With [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
193
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1Select [Highlight tone priority].
Under the [z2] tab, select
[Highlight tone priority], then press
<0>.
2Select [Enable].
Highlight details are improved. The
dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes
smoother.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with
highlight tone priority applied.
3 Highlight Tone Priority
When [Enable] is set, noise may increase slightly.
With [Enable], the settable ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set.
When multiple exposures (p.248) is set, [Highlight tone priority] will be
automatically switched to [Disable].
When highlight tone priority has been set, <A> is displayed in the
viewfinder and on the top LCD panel.
194
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. Image distortion due to lens
characteristics is called distortion. And decreased image sharpness due
to the aperture is called diffraction phenomenon. These lens
aberrations can be corrected. By default, the [Peripheral illum corr],
[Chromatic aberr corr], and [Diffraction correction] are set to
[Enable], and [Distortion correction] is set to [Disable].
If the setting screen displays [Correction data not available] or the
[ ] icon, it means that the correction data for the respective lens is not
registered in the camera. See “Lens Correction Data” on page 197.
1Select [Lens aberration
correction].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
2Select [Peripheral illum corr].
3Select [Enable].
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
4Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
3
Correction of Lens Aberrations
Peripheral Illumination Correction
195
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations
1Select [Chromatic aberr corr].
2Select [Enable].
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
1Select [Distortion correction].
2Select [Enable].
Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
distortion corrected.
Chromatic Aberration Correction
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum
correction amount that can be applied with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software, p.550).
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
Distortion Correction
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations
196
1Select [Diffraction correction].
2Select [Enable].
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
3Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
diffraction corrected.
Diffraction Correction
When distortion correction is enabled, the camera records an image
range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (The image
periphery is slightly trimmed and the resolution looks slightly lowered.)
When [Distortion correction] is set to [Enable], the maximum burst
(p.161) during continuous shooting will decrease.
During movie shooting, [Distortion correction] will not be displayed
(correction is not possible).
If distortion correction is set for Live View shooting, the image corners
may look slightly different.
When you magnify the image during Live View shooting, distortion
correction is not applied to the image displayed. Therefore, if the image
periphery is magnified, a part of the image range that will not be recorded
in the actual image may be displayed.
Images with distortion correction will not have the Dust Delete Data
(p.403) appended. Also, the AF point(s) will not be displayed (p.351) for
image playback.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified with the
effects of correction.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
For movie shooting, [Diffraction correction] will not appear (diffraction
correction not possible).
With “Diffraction correction”, the deterioration of resolution affected by the
low-pass filter, etc. is as well corrected besides the diffraction phenomenon.
Therefore, it is effective even at an aperture close to the open aperture.
197
3 Correction of Lens Aberrations
The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered (stored)
in the camera. With [
Enable
] selected, the peripheral illumination, chromatic
aberration, distortion, and diffraction will be corrected automatically.
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.550), you can check which lenses
have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also
register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to
the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.4).
For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to
register the correction data to the camera.
Lens Correction Data
Cautions for Lens Correction
Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion correction,
and diffraction correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
If you use magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion
correction will not be reflected in the image on the screen. Note that the
diffraction correction will not be applied to the Live View shooting image.
The correction amount will be less (except for diffraction correction) if the
lens used does not have distance information.
Notes for Lens Correction
The effect of the lens aberration correction will vary depending on the
lens used and shooting conditions. The effect also may be difficult to
discern depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size Converter is attached.
If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable] (except for diffraction correction).
See pages 395 and 396 regarding Digital Lens Optimizer’s correction data
for when shooting RAW images.
198
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result. When you use this feature during
viewfinder shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light
source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker causes less
effect on exposure or color tone.
1Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Anti-
flicker shoot.], then press <0>.
2Select [Enable].
3Take the picture.
The image will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color tone
caused by the flicker.
3 Reducing Flicker
When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the
shutter-release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous
shooting speed may become slower, and the shooting interval may
become irregular.
This function does not work with mirror lockup, Live View shooting, or
movie shooting.
In the <
d
> or <
f
> mode, if the shutter speed changes during continuous
shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different
shutter speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent
color tones, use the <
s
> or <
a
> mode at a fixed shutter speed.
The color tone of images shot when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.
Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during
continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
199
3 Reducing Flicker
If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be properly detected.
Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to
reduce the effects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed.
Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear
intermittently.
Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected
result may not be obtained even if you use this function.
Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, add a checkmark to
[Flicker detection] in [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.84). When the
camera reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, <G> will
light up. Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is
detected, <G> will not be displayed.
If a checkmark is added to [Flicker detection] and [z3: Anti-flicker
shoot.] is set to [Disable], metering under a flickering light source will
cause <G> to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting
[Enable] before shooting is recommended.
Flicker reduction also works with flash. However, the expected result
may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.
200
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
1Select [Color space].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
2Set the desired color space.
Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compliant to Design
rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-processing
of the image with computer software will therefore be required.
3 Setting the Color Space
Adobe RGB
If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (p.4).
201
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
1Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
2Select [Folder].
3Select [Create folder].
4Select [OK].
XA new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
Creating a Folder
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
202
Select a folder on the folder selection
screen, then press <0>.
XThe folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
Subsequently captured images will
be recorded into the selected folder.
Selecting a Folder
Number of images in folder
Folder name
Lowest file number
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100EOS1D” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.207) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are always the folder number from 100 to
999. The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-
case letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space
cannot be used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same
three-digit folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”)
even if the remaining five characters in each name are different.
203
The file name has four alphanumeric
characters followed by a four-digit image
number (p.206) and extension. The first
four alphanumeric characters are set
upon factory shipment and unique to the camera. However, you can
change them.
With “User setting1”, you can change and register the four characters
as desired. With “User setting2”, if you register three characters, the
fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate
the image size.
1Select [File name].
Under the [51] tab, select [File
name], then press <0>.
2Select [Change User setting*].
3Enter any alphanumeric
characters.
For User setting1, enter four
characters. For User setting2, enter
three characters.
Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
3 Changing the File Name
Registering or Changing the File Name
(Example) BE3B0001.JPG
Character palette
3 Changing the File Name
204
Operate the <5>
, <
6
>,
or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
4
Exit the setting.
After entering the correct number of
characters, press the <M> button,
then select [OK].
XThe registered file name will be
saved.
5 Select the registered file name.
Select [File name], then press <0>.
Select the registered file name, then
press <0>.
If User setting2 is registered, select
“*** (the 3 characters registered) +
image size”.
Settings
205
3 Changing the File Name
The first character cannot be an underscore “_”.
User setting2
When you select the “*** + image size” registered with User setting2 and
take pictures, the image size character will be automatically appended as
the file name’s fourth character from the left. The meaning of the image-
recording quality characters is as follows:
“*** L” = 3, 1 “***M” = K, 41
“*** N” = 5“***S” = 6, 61
When the image is transferred to a computer, you can refer to the fourth
character of the image file name to identify the image size without opening
the image. RAW or JPEG images can be distinguished with the extension.
If you cannot enter text in step 3, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR2” for RAW images,
and “.MOV” or “.MP4” for movies.
When you shoot a movie with User setting2, the file name’s fourth
character will be an underscore “_”.
206
The captured images are assigned a
sequential four-digit file number from
0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder.
You can change how the file number is
assigned.
1Select [File numbering].
Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>.
2Select the file numbering method.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target
card (such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence up to
9999 for the images saved. This is useful when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or
in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in
the folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is
recommended that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
3 File Numbering Methods
(Example) BE3B0001.JPG
File numbering
Continuous
0051 0052
Card A (f) Card B (g)
File numbering after replacing the card
Next sequential file number
100
0051
101
0052
Card A
File numbering after creating a folder
207
3 File Numbering Methods
Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target card
(such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence from 0001
for the images saved. This is useful if you want to organize images by
cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in
the folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting
from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
Resets the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001
in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts, from 0001.
This is useful, for example, if you want to use different folders for the
images taken yesterday and the ones taken today. After the manual
reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset. (There will
be no manual reset confirmation dialog.)
Auto Reset
Manual Reset
0051 0001
Card A (f) Card B (g)
File numbering after replacing the card
File numbering is reset
100
0051
101
0001
Card A
File numbering after creating a folder
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
208
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
1Select [Copyright information].
Under the [54] tab, select
[Copyright information], then press
<0>.
2Select the option to be set.
Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
3Enter text.
Operate the <5>
, <
6
>,
or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
You can enter up to 63 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
4Exit the setting.
After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
XThe information is saved.
3 Setting Copyright Information
Character palette
209
3 Setting Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can
delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
Checking the Copyright Information
Deleting the Copyright Information
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed
entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
If you cannot enter text in step 3, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(EOS software, p.550).
210
211
4
GPS Settings
This chapter explains the camera’s built-in GPS
settings. The EOS-1D X Mark II (G) can receive satellite
navigation signals from GPS satellites (USA),
GLONASS satellites (Russia), and the Quasi-Zenith
Satellite System (QZSS) “Michibiki” (Japan).
The GPS function is set to [
Disable
] by default.
This manual uses the term “GPS” to refer to the satellite
navigation function.
When [GPS] is set to [Mode 1] (p.215), the camera will
continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals
even after the camera’s power switch is set to <2>.
The battery will thereby drain faster and the number of
possible shots will decrease. If you will not use GPS,
setting [GPS] to [Disable] or [Mode 2] is recommended.
When using GPS function, be sure to check the region of use and
use the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of
the country or region. Be particularly careful when using GPS
outside your home country.
212
Geotag information*1 (latitude,
longitude, elevation) and coordinated
universal time*2 can be appended to
images.
Shooting locations of geotagged
images can be displayed on a map on
a computer.
*1: Certain travel conditions or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag
information to be added to images.
*2: Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
You can use the GPS logging function to automatically record the route
the camera travels by logging location information at set intervals. The
location information for the route the camera has traveled can be
viewed on a map displayed on a computer.
* Certain traveling conditions, locations, or GPS settings may cause inaccurate
geotag information to be added to images.
The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set on the
camera.
GPS Features
Geotagging Images
Logging the Route Traveled
Setting the Camera Time
The GPS information recorded by the images and movies may include
information that can personally identify you. Therefore, be careful when
giving still photos or movies to other people or displaying them online to the
public.
213
GPS Features
With Map Utility (EOS software, p.550), you can view the shooting
locations and the route traveled on a map displayed on a computer.
Viewing Images and Information on a Virtual Map
Map data ©2015 ZENRIN
214
Countries and Regions Permitting GPS Function Use
Use of GPS function is restricted in some countries and regions, and
illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To
avoid violating GPS function regulations, visit the Canon website to
check where the use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
GPS function use in other countries and regions.
Model Number
EOS-1D X Mark II (G) : DS126561
(including GPS module model: ES300)
In certain countries and regions, the use of GPS function may be
restricted. Therefore, be sure to use GPS function in accordance
with the laws and regulations of your country or region. Be
particularly careful when using GPS function outside your home
country.
Be careful about using GPS function where the operation of
electronic devices is restricted.
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in
your geotagged pictures or movies. Be careful when sharing these
geotagged images, movies or GPS log files with others, such as
when posting them online where many people can view them.
GPS signal reception may take a longer time in some cases.
Hereby, Canon Inc., declares that this DS126561 is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Please contact the following address for the original Declaration of Conformity:
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
GPS Precautions
215
To acquire GPS signals, take the camera outside where the sky is
unobstructed. Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping
your hands, etc., away from the camera top.
When the signal acquisition conditions are good, it will take the camera
approx. 30 sec. to 60 sec. to acquire the GPS satellite signals after you
set [GPS] to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]. Check that [r] is displayed on
the rear LCD panel, then shoot.
1Select [GPS settings].
Under the [53] tab, select [GPS
settings], then press <0>.
2Select the mode.
Select [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
X[r] will be displayed on the rear
LCD panel.
Mode 1
The camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals
even when the power switch is set to <1> or <2>.
Mode 2
When the power switch is set to <1>, the camera will receive
GPS signals. When the power switch is set to <2>, the GPS
function will also turn off. However, if auto power off is in effect, the
camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals.
Acquiring GPS Signals
Acquiring GPS Signals
216
The GPS acquisition status is indicated
by the [r] icon displayed on the
camera’s rear LCD panel.
Constant r: Signal acquired
Blinking r: Signal not acquired yet
When you shoot while [r] is
constantly displayed, the image will be
geotagged.
GPS Acquisition Status
When [Mode 1] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at
regular intervals even when the power switch is set to <2>.
Therefore, the battery will drain faster and fewer shots can be taken. If
you will not use the camera for a prolonged period, set to [Disable].
When [Mode 2] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at
regular intervals even during auto power off. Therefore, if auto power off
is prolonged, the battery will drain faster and fewer shots can be taken. If
you will not use the camera for a prolonged period, set the power switch
to <2>.
The GPS antenna is located in front of the hot shoe. The GPS signal can
be acquired while an external Speedlite is attached to the hot shoe, but
the acquisition sensitivity will slightly decrease.
GPS Receiver GP-E1 (sold separately) and GP-E2 (sold separately)
cannot be used.
217
Acquiring GPS Signals
Poor GPS Coverage
Under the following conditions, the GPS satellite signal will not be properly
acquired. As a result, the geotag information may not be recorded or
inaccurate geotag information may be recorded.
Indoors, underground, in tunnels or forests, between buildings, or in
valleys.
Near high-voltage power lines or mobile phones operating on the 1.5
GHz band.
When the camera is left inside a bag, etc.
When traveling a long distance.
When traveling through different environments.
Since GPS satellites move as time passes, satellite movement can
interfere with geotagging and cause missing or inaccurate geotag
information even in conditions other than the above. Additionally, the
geotag information may also include the route traveled even if the
camera was used at just one location.
The battery level may be low when you start using the camera due to the
effect of the GPS function. If necessary, recharge the battery or prepare
a charged, spare battery (sold separately).
The camera can receive GPS signals even in the vertical orientation.
Acquiring GPS Signals
218
1Check the [GPS] setting.
Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
2Select [GPS information display].
XThe GPS information will be
displayed.
3Take the picture.
When you shoot after GPS signal
acquisition, the image will be
geotagged.
Viewing GPS Information
Generally, elevation is not as accurate as latitude and longitude due to the
nature of GPS.
The <A> icon indicates signal conditions. When <C> is displayed, the
elevation is also recorded. Note that the elevation cannot be recorded
when <B> is displayed.
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is essentially the same as Greenwich
Mean Time.
219
Acquiring GPS Signals
Play back the images and press the <B> button to display the
shooting information screen (p.347). Then tilt <9> up or down to check
the geotag information.
Geotagging Information
Latitude
Elevation
Longitude
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
When you shoot a movie, the GPS information at the time when shooting
begins is recorded. Note that signal reception conditions are not
recorded.
Shooting locations can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer,
using the Map Utility (EOS software, p.550).
220
The interval (time) to update the geotag information can be set.
Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will record
more accurate geotag information, it will reduce the number of possible
shots because it will drain the battery faster.
1Check the [GPS] setting.
Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
2Select [Position update intvl].
3Set the desired update interval.
Select the desired update interval,
then press <0>.
Setting the Positioning Interval
If you are in a location where the GPS acquisition condition is not good,
the number of possible shots will decrease.
The nature of GPS may cause some inconsistency in positioning
intervals.
221
The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set in the
camera. The margin of error is approx. ±0.02 sec.
1Check the [GPS] setting.
Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
2Select [Auto time setting].
3Select the desired setting.
Select [Auto update] or [Set now],
then press <0>.
[Auto update] updates the time when
the camera is turned on and a GPS
signal is received.
Setting Time from GPS on the Camera
If signals from at least five GPS satellites cannot be acquired, the time
cannot be auto updated. [Set now] will be grayed out and not selectable.
Even if [Set now] can be selected, updating the time may not be
possible due to an unfavorable timing of the GPS signal acquisition.
When [Auto time setting] is set to [Auto update], the date or time
cannot be manually set with [52: Date/Time/Zone].
If you use Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E8 (sold separately) or WFT-
E6 (sold separately) and do not want to change the time after
implementing [Sync time between cameras], set [Auto time setting] to
[Disable] in step 2.
222
When using the GPS logging function,
the geotag information of the route the
camera travels is automatically
recorded in the camera’s internal
memory.
With Map Utility (EOS software, p.550),
you can view the shooting locations
and the route traveled on a map
displayed on a computer.
1Check the [GPS] setting.
Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
2Select [GPS Logger].
3Set [Log GPS position] to
[Enable].
Select [Log GPS position], then
press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
X[x] will be displayed on the rear
LCD panel.
Logging the Route Traveled
Map data ©2015 ZENRIN
With [GPS] set to [Mode 1], the GPS logging function will continue to
work even while the power switch is set to <2>.
When [Mode 2] is set, setting the power switch to <2> will also turn
off the GPS logging function. However, the GPS logging function will
continue to work during auto power off.
223
Logging the Route Traveled
Geotag information for the route the camera travels is recorded at the
intervals set with [Position update intvl] (p.220). The log data is saved
in the camera’s internal memory by date. The table below shows how
many days’ worth of data can be saved.
Log Data Capacity by Positioning Interval (Approx.)
* Based on 1 day equivalent to eight hours worth of log data.
The log data saved in the internal memory can be transferred as a
log file to a card (p.224).
Log file names consist of the date and number (e.g. 16031800). A
log file is created for each day. If the time zone changes (p.55), a
new log file will be created.
If the camera’s internal memory becomes full, the oldest log data will
be erased, and the newest log data will be saved.
When [GPS] is set to [Mode 1], the camera will continue to receive GPS
signals at regular intervals even after the camera’s power switch is set
to <2>. If [Mode 2] is set, the camera will continue to receive GPS
signals at regular intervals even during auto power off. The battery will
thereby drain faster and the number of possible shots will decrease.
Additionally, when [Log GPS position] is set to [Enable], shorter
update intervals will drain the battery more quickly.
When you are not traveling or when GPS signals are weak, setting
[GPS] to [Disable] is recommended.
Geotag Information Logs
Update Interval Log Data Update Interval Log Data
Every 1 sec. 4.1 days Every 30 sec. 100 days
Every 5 sec. 20 days Every 1 min. 100 days
Every 10 sec. 41 days Every 2 min. 100 days
Every 15 sec. 61 days Every 5 min. 100 days
Battery Consumption During Logging
Logging the Route Traveled
224
The log data in the camera’s internal memory can be downloaded to a
computer with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.550) or downloaded from a
card after transferring the data to the card.
When you use Map Utility (EOS software, p.550) to open a log file
saved on the computer, the camera’s travel route will be displayed on a
map.
Importing the log data using EOS software
With the camera connected to a computer via the provided interface
cable, you can download the log data to the computer with EOS Utility
(EOS software). For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual
(p.4).
Transferring the log data to a card for downloading
When [Transfer log data to card] is
selected, you can transfer the log
data in the internal memory as log
files to a CF card [f] or CFast card
[g].
Note that when log files are
transferred to a card, that log data is
erased from the camera’s internal
memory.
The log files imported to the card will be stored in the “GPS” folder in
the “MISC” folder. The extension is “.LOG”.
Selecting [Delete log data] will erase the log data saved in the
internal memory. Erasing the data may take approx. one minute.
Downloading Log Data to a Computer
225
Logging the Route Traveled
When connecting the camera to a computer, use the provided interface
cable or one from Canon (p.485). When connecting the interface cable,
use the provided cable protector (p.38).
The GPS antenna is located at the top of the camera body. For this
reason, even when carrying the camera, such as in a bag, try to keep the
top of the camera facing upwards, and do not place anything on top of it.
Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible. Also, set correct
time zone and daylight saving time for the shooting location.
226
227
5
Exposure Control for
Photographic Expressions
You can change various settings of the camera as you
desire to obtain a wide variety of shooting results, by
selecting the shutter speed and/or aperture, adjusting
the exposure as you prefer, etc.
After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure settings will remain displayed in the viewfinder
and on the top LCD panel for approx. 6 sec. (9).
For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page
486.
Set the power switch to <1>.
228
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
*<d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1Set the shooting mode to <d>.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select
<d>.
2Focus on the subject.
Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
XWhen focus is achieved, the focus
indicator <o> on the viewfinder’s
bottom right will light up (in One-Shot
AF mode).
XThe shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the top LCD
panel.
3Check the display.
The standard exposure will be
obtained as long as the shutter speed
and aperture displays do not blink.
4Take the picture.
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
d:
Program AE
229
d: Program AE
Using Single Silent (p.147), mirror lockup (p.256), or Silent LV
shooting (p.281) is effective.
For continuous shooting, using Silent HS continuous or Silent LS
continuous is effective (p.147).
Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting
equipment. Mount the camera securely on the tripod.
Using a remote switch is recommended (p.258).
Minimizing Blurred Photos
If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/
number blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
If the “8000” shutter speed and the highest f/
number blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering
the lens.
Program Shift
In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer
(9) ends (exposure setting display turns off).
Program shift cannot be used with flash.
d: Program AE
230
The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.
Aim the Area AF frame over an area having good contrast, then
press the shutter button halfway (p.62). If you are too close to the
subject, move away and shoot again.
Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the
picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting
up.
The focus indicator <o> does not light up.
In the AI Servo AF mode, it indicates that the camera is focusing
continuously. (The AF status indicator <i> is displayed, but the
focus indicator <o> does not light.)
Note that focus lock (p.89) will not work in the AI Servo AF mode.
Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the
subject.
If the focus mode switch of the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
The shutter speed and aperture are blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject
due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EX-series Speedlite
(sold separately, p.260) is recommended.
When the external flash was used, the bottom part of the
picture came out unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct the flash light. If the
subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.
FAQ
231
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the
brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter
speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
1Set the shooting mode to <s>.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select
<s>.
2Set the desired shutter speed.
While looking at the top LCD panel,
turn the <6> dial.
3Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
XThe aperture is set automatically.
4Check the viewfinder display and
shoot.
As long as the aperture is not
blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
s: Shutter-Priority AE
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
Frozen motion
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
s: Shutter-Priority AE
232
If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed
until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher
ISO speed.
If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed
until the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO
speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec., “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
233
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter
speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject
brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller
aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within
acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole)
will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
1Set the shooting mode to <f>.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select
<f>.
2Set the desired aperture.
While looking at the top LCD panel,
turn the <6> dial.
3Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
XThe shutter speed is set
automatically.
4Check the viewfinder display and
shoot.
As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
f: Aperture-Priority AE
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
f: Aperture-Priority AE
234
If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster aperture (lower
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or
set a higher ISO speed.
If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower aperture
(higher f/number) until the shutter speed blinking
stops or set a lower ISO speed.
Aperture Value Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
235
f: Aperture-Priority AE
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
Depth-of-Field Preview
A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.
The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as
you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button
(p.272).
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview
button is being pressed.
236
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To determine
the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a
commercially-available exposure meter. This method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
1Set the shooting mode to <a>.
Press the <
W
> button and turn the
<
6
> or <
5
> dial to select <
a
>.
2Set the ISO speed (p.163).
3Set the shutter speed and
aperture.
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. To set the aperture, turn
the <5> dial.
If you cannot set the shutter speed or
aperture, set the power switch to <
1
>,
then turn the <
6
> or <
5
> dial.
4Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
X
The exposure setting will be displayed in
the viewfinder and on the top LCD panel.
Check the exposure level mark < > on
the right of the viewfinder to see how
far the current exposure level is from
the standard exposure level
<
a
>.
5Set the exposure and take the
picture.
Check the exposure level indicator and set
the desired shutter speed and aperture.
If the exposure compensation amount
exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display
<> or <>.
a: Manual Exposure
Shutter speed
Aperture
Bright (+)
Standard
exposure
index <a>Dark (-)
237
a: Manual Exposure
If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO) for manual exposure shooting, you
can set exposure compensation (p.241) as follows:
• Under [86: Custom Controls], with [s: Expo comp (hold btn,
turn )] (p.454).
• Quick Control (p.68)
While looking at the exposure level indicator (setting) on the bottom of
the viewfinder or on the top LCD panel, set the exposure compensation
amount.
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter
speed and aperture in order to obtain the standard exposure. Therefore,
you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the
exposure compensation.
If flash is used when ISO Auto is set, exposure compensation will not be
applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.
Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for
[Disabled in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be
set even in the <a> mode (p.189).
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared with
when the <A> button was pressed.
If exposure compensation (p.241) was applied in <d>, <s>, or <f>
mode, and then the shooting mode is switched to <a> with ISO Auto
set, the exposure compensation amount already set will still be
maintained.
With ISO Auto set and [81: Exposure level increments] set to [1/2-
stop, Exp. comp. 1/2-stop], 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be
applied with the ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the
shutter speed displayed will not change.
238
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
1Press the <Q> button (9).
2Select the metering mode.
While looking at the top LCD panel or
in the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
q: Evaluative metering
w: Partial metering
r: Spot metering
e: Center-weighted average
metering
q Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even for
backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the exposure
automatically to suit the scene.
w Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights
around the subject due to backlight, etc. Partial
metering covers approx. 6.2% of the viewfinder
area at the center.
q Selecting the Metering Mode
239
q Selecting the Metering Mode
r Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the
subject or scene. Spot metering covers approx.
1.5% of the viewfinder area at the center. The spot
metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.
e Center-weighted average metering
The metering is averaged for the entire scene with
the viewfinder center weighted more heavily.
With <q> (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked
when you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved (in
One-Shot AF mode). In the <w> (Partial metering), <r> (Spot
metering), and <e> (Center-weighted average metering) modes, the
exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter
button halfway does not lock the exposure.)
You can set the camera so that <z> is displayed in the viewfinder when
<r> (Spot metering) is set (p.436).
If [81: Spot meter. linked to AF pt] is set to [Linked to active AF
point] (p.423), spot metering linked to all AF points will be possible.
q Selecting the Metering Mode
240
With multiple spot meter readings, you can see the relative exposure
levels of multiple areas in the picture and decide the final exposure to
obtain the desired result.
Multi-spot metering can be used in the <d>, <s>, and <f> modes.
1Set the metering mode to <r> (spot metering).
2Press the <B> button (8).
Aim the spot metering circle over the area where you want to
check a relative exposure reading, then press the <B> button.
Do this for all the multiple areas you want to meter.
XOn the right of the viewfinder, the relative exposure level will be
displayed for the spot meter readings taken. For the exposure,
the average of the spot meter readings will be set.
In this state, you can set the final exposure to achieve the desired
photographic expression while comparing the exposure level
against the three marks on the exposure level indicator.
Multi-Spot Metering
You can take up to eight spot meter readings for one picture.
The exposure level retained in memory from multi-spot readings will be
deleted in the following cases:
• After the spot metering timer ends (8).
• You pressed the <W>, <o>, <Q>, <i>, <S>,
<O>, or <B> button.
Even when [81: Spot meter. linked to AF pt] is set to [Linked to
active AF point] (p.423), multi-spot metering can be performed.
241
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f>
shooting modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up
to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments, the exposure compensation
indicator in the viewfinder and on the top LCD panel can only display
the setting up to ±3 stops. If the exposure compensation amount will
exceed ±3 stops, set it with the Quick Control (p.68).
If the <a> mode and ISO Auto are both set, see page 237 to set the
exposure compensation.
1Check the exposure.
Press the shutter button halfway
(9) and check the exposure level
indicator.
2Set the exposure compensation
amount.
While looking at the viewfinder or top
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
If you cannot set the exposure
compensation, set the power switch
to <1>, then turn the <5> dial.
3Take the picture.
To cancel exposure compensation,
set the exposure level indicator < /N>
back to the standard exposure index
(<a>/<C>).
O
Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation
Increased exposure for a
brighter image
Decreased exposure for a
darker image
O Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation
242
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.189) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
You can also set it by pressing the <O> button and turning the <6> or
<5> dial.
The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can set the power
switch to <R> to prevent the exposure compensation amount from
changing inadvertently.
If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <J/> or <I/>.
243
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
successive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1Hold down the <W> and
<o> buttons
simultaneously (9).
XThe <h> icon and “0.0” will appear
on the top LCD panel.
2Set the AEB range.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set
the AEB range.
3Take the picture.
Three bracketed shots will be taken
according to the drive mode set in this
sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
AEB will not be automatically
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to set the AEB increment to “0.0”.
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
AEB increment
AEB range
Standard
exposure
Decreased
exposure
Increased
exposure
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)
244
During AEB shooting, the <A> icon in the viewfinder and the <h> icon
on the top LCD panel will blink.
If the drive mode is set to <u> or <6>, press the shutter button three
times for each shot. When <o>, <p>, <6o>, or <6p> is set
and you hold down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed
shots will be taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop
shooting. When <k> or <l> is set, the three bracketed shots will be
taken continuously after an approx. 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <J/> or <I/>.
AEB cannot be used with bulb exposures or flash.
AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to
<2> or when the flash is fully charged.
245
You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from
the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at
the same exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure,
then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is
effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc.
1Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
X
The exposure setting will be displayed.
2Press the <A> button (9).
XThe <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
Each time you press the <
A
> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
3Recompose and take the picture.
The exposure level indicator on the
right of the viewfinder will show the
AE lock exposure level and the
current exposure level in real-time.
If you want to take more pictures while
maintaining the AE lock, keep holding
down the <
A
> button and press the
shutter button to take another picture.
* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is implemented with
the exposure weighting centered on the center AF point.
A
Lock the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.238)
AF Point Selection Method (p.93)
Automatic Selection Manual Selection
q*AE lock is applied at the AF
point that achieved focus.
AE lock is applied at the
selected AF point.
wre AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
246
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb
exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects
requiring long exposures.
1Set the shooting mode to <buLb>.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select
<buLb>.
2Set the desired aperture.
While looking at the top LCD panel,
turn the <6> or <5> dial.
3Take the picture.
The exposure will continue for as long
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
XThe elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the top LCD panel.
1: min., 2: sec., 3: hour
bulb: Bulb Exposures
(1) (3)
(2)
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
Long exposures produce more noise than usual.
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.165).
For a bulb exposure, if you use both the self-timer and mirror lockup
instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely
(self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter
button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release
sound, but no picture will be taken.
247
bulb: Bulb Exposures
With [z2: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise
generated during long exposures (p.191).
For bulb exposures, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) is
recommended (p.258).
Using mirror lockup (p.256) with bulb exposures is also possible.
248
You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image.
With Live View shooting (p.271), you can see in real time how the
exposures are merged when you shoot multiple-exposure images.
1Select [Multiple exposure].
Under the [z1] tab, select [Multiple
exposure], then press <0>.
XThe multiple exposure setting screen
will appear.
2Set [Multiple exposure].
Select [On:Func/Ctrl] or
[On:ContShtng], then press <0>.
To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
On: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority)
Useful when you want to shoot multiple exposures while checking
the result as you proceed. During continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority)
Geared for continuous multiple-exposure shooting of a moving
subject. Continuous shooting is possible, but the following
operations are disabled during shooting: menu viewing, image
review after image capture, image playback, and undo last image
(p.254). Also, during Live View shooting, the image displayed will not
be the final merged image.
Only the multiple-exposure image will be saved. (The single
exposures merged in the multiple-exposure image will not be
saved.)
P Multiple Exposures
249
P Multiple Exposures
3Set [Multi-expos ctrl].
Select the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
Additive
The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.
Based on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure
compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure
compensation amount.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard
exposure.
Bright/Dark
The brightness (or darkness) of the base image and the images to
be added are compared at the same position, and then the bright (or
dark) part will be left in the picture. Depending on the overlapping
colors, the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness (or
darkness) ratio between the compared images.
4Set the [No. of exposures].
Select the number of exposures, then
press <0>.
You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
P Multiple Exposures
250
5Set the images to be saved.
To save all the single exposures and
the merged multiple-exposure image,
select [All images], then press <0>.
To save only the merged multiple-
exposure image, select [Result
only], then press <0>.
6Set [Continue Mult-exp].
Select either [1 shot only] or
[Continuously], then press <0>.
With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
With [Continuously], multiple
exposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].
7Shoot the first exposure.
XWhen [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
captured image will be displayed.
XThe <P> icon will blink.
You can check the remaining
exposures on the right of the
viewfinder and in brackets [ ] on the
screen.
Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
(p.254).
Remaining number of
exposures
251
P Multiple Exposures
8Shoot subsequent exposures.
XWhen [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
merged multiple-exposure image will
be displayed.
Live View shooting with [On:Func/
Ctrl] set, the multiple-exposure
images merged so far will be
displayed. By pressing the <B>
button, you can display only the Live
View image.
Multiple-exposure shooting will end
when the set number of exposures
are taken. With continuous shooting,
if you keep holding down the shutter
button, the shooting continues until
the set numbers of exposures are
taken.
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, you can press the <x> button to view the
multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure
(p.254).
The shooting information for the last shot will be recorded and appended
to the multiple-exposure image.
P Multiple Exposures
252
The image-recording quality (image size and JPEG quality), ISO speed,
Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, and color space, etc. set
for the first single exposure will also be set for the subsequent
exposures.
During multiple exposure shooting, the settings of [z1: Lens
aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z2:
Highlight tone priority] will be automatically switched to [Disable].
If [z1: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
With [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive] set, the noise, irregular colors,
banding, etc. of the image displayed during shooting may differ from the
multiple exposure image recorded in the end.
With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.
If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple
exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up longer.)
If you perform Live View shooting with [Additive] set, the Live View
function will stop automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting
ends.
In step 8, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final
multiple-exposure image recorded.
If [On:ContShtng] is set, let go of the shutter button after shooting the
set number of exposures.
Doing any of the following will cancel the multiple-exposure shooting:
Setting the power switch to <2>, replacing the battery, replacing the
card, or switching to movie shooting.
During multiple exposure shooting, [Clean nowf] or [Clean
manually] under [53: Sensor cleaning] cannot be selected.
If you switch the shooting mode to <w1>, <w2>, or <w3> during
shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
If you connect the camera to a computer, multiple-exposure shooting will
not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer or printer
during shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
253
P Multiple Exposures
You can select a 1 image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The image data of the selected 1 image will remain intact.
You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or
JPEG images.
1Select [Select image for multi.
expo.].
XThe images on the card will be
displayed.
2Select the first image.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be used as the first single
exposure, then press <0>.
Select [OK].
XThe file number of the selected image
will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
3Take the picture.
When you select the first image, the number of remaining
exposures as set with [No. of exposures] will decrease by 1. For
example, if [No. of exposures] is 3, you can shoot two
exposures.
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card
Images shot with [z2: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] and
images applied with cropping information (p.439) cannot be selected as
the first single exposure.
[Disable] will be applied for [z1: Lens aberration correction] and
[z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the 1
image selected as the first single exposure.
The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color
space, etc. set for the first 1 image will also be applied for the
subsequent images.
If [z1: Picture Style] is [Auto] for the RAW image selected as the first
1 image, [Standard] will be applied for shooting.
You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
P Multiple Exposures
254
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set and you
have not finished shooting the set
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to check the current
exposure level, overlap alignment, and
overall effect of the merged multiple-
exposure image. (Not possible when
[On:ContShtng] is set.)
If you press the <L> button, the
operations possible during multiple-
exposure shooting will be displayed.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single
exposure.
If you select [Deselect img], the image selection will be canceled.
Operation Description
q Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another
image). The number of remaining exposures
will increase by 1.
W Save and exit
If [Save source imgs: All images] is set, all of
the single exposures and the merged multiple-
exposure image will be saved before exiting.
If [Save source imgs: Result only] is set, only
the multiple-exposure image merged so far will
be saved before exiting.
r Exit without saving
Multiple-exposure shooting will end without
saving the images shot.
2 Return to previous screen The screen before you pressed the <L> button
will reappear.
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-
exposure images.
255
P Multiple Exposures
Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?
All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41
or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved
as a 1 image.
Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.253). Note that
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?
You can shoot multiple exposures with Live View shooting (p.271).
However, if [On:ContShtng] is set, the captured images will not be
displayed as a multiple exposure.
What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple-exposures?
If it is set to save all images, the merged multiple-exposure image file
number will be the serial number coming after the file number of the final
single exposure used to create the merged multiple-exposure image.
Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?
As long as [52: Auto power off] is set to any setting other than
[Disable
], the power will turn off automatically after 30 min. of idle
time. If the auto power off takes effect, multiple-exposure shooting
will end, and multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.
Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off
will take effect at the time as set with the camera, and multiple-
exposure settings will be canceled.
FAQ
Image Size Setting Single Exposures Merged Multiple-Exposure
JPEG JPEG JPEG
1 1 1
41/61 41/61 1
1+JPEG 1+JPEG 1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG 41/61+JPEG 1+JPEG
256
Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture
is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up
before and during exposure to reduce blur caused by camera
vibrations. Useful when shooting close-ups (macro photography), using
a super telephoto lens, and shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1Select [Mirror lockup].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Mirror
lockup], then press <0>.
2Select the desired setting.
Select [Enable] or [Enable: Mirror
down w/s], then press <0>.
3Press the shutter button
completely.
Focus on the subject, then press the
shutter button completely.
XThe mirror will swing up, and the
<2> icon will blink on the top LCD
panel.
4Press the shutter button
completely again.
XThe picture will be taken.
With [Enable] set, the mirror will go
back down after the picture is taken.
With [Enable: Mirror down w/s]
set, the mirror will stay locked up
even after shooting. To cancel the
mirror lockup, press <0>.
2 Mirror Lockup
257
2 Mirror Lockup
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operation are
disabled.
When [Enable] is set, single shooting will take effect even if the drive
mode is set to continuous. When [Enable: Mirror down w/s] is set,
the current drive mode will take effect for shooting.
You can also use the self-timer with mirror lockup.
If approx. 30 sec. elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back
down automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the
mirror again.
When shooting with mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-
80N3 (sold separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold
separately) is recommended (p.258).
258
When you take a picture without looking
through the viewfinder, such as when
you use the self-timer, bulb exposure, or
a remote switch, stray light entering the
viewfinder can cause the picture to look
dark (underexposed). To prevent this,
slide the eyepiece shutter lever as
shown by the arrow to cover the
viewfinder eyepiece.
You do not need to cover the viewfinder eyepiece during Live View
shooting or movie shooting.
You can connect the Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately) or
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately), or any EOS
accessory equipped with an N3-type terminal to the camera for
shooting (p.485).
To operate the accessory, refer to its Instruction Manual.
1Open the terminal cover.
2Connect the plug to the remote
control terminal.
Connect the plug as shown in the
illustration.
To disconnect the plug, grasp the
silver part and pull it out.
Using the Eyepiece Shutter
F Using a Remote Switch
259
6
Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to shoot with external EX-
series Speedlites (sold separately) and how to set
Speedlite settings on the camera’s menu screen.
260
Using an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash
photography easy.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s
menu screen, see pages 263-269.
Flash exposure compensation
In the same way as normal exposure compensation, flash output
can be adjusted. You can set flash exposure compensation up to ±3
stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Press the camera’s <Q> button, then turn the <5> dial while
looking at the viewfinder or top LCD panel.
FE lock
This enables you to attain an appropriate flash exposure for a
specific part of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the
subject, press the camera’s <B> button, then compose the shot
and take the picture.
D Flash Photography
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Macro Lites
Shoe-mount Speedlites
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.189) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.
261
D Flash Photography
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to manual exposure <a> or
aperture-priority AE <f> and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at
1/250 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, the flash
duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit and varies
depending on the model. Be sure to check before shooting if flash
sync is properly performed by test shooting at a sync speed of
approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.
PC Terminal
The camera’s PC terminal can be
used with flash units having a sync
cord. The terminal has locking
threads to prevent the cord from
falling off.
The camera’s PC terminal has no
polarity. You can connect any sync
cord regardless of its polarity.
Cautions for Live View Shooting
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z5:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.281). The flash will not be fired if it
is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
Non-Canon Flash Units
D Flash Photography
262
If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
Do not connect to the camera’s PC terminal any flash unit with an output
voltage of 250 V or more.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not be fired.
A flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to
the PC terminal can both be used at the same time.
Metered Manual Flash Exposure
This is for close-up flash photography when you want to set the flash level
manually. Use an 18% standard gray card and an EX-series Speedlite that
has manual flash mode. Follow the instructions below:
1. Set the camera and flash settings.
• Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> or <f>.
• Set the Speedlite to manual flash mode.
2. Focus on the subject.
3. Set up the 18% standard gray card.
• Place the standard gray card at the subject’s position.
• Place the standard gray card so that it fills the entire spot metering
circle in the viewfinder.
4. Press the <B> button (8).
5. Set the flash exposure level.
• Adjust the Speedlite’s manual flash level and the camera
aperture so that the flash exposure level aligns with the
standard exposure index.
6. Take the picture.
• Remove the standard gray card and take the picture.
263
With an EX-series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings,
you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions
and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn
on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
1Select [External Speedlite
control].
Under the [z3] tab, select [External
Speedlite control], then press <0>.
XThe external Speedlite control screen
will appear.
2Select the desired item.
Select the menu option to be set, then
press <0>.
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam to be emitted, set [Disable].
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the
flash exposure will be averaged for the
entire metered scene. Depending on the
scene, flash exposure compensation
may be necessary. This setting is for
advanced users.
3 Setting the Flash Function
Flash Firing
E-TTL II Flash Metering
3 Setting the Flash Function
264
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE <f> mode.
: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/250
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.
: 1/250-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.
: 1/250 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/250 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/250-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/250-1/60sec. auto].
Flash Sync. Speed in Av Mode
If [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] has been set, high-speed
sync is not possible in the <f> mode.
265
3 Setting the Flash Function
The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the
Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom Function
settings, etc.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
Sample display
Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites for
automatic flash shooting.
[Manual flash] is for setting the
Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the
Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.
Flash Function Settings
Flash mode Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
compensation
Wireless functions/
Flash ratio control
Shutter
synchronization
Flash exposure
bracketing
3 Setting the Flash Function
266
Wireless functions / Flash ratio control
Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is
possible with radio or optical
transmission.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the
Instruction Manual of a Speedlite
compatible with wireless flash shooting.
With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)
compatible with flash function settings,
you can set the flash ratio between flash
tubes or flash heads A and B, or use
wireless flash with additional slave units.
For details on flash ratio control, refer to
the macro flash’s Instruction Manual.
Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
267
3 Setting the Flash Function
Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter
speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night
with a more natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization is set
together with [ETTL II], the flash will be fired twice in a row: once when
you press the shutter button completely and once right before the end
of the exposure.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all
shutter speeds. This is effective when you want to shoot with
background blur (open aperture) in locations such as outdoors in
daylight.
Flash exposure compensation
You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
Flash exposure bracketing
While changing the flash output
automatically, three shots will be taken.
For details, refer to the Instruction
Manual of a Speedlite equipped with
flash exposure bracketing.
3 Setting the Flash Function
268
For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
1Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
2Set the desired functions.
Select the number, then press <0>.
Select the setting, then press <0>.
Flash Custom Function Settings
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,
you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and
[Flash exposure compensation] under [Flash function settings].
([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set
the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the
camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
With an EX-series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if the
[Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL flash metering]
(autoflash).
269
3 Setting the Flash Function
1Select [Clear settings].
2Select the settings to be cleared.
Select [Clear flash settings] or
[Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then
press <0>.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK]. Then the flash settings or
Custom Function settings will all be
cleared.
Clearing Flash Function Settings / Flash C.Fn Settings
The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on the
camera’s [External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly on the
Speedlite.
270
271
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the
image on the camera’s LCD
monitor. This is called “Live View
shooting”.
Live View shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <A>.
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake may cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.550) installed on your computer,
you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely
while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual (p.4).
272
1Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
2Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
The Live View image will be displayed
in the brightness level closely matching
that of the actual image to be captured.
3Select the shooting mode.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select the
shooting mode.
4Focus on the subject.
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.284).
You can also tap on the screen to
select the face or subject (p.284).
5Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely.
X
The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
XWhen the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
273
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Set [z4: Live View shoot.] to [Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19 and
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19, the total continuous Live View
shooting time will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F): Approx. 2
hr. 20 min., At low temperatures (0°C/32°F): Approx. 2 hr.
With the image size set to JPEG (3/K/5/6) or 1 (except 41
and 61), continuous shooting during Live View shooting will
continuously display (play back) the images captured while you are
pressing the shutter button completely. When the continuous shooting
ends (shutter button is returned to halfway position), the Live View
shooting image will be displayed.
Enabling Live View Shooting
Temperature Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots Approx. 260 shots Approx. 240 shots
Continuous Shooting Display
Continuous shooting during Live View shooting will lock the AF and
exposure.
If you use a Speedlite for Live View shooting and [High speed
continuous] under [84: Continuous shooting speed] is set to [14
(16) fps] (p.431), the Speedlite will not be fired during high-speed
shooting.
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
274
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
“General Live View Shooting Cautions” are on pages 293-294.
The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording
size set to JPEG Large).
To check the depth of field, press the depth-of-field preview button.
If you shoot with the recording quality set to 41 or 61, “BUSY” will
be displayed and shooting will be disabled temporarily.
You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the
shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder
shooting.
If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.76). If [52:
Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after approx. 30 min. (camera power remains on).
With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the
Live View image on a TV set (p.379). Note that no sound will be output. If
the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your TV set).
275
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Information Display
Metering mode
ISO speed
Possible shots/Seconds
remaining on self-timer
Exposure level indicator
(Metering/Flash metering)
Aperture
Shutter speed
Battery level
Drive mode
Flash exposure
compensation
AF method
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
AEB/FEB
Highlight tone priority
Histogram display
Flash ready/Flash off/
High-speed sync
Picture Style
Auto Lighting Optimize
Multiple exposures
Maximum burst
AE lock
Exposure
simulation
White balance/White
balance correction
Exposure compensation
Temperature warning
Number of remaining multiple exposures
Magnify button
Shooting mode
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
276
Warnings
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or
very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
The histogram can be displayed when [z4: Expo. simulation] is set to
[Enable] (p.281).
You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.82). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or if the
camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level
cannot be displayed.
When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
is displayed at the brightness level closely matching that of the actual
image captured.
If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low-
or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than
the actual image recorded.
If bulb is set or during flash shooting, exposure simulation is not
performed (p.281). <g> icon and histogram will be displayed in gray.
The image will be displayed on the LCD monitor at the standard
brightness. The histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or
bright-light conditions.
277
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Final image simulation is a function that shows the Live View image as
it will look with the current settings for Picture Style, white balance, and
other shooting functions applied.
The Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings
listed below. However, it may be slightly different from the resulting
image.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Metering mode
Exposure (with [z4: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Distortion correction
Highlight tone priority
Final Image Simulation
278
When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <W>,
<o>, <Q>, <h>, <i>, <O>, or <B> button, the
setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the
<6> or <5> dial to set the respective shooting function.
By pressing the <B> button and then the <B> button, you can
set white balance shift and white balance bracketing.
Shooting Function Settings
W/R/f/y/q/i/O/B Settings
When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering circle
will be displayed at the center of the screen.
279
Shooting Function Settings
With the Live View image displayed, you can press the <Q> button to
set the AF mode, drive mode, metering mode, white balance, Picture
Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer.
1Press the <Q> button (7).
XThe settable functions will be
displayed.
2Select a function and set it.
Use <9> to select a function.
XThe setting of the selected function is
displayed on the screen.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
To set Auto white balance, select
[Q], then press <0>.
To set the white balance shift/white
balance bracketing or Picture Style
parameters, press the <B> button.
Press <0> to return to Live View
shooting.
Q Quick Control
280
z4
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <A>, menu
options exclusive to the Live View
shooting will appear under the [z4] and
[z5] tabs.
The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live
View shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting
(settings are disabled).
Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
AF method
You can select [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Single]. See pages
284-288 for the AF method.
Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
3 Menu Function Settings
281
3 Menu Function Settings
Exposure simulation
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness
(exposure) of the actual image will look.
•Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
•During e
Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the
Live View image easy to see (
E
). The image will be displayed with a
brightness (exposure) close to that of the actual image to be captured
only while you hold down the depth-of-field preview button (
g
).
• Disable (E)
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live
View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation,
the image is displayed at the standard brightness.
z5
Silent LV shooting
•Mode 1
Mechanical sound during shooting is suppressed, compared with
viewfinder shooting.
You can shoot with any drive mode (p.146). When <o> is set, if
you set [High speed] under [84: Continuous shooting speed]
to [14 (16) fps] (p.431), you can shoot continuously up to approx.
16.0 fps.
With [z2: Highlight tone priority] set to [Disable] and you expand the
[Maximum] default ISO speed in [Range for stills] under [z2: ISO speed
settings] (p.166), exposure simulation will become possible under darker
conditions.
3 Menu Function Settings
282
•Mode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will be
taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the camera
operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the shutter
button’s halfway position, the camera operation will resume. The
release sound at the moment of shooting can thereby be minimized.
Even if continuous shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.
• Disable
Be sure to set it to [
Disable
] if you use a TS-E lens (other than
those listed in below)
for shifting or tilting the lens
or if you use
an Extension Tube. If [
Mode 1
] or [
Mode 2
] is set, the standard
exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may result.
Even if drive mode is set to <6>, <6o>, or <6p> during Live View
shooting (p.147), these silent drive modes will not further reduce the
mechanical sound. (The only reduction of the mechanical sound is the
effect of to the Silent Live View shooting mechanism.)
Between [
Mode 1
] and [
Disable
], the internal operation alone is different
between the single drive mode and the first shot during continuous
shooting. Continuous shooting with [
Mode 1
] will have the same mechanical
sound as the [
Disable
] setting for the second and subsequent shots.
With [Mode 2] set, continuous shooting will not work even if the drive
mode is set to <o>, <p>, <6o>, or <6p>.
If you use flash with the flash mode set to E-TTL II/E-TTL autoflash,
shutter release will be performed by the same internal operation
mechanism as with viewfinder shooting. Therefore, shooting while
suppressing the mechanical sound will not be possible (regardless of the
[Silent LV shoot.] setting).
When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not
be fired if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
With H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400) or higher (ISO 32000 or higher if the
camera’s internal temperature is low), the maximum continuous shooting
speed for high-speed continuous shooting during Live View shooting will
decrease to approx. 14.0 fps. For details, see page 148.
With the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
283
3 Menu Function Settings
Metering timer
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
LV touch control
During Live View shooting or movie
shooting, you can touch the LCD monitor
(touch-sensitive panel called a
touchscreen) with your fingers to move
the AF point and perform AF, or magnify
the image.
[Standard] is the normal setting. [Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touchscreen response than [Standard]. Try using both settings and
select the one you prefer. To disable touchscreen operations, select
[Disable].
Cautions for Touch Control Operations
Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp
objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.
Do not use wet fingers for touchscreen operations.
If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the
touchscreen may not respond or misoperation may occur. In such a
case, turn off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.
Attaching any commercially-available protective sheet or sticker on the
LCD monitor may make the touchscreen operation response slow.
If you quickly perform touchscreen operation when [Sensitive] is set, the
touchscreen response may be slower.
No touch shutter is provided (cannot take pictures by touching the
screen).
Selecting any of the items below will cancel Live View shooting. To start
Live View shooting again, press the <0> button.
[z1: Set Custom WB]: [Record and register WB], [z3: Dust
Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Save/load cam settings
on card], [54: Clear camera settings], [54: z firmware ver.]
284
You can set the AF method to [u+Tracking] (p.285) or [FlexiZone -
Single] (p.287) to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.291).
1Press the <o> button.
2Select the AF method.
Turn the <6> dial to select the AF
method, then press <0>.
If [z5: LV touch control] is set to
[Standard] or [Sensitive] (p.283), you
can tap on the screen where you want to
focus to select (to move the AF point)
and focus on a person’s face or subject.
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
Touchscreen Operations During AF
You can also set the AF method with the [z4: AF method] screen.
Continuous AF is not possible with Live View shooting. (Continuous AF
is not provided.)
This camera does not offer a touch shutter function.
Regardless of the [z3: Beep] setting, the beeper (touchscreen beep)
will not sound for touchscreen operations. However, when focus is
achieved with AF, the beeper (focus confirmation beep) will sound
depending on the [z3: Beep] setting.
285
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
1Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
2Select an AF point.
When a face is detected, <p> will
appear over the face to be focused
on.
If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use <9> to move
<q> over the face you want to
focus on.
You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to select the face or subject. If
you tap on a subject other than a
human face, the AF point will be
switched to < > (p.286).
3Focus on the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
XIf no faces can be detected or if you
do not tap anything on the screen, the
camera will switch to FlexiZone -
Single (p.287).
XWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
XIf focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
u(face)+Tracking: c
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
286
4Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.272).
Focusing on a subject other than a human face
• Tap on the subject (or spot) where you want to focus.
•Press <9> or <0> and the AF point < > will appear on the
screen. Then use <9> to move the AF point over the target
subject.
• Once the AF point < > achieves focus, it will track the subject
even if the subject moves or if you change the composition.
If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.291) so that the face can be
detected, then perform AF.
An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
The <p> may cover only part of the face.
Since AF is not possible with a face or a subject detected near the edge
of the picture, the <p> or < > will be grayed out. If you press the
shutter button halfway in this situation, the subject will be focused on with
the FlexiZone - Single method.
The size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.
287
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus on a particular subject.
1Display the Live View image.
Press the <0> button.
XThe Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
XThe AF point < > will appear.
During movie shooting, if [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF
point will be displayed in a larger size.
2Move the AF point.
Use <9> to move the AF point to
where you want to focus. (It cannot
be moved to the edge of the screen.)
Using <9>, <0>, or the <L>
button will return the AF point to the
screen center.
You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to move the AF point.
3Focus on the subject.
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
XWhen focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
XIf focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
FlexiZone - Single: d
AF point
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
288
4Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.272).
AF Operation
Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and perform AF under the actual light source
under which you are shooting.
Notes for AF
If you cannot achieve focus with AF, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF> and focus manually (p.291).
If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus,
recompose to move the subject (and AF point) toward the screen center,
focus again, then take the picture.
The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. However, if an
EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is
used, the LED light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with
autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.
289
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat
surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
Fine lines and subject outlines.
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
Night scenes or points of light.
The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the picture.
Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.).
Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal
in a cage, etc.).
Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
A special effect filter is used.
Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
290
In the [FlexiZone - Single] mode, either
press the <u> button or tap on [d]
displayed on the bottom right of the
screen. You can magnify the image by
approx. 5x or 10x and check the focus.
To move the AF point, operate <9> or tap on the spot you want to
magnify.
Either press the <u> button or tap on [d] to magnify the image.
Each time you press the <u> button or tap on [d], the
magnification ratio changes.
At 100% (approx. 1x) magnification, operate <9> or tap on the
screen to move the magnifying frame. Pressing <9>, <0>, or
<L> button will return the magnifying frame to the screen center.
Either press the <u> button or tap on [d] to magnify the area
covered by the magnifying frame.
When the image is magnified by approx. 5x or 10x, you can change
the magnified area by operating <9> or tapping on the triangle on
the screen top, bottom, left, or right.
If you press the shutter button halfway, AF will be performed in the
magnified view.
If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view
and perform AF.
Magnified View for FlexiZone - Single
Magnified view is not possible with [u+Tracking].
If you perform AF in the normal view and then the view is magnified,
accurate focus may not be achieved.
AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
When in magnified view, Movie Servo AF (p.331) will not work.
In magnified view, images will be displayed without chromatic aberration
correction or distortion correction applied.
During magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to
camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
291
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).
1Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
Turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus
roughly.
2Display the magnifying frame.
Press the <u> button or tap on [d]
on the screen’s lower right.
XThe magnifying frame will appear.
3Move the magnifying frame.
Either operate <9> or tap on the
spot you want to magnify to move the
magnifying frame to where you want
to focus.
Pressing <9>, <0>, or <L>
button will return the magnifying
frame to the screen center.
4Magnify the image.
Each time you press the <u> button
or tap on [d] on the screen’s lower
right, the display will change in the
following sequence:
While in magnified view, you can
operate <9> or tap on the
directional wedges displayed on the
top, bottom, left, or right of the screen
to scroll around the magnified image.
MF: Focusing Manually
Magnifying frame
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification (Approx.)
Normal view 9 1x 9 5x 9 10x
MF: Focusing Manually
292
5Focus manually.
While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus.
After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
6Take the picture.
Check the exposure, then press the
shutter button completely to take the
picture (p.272).
In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture will
be displayed in red.)
293
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, always turn off the camera.
If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with a high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the
white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come
out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured
with the image area of the normal view.
294
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have less noise. (The image quality of the Live View image
is different from that of the recorded image.)
If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live
View shooting under the actual light source.
If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
During Live View shooting, certain Custom Functions will not work (some
settings become invalid). For details, see page 418.
Lens and Flash
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <
1
>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of
possible shots. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when
using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to <
2
>.
The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode
released in and after the second half of 2011.
FE lock, modeling flash, and metered manual flash exposure will not
work if an external Speedlite is used.
295
8
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <k>.
Before shooting movies, see page 316 and make sure
the card is able to record movies at the desired movie-
recording quality setting.
If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is
recommended in such cases.
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-
Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
296
When the shooting mode is set to <d> or <bulb>, autoexposure control
will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. The autoexposure
control will be the same for both <d> and <bulb>.
1Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <k>.
XThe image will appear on the LCD
monitor.
2Set the shooting mode to <d> or
<bulb>.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select <d>
or <bulb>.
3Focus on the subject.
Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.284).
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
4Shoot the movie.
Press the <0> button to start
shooting a movie.
XWhile the movie is being shot, the
[o] mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
XSound will be recorded by the built-in
microphone for movie shooting.
To stop shooting the movie, press the
<0> button again.
k Shooting Movies
k Autoexposure Shooting
Recording movies
Built-in microphone for movie shooting
297
k Shooting Movies
When the shooting mode is <s>, you can manually set the shutter
speed for movie shooting. The ISO speed and aperture will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain the standard exposure.
1Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <k>.
2Set the shooting mode to <s>.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select
<s>.
3Set the desired shutter speed.
While looking at the LCD monitor,
turn the <6> dial.
The settable shutter speeds depend
on the frame rate. See page 304.
4 Focus and shoot the movie.
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.296).
Shutter-priority AE
Shutter speed
Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended
since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/25 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the
smoother the subject’s movement will look.
The minimum shutter speed for shooting movies at a high frame rate will
be 1/125 sec. for NTSC and 1/100 sec. for PAL.
If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
k Shooting Movies
298
When the shooting mode is <f>, you can manually set the aperture
for movie shooting. The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain the standard exposure.
1Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <k>.
2Set the shooting mode to <f>.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select
<f>.
3Set the desired aperture.
While looking at the LCD monitor,
turn the <6> dial.
4 Focus and shoot the movie.
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.296).
Aperture-priority AE
Aperture
Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since
variations in the exposure, due to the drive of the lens aperture, will be
recorded.
299
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <bulb> Modes
L: Full HD movie shooting
The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 25600.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set [Range for movies]’s
[Maximum] setting to [H2 (204800)] (p.330), the automatic ISO
speed setting range’s maximum will be expanded to H2 (equivalent
to ISO 204800). Even if you set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a
narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 25600), it
will not take effect.
If [z2: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.193), the
automatic ISO speed setting range will be ISO 200 - ISO 25600.
H: 4K movie shooting
The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 12800.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set [Range for H]’s
[Maximum] setting to [H2 (204800)] (p.330), the automatic ISO
speed setting range’s maximum will be expanded to H2 (equivalent
to ISO 204800). Even if you set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a
narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 12800), it
will not take effect.
If [z2: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.193), the
automatic ISO speed setting range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800.
For movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent
to ISO 50) or H3 (equivalent to ISO 409600).
When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the
ISO speed settings again before shooting movies.
k Shooting Movies
300
Notes for <d><s><f><bulb> Modes
You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button. After
applying AE lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing
the <S> button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S>
button.)
If you set the power switch to <1> and turn the <5> dial, you can set
the exposure compensation up to ±3 stops.
In the <d> and <bulb> modes, the ISO speed, shutter speed, and
aperture will not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.
During movie shooting in the <d>, <s>, <f> or <bulb> mode, this
camera supports the Speedlite’s function to turn on the LED light
automatically in low-light conditions. (However, no icon indicating that
the LED light is ON is displayed on the information display screen
illustrated on page 305.) For details, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
Instruction Manual.
301
k Shooting Movies
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
1Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <k>.
2Set the shooting mode to <a>.
Press the <W> button and turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select
<a>.
3 Set the ISO speed.
Press the <i> button.
XThe ISO speed setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
4Set the shutter speed and
aperture.
Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. To set the aperture, turn
the <5> dial.
The settable shutter speeds depend
on the frame rate. See page 304.
5Focus and shoot the movie.
The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.296).
Manual Exposure Shooting
Shutter speed
Aperture
k Shooting Movies
302
ISO Speed in the <a> Mode
L: Full HD movie shooting
With [AUTO] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 25600. In [Range for movies] under [z2: ISO speed
settings], if you set [Maximum] to [H2(204800)] (p.330), the
maximum ISO speed for automatic ISO speed setting range will be
expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800). Even if you set the
[Maximum] and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the default
ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 25600), it will not take effect.
You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 25600 in
1/3-stop increments. If you set [Maximum] in [Range for movies] to
[H2 (204800)], the maximum ISO speed for automatic ISO speed
setting range will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800).
You can also set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a range
narrower than the default range (ISO 100 - ISO 25600).
If [
z2: Highlight tone priority
] is set to [
Enable
] (p.193), automatic/
manual setting range of ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 25600.
H: 4K movie shooting
With [Auto] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 12800. Under [z2: ISO speed settings] in [Range for
H], if you set [Maximum] to [H2 (204800)] (p.330), the maximum
ISO speed for automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded
to H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800). Even if you set the [Maximum]
and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO
100 - ISO 12800), it will not take effect.
You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 12800 in
1/3-stop increments. If you set [Maximum] in [Range for H] to [H2
(204800)], the the maximum ISO speed for automatic ISO speed
setting range will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800).
You can also set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a range
narrower than the default range (ISO 100 - ISO 12800).
If [z2: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable
]
(p.193),
automatic/manual ISO speed setting range will be ISO 200 - ISO
12800.
303
k Shooting Movies
For movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent
to ISO 50) or H3 (equivalent to ISO 409600).
When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the
ISO speed settings again before shooting movies.
During movie shooting, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture.
Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise
at high ISO speeds.
When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/25 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
The minimum shutter speed for shooting movies at a high frame rate will
be 1/125 sec. for NTSC and 1/100 sec. for PAL.
If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
In step 4, if you cannot set the shutter speed or aperture, set the power
switch to <1> and turn the <6> or <5> dial.
Under [86: Custom Controls], if [s: Expo comp (hold btn, turn
)] is set (p.454), you can set exposure compensation while ISO Auto
is set.
When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed. After locking the ISO speed during movie shooting, you can
cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained
until you press the <S> button.)
If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.305)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
By pressing the <B> button when the camera is ready to shoot, you
can display the histogram.
k Shooting Movies
304
The settable shutter speeds in the <s> shutter-priority AE and <a>
manual-exposure shooting modes vary depending on the frame rate of
the movie-recording quality.
Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still
photos, stop the movie shooting and take still photos using viewfinder
shooting or Live View shooting.
Settable Shutter Speeds
Frame rate Settable Shutter Speeds
21/4000 - 1/125 sec.
31/4000 - 1/100 sec.
81/4000 - 1/60 sec.
71/4000 - 1/50 sec.
61/4000 - 1/30 sec.
5 B 4 1/4000 - 1/25 sec.
Still Photo Shooting
305
k Shooting Movies
Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
* Applies to a single movie clip.
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Information Display
Picture Style
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Exposure level indicator (Metering)
Aperture
Shutter speed
White balance/
White balance
correction
Movie shooting mode/
High Frame Rate movie
/
Autoexposure
/ Shutter-priority
/ Aperture-priority
:
Manual exposure
Movie recording size
AF method
Battery level
Frame rate
ISO speed
Movie-recording
format
Audio recording level meters
(Manual/Line input)
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Movie shooting
remaining time*/
Elapsed time
Wind filter
Attenuator
Movie recording method/
Compression rate
Movie Servo AF
Highlight tone priority
Audio recording level
(Manual/Line input)
Recording movies
Temperature warning
Time code
Histogram (a mode)
Writing indicator
AE lock
Headphone volume
Magnify button
Exposure compensation Exposure level
indicator (Metering)
k Shooting Movies
306
When [AF method] is [FlexiZone - Single], you can press the <B>
button to display the electronic level (p.82).
Note that if [
AF method
] is set to [
u+Tracking
] or if the camera is connected
to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level will not be displayed.
The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during movie
shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a movie.)
When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
Cautions for Movie Shooting
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
Even if [
Record func.
] is set to [
Rec. to multiple
] under [
51: Record
func+card/folder sel.
] (p.153), the movie cannot be recorded to both the
CF card [
f
] and CFast card [
g
]. If [
Rec. separately
] or [
Rec. to multiple
]
is set, the movie will be recorded to the card which is set for [
Playback
].
If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during
movie shooting, the white balance may also change.
If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image
may flicker.
If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie shooting in low light, horizontal
banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of noise may occur
if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an electronic focus ring.
Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may
result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the
lens, or images may be out of focus.
During movie shooting, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:
The focus is temporarily greatly thrown off, changes in movie brightness is
recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical
sound of the lens is recorded.
During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press
the <u> button.
Be careful not to cover the built-in microphone (p.296) with your fingers, etc.
If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the
movie shooting will end.
307
k Shooting Movies
Warnings
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or
very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
“General Movie Shooting Cautions” are on pages 341-342.
If necessary, also read “General Live View Shooting Cautions” on
pages 293-294.
Notes for Movie Shooting
Movie-related settings are under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (p.331).
Each time you shoot a movie, a new movie file is created on the card.
The movie screen coverage for 4K movies is approx. 100% and for Full
HD, approx. 100%.
You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
Under [z5: V btn function], if [ /k] or [q/k] is selected, you
can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie
shooting (p.337).
Monaural sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.296).
Most external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug
can be used.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19, the total movie shooting time
will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 2 hr. 20
min., at low temperatures (0°C/32°F) approx. 2 hr. (With [z4: Movie
Servo AF: Disable] and L 6/5/B/4X set.)
The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, released in
and after the second half of 2011.
k Shooting Movies
308
Final image simulation is a function that shows the movie as it will look
with the current settings for Picture Style, white balance and other
shooting functions applied.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the
effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
Final Image Simulation
309
If you press the <W>, <o>, <i>, <O>, or <B>
button with the image displayed on the LCD monitor, the setting screen
will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5>
dial to set the respective function.
During manual exposure shooting (p.301), you can press the <i>
button to set the ISO speed. For details on setting the ISO speed,
see page 302.
By pressing the <B> button and then the <B> button, you can
set white balance shift and white balance bracketing.
Note that the drive mode, metering mode, and flash exposure
compensation cannot be set.
Shooting Function Settings
W/f/i/O/B Settings
Shooting Function Settings
310
While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the
<Q> button and set the following: AF method, movie-recording size,
sound-recording level (with Manual/Line input), headphone volume,
white balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer.
1Press the <Q> button (7).
XThe settable functions will be
displayed.
2Select a function and set it.
Use <9> to select a function.
XThe setting of the selected function is
displayed on the screen.
Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
To set the movie-recording size,
press <0>.
To set Auto white balance, select
[Q], then press <0>.
To set the white balance shift or
Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
Pressing <0> will return the camera
to movie shooting.
Q Quick Control
Under [z4: Movie rec quality], if [High Frame Rate] is set to [Enable], the
sound-recording level option will not be displayed. Also, the movie-recording
size cannot be set.
311
With [z4: Movie rec quality], you can
set the movie-recording format, movie-
recording size (movie size, frame rate,
movie-recording format, compression
rate), and other functions.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [53: Video system]
setting (p.497).
You can select the movie’s recording format.
MOV
The movie will be recorded in the
MOV format (file extension “.MOV”).
Convenient for editing with a
computer.
MP4
The movie will be recorded in the MP4 format (file extension
“.MP4”). This file format is compatible with a much larger range of
playback systems than with MOV files.
3
Setting the Movie Recording Quality
MOV/MP4
The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies
will differ depending on the movie-recording quality. Before shooting
movies, see page 316 to check the performance requirements of the
card.
When [MP4] is set, [High Frame Rate] cannot be set.
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
312
You can select the movie’s size, frame rate, and compression method.
Image Size
H 4096x2160
The movie will be recorded in 4K
quality. The aspect ratio is approx.
17:9. When shooting
H
8
/
7
J
movies, use a CFast card.
L 1920x1080
The movie will be recorded in Full
High-Definition (Full HD) quality.
The aspect ratio is 16:9.
Frame Rate (fps:frame per second)
2 119.9fps/8 59.94fps/6 29.97fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.). For 2, see page 318.
3 100.0fps/7 50.00fps/5 25.00fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.). For 3, see page 318.
4 23.98fps/B 24.00fps
Mainly for motion pictures. For B, see page 317.
Movie Recording Size
4 (23.98fps) can be selected when [53: Video system] is set to [For
NTSC].
313
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
4K movie shooting
Shooting 4K movies requires a high-performance card. When
shooting H 8/7 movies, use a CFast card. For details on
card requirements for movie shooting, see “Cards that Can
Record Movies” on page 316.
Shooting 4K movies or movies at a high frame rate greatly
increases the processing load. Compared with normal movie
shooting, the camera’s internal temperature may increase faster
or may become higher. If the red E icon appears during movie
shooting, it indicates that the card may be hot. Stop the movie
shooting and let the camera cool down before removing the card.
(Do not remove the card right away.)
From a 4K movie, you can select any desired frame to save it as
an approx. 8.8 megapixel (4096x2160) JPEG still image to the
card (p.374).
Movie-recording coverage
The respective area of the image sensor shown below is used for 4K
movies and Full HD movies.
To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the
camera before shooting movies is recommended (p.74).
L Full HD
H4K
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
314
For 4K movie shooting, [z2: High ISO speed NR] will not take effect.
Therefore, noise may be more noticeable depending on the shooting
conditions.
If you change the [53: Video system] setting, also set the movie-
recording size again.
Movies shot in 4K, at a high frame rate, or in L8/7 may not be
played back properly on other devices due to the heavy data processing
load during playback.
Movies may look different in quality and noise depending on the frame
rate setting even if both are in Full HD.
A movie shot in H8/7 will be played back on the LCD monitor at
a different frame rate from the frame rate of the movie shot.
The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen switches
depending on whether [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For
PAL].
The camera cannot shoot High Definition (HD) and Standard Definition
(VGA) movies.
If you change the movie size from Full HD to 4K, the image area of the
movie shooting will be slightly shifted to the telephoto end.
The 4K movie coverage is different from that of the EOS-1D C.
The color sampling recorded will be as follows: 4K: YCbCr 4:2:2(8-bit),
Full HD: YCbCr4:2:0 (8-bit). The color matrix will be as follows: 4K: Rec.
ITU-R BT.601, Full HD: Rec. ITU-R BT.709.
315
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Movie recording method/Compression rate
J MJPG
Selectable when the movie recording format is [MOV]. Motion
JPEG is used to compress the movie for recording. Without any
compression between frames, each frame is compressed at a
time and recorded. The compression rate is therefore low. Also,
since the image size is large with 4K quality, the file size will be
large.
W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Selectable when the movie recording format is [MOV].
Compresses each frame at a time for recording. Although the file
size is larger than with IPB (Standard), the movie is better suited
in editing.
X IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.
Since the file size is smaller than with ALL-I (For editing), movie
shooting time will be longer (with a card of the same capacity).
IPB (Light)
Selectable when the movie recording format is [MP4]. Since the
movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard), the
file size will be smaller than with IPB (Standard) and the playback
compatibility will be higher. Of the four movie-recording methods,
this one provides the longest possible shooting time (with a card
of the same capacity).
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
316
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a reading/writing
speed (required card performance) shown in the table or higher than
the standard specification. Test the card by taking a few movies in the
desired quality (p.311) and make sure the card can properly record the
movie.
Shooting in 4K 59.94p/50.00p
When shooting H8/7J movies, use a CFast card (g).
Even with a high-speed CF card, only for an extremely short period
of time can be recorded at one time (a maximum of approx. 10 sec.).
(Movie shooting stops automatically.)
Cards that Can Record Movies
Movie Recording Quality CF Card CFast Card
H
87 J– CFast 2.0
65B4 JUDMA 7
100 MB/sec. or faster CFast 2.0
L
23 WUDMA 7
100 MB/sec. or faster CFast 2.0
87 W UDMA 7
60 MB/sec. or faster CFast 2.0
87 X30 MB/sec. or faster
65B4 W30 MB/sec. or faster
65B4 X10 MB/sec. or faster
65 V10 MB/sec. or faster
If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may not
be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a
slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website.
For bit rates, see page 530.
317
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Records the movie at a frame rate of 24.00 fps.
When [Enable] is set, you can select the
movie-recording quality as follows:
HBJ, LBW, or
LBX.
If you have set [Movie rec. size] and
then set [24.00p] to [Enable], set the
[Movie rec. size] again.
24.00p
To optimize the use of the card, formatting the card with the camera
before shooting movies is recommended (p.74).
When movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try
again. If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the
card manufacturer’s website.
Cautions for [24.00p: Enable]
When [MP4] is set, [Movie rec. size] cannot be set. LBX will be
set.
[High Frame Rate] (p.318) cannot be set.
[53: Video system] cannot be set.
[53: HDMI frame rate] (p.340) cannot be set. The movie image will be
output at 1080/24.00p via HDMI. If you connect the camera to a TV set
etc. not compatible with the 1080/24.00p signal via HDMI, the movie
image may not be displayed.
If you set it back to [Disable], [53: HDMI frame rate] will be set to
[Auto].
Even if you set it back to [Disable], the movie recording size will not
revert to the original setting. Set the movie recording size again.
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
318
At Full HD quality, you can shoot movies at a high frame rate of 119.9
fps or 100.0 fps. Good for shooting movies to be played back in slow
motion. The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 7 min. 29 sec.
Images are recorded in L2 W
D or L3 W D quality.
High Frame Rate movies do not record
sound.
If the time code is displayed during
movie shooting, it will count up 4 sec. for
each sec. in real time.
Since the High Frame Rate movie will be recorded as a 29.97 fps/25.00
fps movie file, it will be played back in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
High Frame Rate
Cautions for [High Frame Rate: Enable]
Under [z5: Time code], if [Count up] is set to [Free run] (p.326), the
time code will not be recorded.
[MOV/MP4], [Movie rec. size], and [24.00p] cannot be set.
Even if you set it back to [Disable], the movie recording size will not
revert to the original setting. Set the movie recording size again.
If you shoot a High Frame Rate movie under fluorescent or LED lighting,
the movie image may flicker.
A movie shot at a high frame rate will be played back at a different frame
rate on the LCD monitor from the frame rate of the movie shot.
Headphones cannot be used. (You cannot listen to the sound.)
319
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
In MOV Format (Approx.)
In MP4 Format (Approx.)
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
Movie Recording
Quality
Total Recording Time on Card File Size
4 GB 16 GB 64 GB
H: 4K
87 J39 sec. 2 min. 10 min. 5733 MB/min.
65B4 J1 min. 4 min. 17 min. 3587 MB/min.
L: Full HD
23 W1 min. 5 min. 23 min. 2585 MB/min.
87 W 2 min. 11 min. 47 min. 1298 MB/min.
87 X 8 min. 34 min. 138 min. 440 MB/min.
65B4 W 5 min. 23 min. 93 min. 654 MB/min.
65B4 X 16 min. 67 min. 270 min. 225 MB/min.
Movie Recording
Quality
Total Recording Time on Card File Size
4 GB 16 GB 64 GB
L: Full HD
87 X 8 min. 35 min. 141 min. 431 MB/min.
65B4 X 17 min. 70 min. 281 min. 216 MB/min.
65 V 43 min. 173 min. 695 min. 87 MB/min.
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table (p.341).
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
320
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
Using CF cards up to 128 GB formatted with the camera
If you use the camera to format a CF card with 128 GB or less in
capacity, the camera will format it in FAT32.
With a FAT32-formatted CF card, if you shoot a movie and the file
size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next
movie and play it back.
Using CF cards exceeding 128 GB and CFast cards formatted
with the camera
If you use the camera to format a CF card with more than 128 GB in
capacity, the camera will format it in exFAT.
When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the file size exceeds 4
GB during movie shooting, the movie will be saved as a single file
(rather than being split into multiple files).
Deleting any of the movie files created when a movie shot at one time
exceeds 4GB will make it impossible for EOS MOVIE Utility (p.551) to play
back the movie files consecutively or to merge and save them as a single
movie file.
Using EOS MOVIE Utility, you can automatically merge multiple MOV
format movies files split when exceeding 4 GB and save them as a single
movie file.
321
3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality
Movie Shooting Time Limit
When shooting movies other than High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <0> button. (The movie will be recorded as a new
movie file.)
When shooting High Frame Rate movies
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 7 min. 29 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 7 min. 29 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie at a high
frame rate again by pressing the <0> button. (The movie will be
recorded as a new movie file.)
322
You can shoot movies while recording
sound with the built-in monaural
microphone or an external stereo
microphone (commercially-available).
You can also freely adjust the sound-
recording level.
Set the sound recording with [z4:
Sound recording].
Auto : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto
level control will operate automatically in response to the
sound level.
Manual : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording
level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and turn the <5> dial while looking at
the level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look
at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the level
meter sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-12 dB)
mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound
will be distorted.
Line input : The audio can come through the Line input. The sound
input will be recorded together with the image to the
movie. You can adjust the sound-recording level to one of
64 levels. The adjustment method is the same as with
[Manual].
Disable : Sound will not be recorded. Also, sound will not be output
for the HDMI output (p.338).
3 Setting the Sound Recording
Sound Recording/Sound Recording Level
High Frame Rate movies do not record sound. Also, [z4: Sound
recording] cannot be set.
323
3 Setting the Sound Recording
Wind filter : When [Enable] is set, it reduces the wind noise when
recording outdoors. This feature works only when you
use the built-in microphone for movie shooting. Note
that [Enable] reduces low bass sounds, so set it to
[Disable] when there is no wind. It will record a more
natural sound than with [Enable].
Attenuator : Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by
loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or
[Manual] before shooting, sound distortion may still
result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case,
setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
Using the microphone
Normally, the built-in microphone for movie shooting records
monaural sound. Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting
an external stereo microphone (commercially-available) equipped
with a miniature stereo plug (3.5 mm diameter) to the camera’s
external microphone IN terminal (p.28).
Line input
Line out stereo sound from a mixer, etc., can be input directly to the
camera. By connecting a miniature stereo plug (3.5 mm diameter) to
the camera’s Line IN terminal (p.28), stereo sound will be recorded
with the movie. The standard IN level is -8 dBV. Adjust the sound
recording level to suit the Line OUT level.
Wind Filter/Attenuator
3 Setting the Sound Recording
324
Using headphones
By connecting headphones (commercially-available) equipped with
a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal
(p.28), you can listen to the sound during movie shooting. If you are
using an external stereo microphone (commercially-available), you
can listen to the sound in stereo. To adjust the headphones’ sound
volume, press the <Q> button and select <n>. Then turn <5> to
adjust (p.310).
You can also use headphones during movie playback.
The camera’s built-in microphone will also record the operation sound
during shooting and mechanical sound of the camera. Use an external
microphone (commercially-available) to reduce theses sounds in the movie.
Line IN can handle sound input of up to +6 dBV. However, if the sound
input exceeds the standard input level of -8 dBV, the distortion may
increase. Taking test shots beforehand is recommended.
For Line input, be sure that [Sound rec.] is set to [Line input]. If [Line
input] is not set and the sound is input, it may cause a malfunction.
When [Line input] is set, the built-in microphone for movie shooting will
not record the sound. Also, [Wind filter] and [Attenuator] cannot be set
(do not work).
When using headphones for audio, noise reduction will not be applied to
the headphone output. Because of this, what you hear will differ from the
actual audio recorded with the movie.
When listening to the sound with headphones, do not change the
[Manual] and [Line input] settings. Doing so may cause a sudden
increase in the sound level and hurt your ears.
When the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the sound
will also be output (except when [
Sound rec.: Disable
] is set). If there is
audio feedback when the sound is output from the TV set, place the
camera farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume.
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
If [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h] (p.325), you can adjust the
sound-recording level with the <h> touch pad with less operation sound
during movie shooting.
325
You can change the settings of the ISO speed, sound-recording level,
etc. while suppressing the operation sound during movie shooting.
When [z5: Silent Control] is set to
[Enable h], you can use the touch pad
<h> on the inner ring of the Quick
Control Dial.
You can just touch on the top, bottom,
left, or right of <h> for silent operation.
During movie shooting, you can press
the <Q> button to enable the Quick
Control operation and change the
functions below with <h>.
*1: With ISO Auto set.
*2: With [Sound recording: Manual/Line
input] set.
3 Silent Control
Settable
Functions
Shooting Mode
d/bulb s f a
Shutter speed – k–k
Aperture – – kk
Exposure kkkk
*1
ISO speed – – – k
Recording
level*2k kkk
n Volume k kkk
If [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h], you cannot perform Quick
Control setting with the <5> Quick Control Dial or <6> Main Dial
during movie shooting.
Even if you change the aperture silently with <h>, the movie will still
record the lens aperture-driving sound.
If there is water or dirt on the <h>, the touchscreen operation may not
work. In such a case, use a clean cloth to clean the <h>. If it still does
not work, wait a while and operate it again.
Before shooting a movie, you can use <h> with the [Rec. level] setting to
adjust the sound-recording level.
326
The time code is a time reference
recorded automatically to synchronize
the movie during movie shooting. It is
recorded at all times in the following
units: hours, minutes, seconds, and
frames. It is mainly used during movie
editing.
Set the time code with [z5: Time
code].
Rec run : The time code counts up only while you are shooting a
movie. The time code will continue in the sequence of the
movie files captured.
Free run : The time code counts up whether you are shooting a
movie or not.
You can set the time code’s start time.
Manual input setting: You can freely set the hour, minute, second,
and frames.
Reset : The time set with [Manual input setting] and
[Set to camera time] is reset to “00:00:00.” or
“00:00:00:” (p.329).
Set to camera time : Sets hours, minutes, and seconds to match the
camera’s internal clock. “Frames” will be set to
“00”.
3 Setting the Time Code
Count Up
Start Time Setting
If you shoot a High Frame Rate movie with [Free run] set, the time code
will not be appended.
If [Free run] is set and you change the time, zone, or daylight saving
time (p.55), the time code will be affected.
If you play back an MP4 movie with a device other than the camera, the
time code may not be displayed properly.
327
3 Setting the Time Code
You can select what to display on the movie shooting screen.
Rec time : Displays the elapsed time from the start of the movie
shooting.
Time code : Displays the time code during movie shooting.
You can select what to display on the movie playback screen.
Rec time : Displays the recording time and playback time during
movie playback.
Time code : Displays the time code during movie playback.
Movie Recording Count
Movie Playback Count
During movie shooting During movie playback
With [Time code] set:
Regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting, the time code will always
be recorded to the movie file (except for High Frame Rate movies with
[Free run] set).
The [Movie play count] setting under [z5: Time code] switches in
tandem with the [x3: Movie play count] setting. Changing either
setting will automatically change the other.
“Frames” are not displayed for movie shooting or during movie playback.
3 Setting the Time Code
328
Time code
The time code can be appended to a movie that is output via HDMI.
Enable: Appends time code to HDMI video output. When [Enable]
is set, [Rec Command] will be displayed.
Disable: Time code not appended to HDMI video output.
Record command
When a video output via HDMI is recorded by an external recording
device, the camera’s movie shooting start/stop can sync with the
recording by an external recording device.
Enable: The movie shooting start/stop syncs with the recording by
an external recording device.
Disable: The recording start/stop is controlled by the external
recording device.
HDMI
During High Frame Rate movie shooting, if [Count up] in [Time code] is
set to [Free run], the time code will not be appended to the HDMI video
output.
To check whether your external recording device is compatible with the
[Time code] or [Rec Command], consult the manufacturer.
Even if you set [Time code] to [Disable], time code may be appended to
the movie depending on the specifications of the external recording
device. For specifications of time code during HDMI input, consult the
manufacturer of the external recording device.
329
3 Setting the Time Code
If the frame rate is set to 2 (119.9 fps), 8(59.94 fps), or 6(29.97
fps), the time code’s frame count causes a discrepancy between the
actual time and time code. When [Enable] is set, this discrepancy is
corrected automatically. This correction function is called “drop frame.”
This is for advanced users editing movies.
Enable : The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time
code numbers (DF: Drop frame).
Disable : The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: Non-drop frame).
The time code will be displayed as follows:
Enable (DF) : 00:00:00. (Playback time: 00:00:00.00)
Disable (NDF) : 00:00:00: (Playback time: 00:00:00:00)
Drop Frame
If the frame rate is 3(100.0 fps), 7(50.00 fps), 5(25.00 fps),
B(24.00 fps), or 4(23.98 fps), the drop frame will not work. (If 3/
7/5/B/4 is set or if [53: Video system] is set to [For PAL],
[Drop frame] will not be displayed.)
330
z2
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z2:
ISO speed settings] options will change
to [ISO speed], [Range for movies],
and [Range for H].
ISO Speed Setting
ISO speed
In the <a> mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can
also select ISO Auto. You can also use the <i> button for these
settings.
Range for movies
For Full HD movie shooting, you can set the ISO speed’s
automatic and manual setting ranges (minimum and maximum
limits). The default setting is ISO 100 - ISO 25600. You can set the
minimum limit within ISO 100 to H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400),
and the maximum limit within ISO 200 to H2 (equivalent to ISO
204800).
Range for H
For 4K movie shooting, you can set the ISO speed’s automatic and
manual setting ranges (minimum and maximum limits). The default
setting is ISO 100 - ISO 12800. You can set the minimum limit
within ISO 100 to H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400), and the
maximum limit within ISO 200 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800).
3 Menu Function Settings
For Full HD shooting, ISO 32000/40000/51200 is the expanded ISO
speed. For 4K movie shooting, it is ISO 16000/20000/25600/32000/
40000/51200. When you set it, [H] will be displayed.
For still photo shooting (viewfinder or Live View shooting), see page 166
for the [z2: ISO speed settings].
331
3 Menu Function Settings
z4
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z4]
and [z5] tabs dedicated to movie
shooting will be displayed.
Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously during movie shooting. The default setting is [Enable].
When [Enable] is set:
The camera focuses the subject continuously even when you are
not pressing the shutter button halfway.
If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or if you do not
want the lens mechanical sound to be recorded, you can
temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows.
• Tap on the [ ] icon on the lower left of the screen.
• Under [86: Custom controls], if a button is assigned to
[Pause Movie Servo AF] (p.452), you can pause Movie Servo
AF while holding down that button. When you press the button
again, Movie Servo AF will resume.
• If a button is assigned to [AF stop] (p.449), Movie Servo AF will
stop while holding down that button. When you let go of the
button, Movie Servo AF will resume.
While Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button,
changing the AF method, etc., Movie Servo AF will resume.
When [Disable] is set:
Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to
focus.
3 Menu Function Settings
332
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• With a higher f/number
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
289.
Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery power and
shorten the movie shooting time (p.307).
With certain lenses, the mechanical sound of the lens for focusing may
be recorded. If this happens, you can use an external microphone
(commercially-available) to reduce the mechanical sound of the lens to
be recorded.
Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
If you want to set the lens’ focus mode switch to <MF> during Movie
Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to
<A>.
333
3 Menu Function Settings
AF method
You can select [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Single]. See page
284 for the AF method.
Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
Note that the grid is not displayed during movie shooting.
Movie recording quality
You can set the movie-recording format (MOV or MP4), movie-
recording size, 24.00p, and High Frame Rate. For details, see page
311.
Sound recording
You can set sound-recording settings. For details, see page 322.
3 Menu Function Settings
334
Movie Servo AF Speed
You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF
speed and its operation conditions.
This function is settable when [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [AF
method] is set to [FlexiZone - Single].
Additionally, the function is enabled
when using a lens supporting slow focus
transition during movie shooting*.
When active :[Always on] sets the AF adjustment speed to take effect
at all times for movie shooting (before and during movie
shooting). [During shooting] sets the AF adjustment
speed to take effect only during movie shooting.
AF speed : You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed)
from standard speed to slow (one of seven levels) or
fast (one of two levels), to obtain the desired effect for
movie creation.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting
USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For
details, refer to Canon website.
Setting [AF method] to [u+Tracking] gives the same effect as [AF speed]
set to [Standard (0)].
335
3 Menu Function Settings
Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity
You can change the Movie Servo AF’s
tracking sensitivity to one of seven
levels. This affects the responsiveness
of AF tracking sensitivity when the AF
points stray from the subject, such as
during panning or when an obstacle cuts
across the AF points.
This function is settable when [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [AF
method] is set to [FlexiZone - Single].
Locked on: -3/-2/-1
This setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject if
the AF point loses the original subject. The closer the setting is to the
minus (-) symbol, the less the camera is inclined to track a different
subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from
rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during
panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.
Responsive: +1/+2/+3
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that
covers the AF point. The higher the setting to the the plus (+) symbol,
the more responsive the camera is. It is effective when you want to
keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera
changes, or to rapidly focus on another subject.
Setting [AF method] to [u+Tracking] gives the same effect as setting [0].
3 Menu Function Settings
336
z5
Metering timer
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
LV touch control
During Live View shooting or movie shooting, you can touch the
LCD monitor (touch-sensitive panel) with your fingers to move the
AF point or magnify the image.
[Standard] is the normal setting. [Sensitive] provides a better
touchscreen response than [Standard]. Try using both settings and
select the one you prefer. To disable touchscreen operations, select
[Disable].
Time code
You can set the time code. For details, see page 326.
Regardless of the [z3: Beep] setting, no beeper will sound for touchscreen
operations. However, when focus is achieved with AF, the beeper (focus
confirmation beep) will sound depending on the [z3: Beep] setting.
337
3 Menu Function Settings
Silent control
When [Enable h] is set, you can use the <h> touch pad with the
Quick Control to change settings while suppressing the operation
sound during movie shooting. For details, see page 325.
V button function
You can set the functions performed by
pressing the shutter button halfway or
completely during movie shooting.
If [ /k] or [q/k] is set, besides pressing the <0> button,
you can start/stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button
completely or by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote
Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately, p.258).
Setting Pressing halfway Pressing completely
/– Metering and AF No function
q/– Metering only No function
/kMetering and AF Starts/stops movie
shooting
q/kMetering only Starts/stops movie
shooting
During movie shooting, the [V btn function] setting overrides any function
assigned to the shutter button with [86: Custom Controls].
3 Menu Function Settings
338
HDMI display
This function enables you to select the
display option while recording HDMI
video output with an external recording
device. The movie will be output in Full
HD quality (1920x1080). The default
setting is [a].
When [a] is set:
• When outputting a movie via HDMI, the camera’s LCD monitor
will be off.
• The shooting information, AF points, etc., will be displayed on the
HDMI video output. However, if you press the <B> button
while watching the external monitor connected to an external
recording device, you can see the output video without the
information.
• Without having an HDMI connection, even if you press the
<B> button while watching the camera’s LCD monitor, the
output will still display the information.
• To record a video without an information overlay, check that no
shooting information or AF point is being displayed on the
external monitor, etc. Setting [awithout info] is recommended.
When [awithout info] is set:
• When outputting a movie via HDMI, the camera’s LCD monitor
will be off.
• The HDMI output will include only the movie image (shooting
information, AF points, etc., will not be displayed).
When [A+a] is set:
• While displaying the movie on the LCD monitor, you can display
the movie as an HDMI output.
• Even if you play back images or display a menu, the images or
menu will not be displayed on the HDMI output device.
339
3 Menu Function Settings
To continue the HDMI output for longer than 30 min., select [a] or
[awithout info], then set [52: Auto Power Off] to [Disable] (p.76).
How to prolong the HDMI output
HDMI output in 4K quality is not possible. (Even if [Movie rec. size] is set
to H, the movie will be output in Full HD quality.)
HDMI output with no information will not display the card’s remaining
capacity, battery level, internal temperature warning (p.341), and other
warnings on the HDMI output device’s screen. Be particularly careful
when setting [awithout info]. When [A+a] is set, you can see the
warnings displayed on the camera’s LCD monitor.
When there is no movie shooting, the power will turn off automatically
after the set time for [52: Auto power off] elapses. If you select
[A+a] and set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable], the HDMI output
will stop if you do not operate the camera for 30 min. (movie shooting will
stop).
With [awithout info] set and you press the <o> or <B>
button, etc., the setting screen may be displayed in the HDMI video
output. While recording a movie to an external recording device,
operating the buttons is not recommended.
Depending on the viewing environment, the brightness and color of the
movie shot with the camera may look different from that of the HDMI
video output recorded by an external recording device.
By pressing the <B> button, you can change the information
displayed on the screen.
A time code can be appended to the HDMI video output (p.328).
Sound will also be output for the HDMI output (except when [Sound
rec.: Disable] is set).
3 Menu Function Settings
340
53
HDMI frame rate
For HDMI output, you can set the frame rate to [Auto], [59.94i/
50.00i], [59.94p/50.00p], or [23.98p]. Set the frame rate that is
compatible with the commercially-available, external recording
device you will use to record the movie via HDMI output.
When [24.00p] under [z4: Movie rec quality] is set to [Enable], you
cannot set [53: HDMI frame rate]. The movie will be output at 1080/
24.00p via HDMI.
With HDMI output at H8/7, the 29.97p/25.00p movie will be
output via HDMI according to the [HDMI frame rate] setting.
The HDMI output during High Frame Rate movie shooting will not output
the movie at 119.9p/100.0p.
The selectable frame rates will differ depending on the [53: Video
system] setting.
If the picture does not appear on the HDMI output device, set the [53:
Video system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of the output device).
If the manually-set frame rate is not compatible with the external
recording device, the frame rate will be set automatically.
If [53: HDMI frame rate]’s [59.94i] or [59.94p] is used with the movie-
recording size of 4(23.98 fps), “2-3 pulldown” processing will be done.
341
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will
appear.
The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn
off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time depending on the shooting conditions. If you use a tripod
or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended that you
set the IS switch to <2>.
With autoexposure shooting or shutter-priority AE, if the brightness
changes during movie shooting, the movie may freeze momentarily. In
such a case, shoot movies with aperture-priority AE or manual exposure.
If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost
exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MOV/MP4 format).
342
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during
movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not
yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the
internal buffer memory). The slower the card, the
faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator
becomes full, movie shooting will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will
either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly
go upward. First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast
enough.
If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
If the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator
appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
Indicator
Restrictions on MP4-format Movies
Note that generally the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.
Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
When you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
343
9
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to play back and erase the
images (still photos/movies), how to view them on a TV
screen, and other playback-related functions.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
344
1Play back the image.
Press the <x> button.
XThe last image captured or played
back will appear.
2Select an image.
To play back images starting with the
last image captured, turn the <5>
dial counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
Each time you press the <
B
> button,
the information display will change.
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
No information Basic information
display
Shooting information display
If [87: Add cropping information] is set to an option other than [Off
(Aspect ratio 3:2)] (p.439), the captured photos will show the lines
indicating the image area when played back.
345
x Image Playback
3Exit the image playback.
Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
With the shooting information screen displayed (p.344), you can tilt
<9> up or down to switch the shooting information displayed at the
screen bottom as follows. For details, see pages 347-349.
In the single-image display, you can
overlay the grid on the playback image.
With [33: Playback grid], you can
select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag
n].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as
well as composition.
Shooting Information Display
3 Grid Display
Detailed information
Lens / Histogram information
White balance information
Picture Style information 1
Picture Style information 2
GPS information
Lens aberration correction information 2
Lens aberration correction information 1
Color space / Noise reduction information
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
346
Basic information display
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Information for Still Photos
Shutter speed
Folder number -
File number
Rating
Playback number/
Total images
recorded
Protect images
Voice memo
Battery level Card number
Image-recording
quality/Edited
images/Cropping/
Frame Grab
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
Aperture
Exposure compensation
amount
If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information
may not be displayed.
It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on
other cameras.
347
B: Shooting Information Display
Shooting information display
•Detailed information
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* Images appended with cropping information (p.439) will have lines indicating the
image area.
* For images shot with flash not applying flash exposure compensation, <0> will
be displayed.
* Multiple-exposure photos are indicated with <P>.
* RAW-processed images, resized images, cropped images, and frame-grab
images are indicated with <u>.
* For images cropped and then saved, <N> will be displayed.
Exposure compensation amount
Shutter speed
Shooting mode/
Multiple
exposures/
Frame Grab
ISO speed
Shooting date and time
Image-recording quality/Edited
images/Cropping/Frame Grab
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
White balance correction/
Correction amount
White balance
AF Microadjustment
Highlight tone priority
Metering mode
File size
Flash exposure
compensation amount
Picture Style/Settings
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Scroll bar
Aperture
FE Microadjustment
AE Microadjustment
B: Shooting Information Display
348
Histogram display
(Brightness)
Lens name
Focal length
Histogram display
(RGB)
•Lens/Histogram information
•White balance information
•Picture Style information 1 •Picture Style information 2
Frame-grab images from 4K movies saved as still photos (p.374) will not
display certain shooting information screens.
349
B: Shooting Information Display
•Color space / Noise reduction information
•Lens aberration correction
information 1
•Lens aberration correction
information 2
Latitude
Elevation
Longitude
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
•GPS information
If the GPS information is not recorded to the image, GPS information screen
will not be displayed.
B: Shooting Information Display
350
< / >: Shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed are not displayed.
< / >: Aperture and ISO speed are not displayed.
< / >: Shutter speed and ISO speed are not displayed.
< / > + ISO Auto: ISO speed is not displayed.
Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed,
clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more detailed gradation in the
overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a
negative amount and shoot again.
Sample Movie Information Display
Movie shooting mode/
High Frame Rate movie
File size
Shutter speed
Movie recording method/
Compression rate
Movie recording size Recording time/Time code
Movie playback
Aperture
Frame rate
ISO speed
Movie-recording format
During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and
[Threshold] of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
351
B: Shooting Information Display
AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.
Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:
Histogram disp].
[Brightness] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of
the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and
brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates
how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The
more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
image. The more pixels there are toward the right,
the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on
the left, the shadow detail will be lost. If there are too
many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be
lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By
checking the image and its brightness histogram, you
can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s
brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal
axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on
the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each
color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker
and less prominent the color. The more pixels there are toward the right, the
brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on
the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking the
image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and gradation
condition, as well as white balance inclination.
Sample Histograms
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
352
Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or
100 images on one screen.
1Press the <u> button.
During image playback or when the
camera is ready to shoot, press the
<u> button.
X[6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
2Switch to the index display.
Turn the <
6
> dial counterclockwise.
X
The 4-image index display will appear.
The selected image is highlighted with
an orange frame.
Turning the <6> dial further
counterclockwise will switch the
display from 9 images, 36 images
and to 100 images. If you turn the dial
clockwise, it will rotate through 100,
36, 9, 4, and single-image display.
3Select an image.
Operate <9> or the <5> dial to
move the orange frame and select
the image.
Press the <u> button to turn off the
[6u] icon, then turn the <6> dial
will display the image(s) on the next
or previous screen.
Press <0> in the index display to display the selected image in the
single-image display.
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
BB BB
353
x Searching for Images Quickly
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1Select [Image jump w/6].
Under the [32] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
2Select the jump method.
Select the jump method, then press
<0>.
d:Display images one by one
e:Jump 10 images
f:Jump 100 images
g:Display by date
h:Display by folder
i:Display movies only
j:Display stills only
P:Display protected images only
k:Display by image rating (p.361)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
I Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
x Searching for Images Quickly
354
3Browse by jumping.
Press the <x> button to play back
images.
In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
XYou can browse by the method that
was set.
Playback position
Jump method
To search images by shooting date, select [Date].
To search images by folder, select [Folder].
If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display one or the other.
If the jump method is set to [Protect] or [Image Rating] but no images
are protected or have ratings, you cannot use the <6> dial to browse
through images.
355
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.
1Magnify the image.
The image can be magnified as
follows: 1. During image playback
(single-image display), 2. During the
image review after image capture,
and 3. From the shooting-ready state.
Press the <u> button.
XThe magnified view will appear. The
magnified area and [6u] will be
displayed on the lower right of the
screen.
The image magnification increases
as you turn the <6> dial clockwise.
You can magnify the image up to
approx. 10x.
The image magnification decreases
as you turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise. In the case of 1
and 3 only, turning the dial further will
display the index display (p.352).
2Scroll around the image.
Use <9> to scroll around the
magnified image.
Press the <u> button or <x>
button to exit the magnified view.
u Magnifying Images
Magnified area position
In the case of 1 and 3 only, you can turn the <5> dial to view another
image while maintaining the magnified view.
A movie cannot be magnified.
u Magnifying Images
356
Under the [33] tab, when you select
[Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the
initial magnification ratio and position for
the magnified view.
1x (no magnification)
The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the
single-image display.
2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)
The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected
magnification.
Actual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 110%. The
magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the
photo is taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the
image center.
Same as last magnification (from center)
The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnified view with the <x> or <u> button. The magnified view
starts at the image center.
3 Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position
For images taken with [
u+Tracking
] or [
FlexiZone - Single
] (p.284), or with
[
Distortion correction
] set to [
Enable
] (p.195), the magnified view will start
at the image center even if [
Actual size (from selected pt)
] is set.
357
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1Select [Rotate image].
Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
2Select the image to be rotated.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
You can also select an image in the
index display (p.352).
3Rotate the image.
Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
b Rotating the Image
If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.390) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
A movie cannot be rotated.
358
By protecting the images, you can prevent the important images from
being accidentally erased.
1Select the image to be protected.
Press the <3> button to play back
images, then turn the <5> dial to
select the image.
2Protect the image.
When you press the <J/K> button,
the image will be protected and the
<K> icon will appear at the top of
the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
the <J/K> button again. The <K>
icon will disappear.
To protect another image, repeat
steps 1 and 2.
J Protecting Images
Protecting a Single Image with the <J/K> Button
Image protection icon
359
J Protecting Images
1Select [Protect images].
Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
2Select [Select images].
XAn image is displayed.
3Select the image to be protected.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
You can also select an image on the
index display (p.352).
4Protect the image.
Press <0> to protect the selected
image. The <K> icon will appear at
the top of the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
To protect another image, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
3 Protecting a Single Image with the Menu
Image protection icon
J Protecting Images
360
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
If you format the card (p.74), the protected images will also be erased.
Movies can also be protected.
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
If you erase all the images (p.388), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
When [All images on card] or [Unprotect all images on card] is
selected, the images will be protected or unprotected on the card
selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under [51: Record
func+card/folder sel.].
361
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
1Select [Rating].
Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
2Select the image to be rated.
Turn the <5> dial to select an image
or movie to be rated.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-
image display. To return to the single-
image display, turn the dial clockwise.
3Set the rating.
Press <0>, and a blue highlight
frame will appear as shown in the
screenshot.
Turn the <5> dial to select a rating,
then press <0>.
XWhen you set a rating mark to the
image, the total number of the images
displayed beside the rating mark will
be counted up.
To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
Setting Ratings
3 Set Ratings with the Menu
A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are
more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.
Setting Ratings
362
Under [86:J/Kbutton function], if you set [Rating (J and K
disabled)] (p.438), you can press the <J/K> button to rate images/
movies during playback.
1Set the <J/K> button’s function.
Under the [86] tab, set the [J/K
button function] to [Rating (J and
K disabled)].
2Select the image to be rated.
Press the <x> button to play back
images, then turn the <5> dial to
select the image to be rated.
3Set the rating.
Each time you press the <J/K>
button, the rating mark will change:
l/m/n/o/p/None.
To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
Rating with the <J/K> Button
Taking Advantage of Ratings
With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only images with a
specific rating.
With [32: Slide show], you can play back only images with a specific
rating.
Depending on the computer’s OS, you can see each file’s rating as part
of the file information display or in the provided image viewer (JPEG
images only).
363
You can append (record) a voice memo to a captured image. The voice
memo will be saved as a WAV sound file having the same file number as the
image. The voice memo can be played back by the camera or a computer.
1Select the image to which you
want to append a voice memo.
Press the <x> button to play back
images, then turn the <5> dial to
select the image to which you want to
append a voice memo.
2Record a voice memo.
Hold down the <J/K> button for
approx. 2 sec.
When [
Recording memo...
] appears,
keep holding down the button and
speak into the voice memo microphone.
The maximum recording time for a
voice memo is approx. 30 sec.
To end the voice memo, let go of the
button.
XThe [ ] icon will be displayed on the
top of the screen.
K
Recording and Playing back Voice Memos
Recording a Voice Memo
Voice memo microphone
With [87: Memo audio quality], you can change the tone quality of the
voice memo.
To record a voice memo longer than 30 sec., repeat step 2.
During image review immediately after shooting, you can also record a
voice memo by following step 2. However, only one voice memo per
image can be recorded in this way.
You cannot append a voice memo to a protected image.
You cannot append a voice memo to a movie.
A voice memo cannot be recorded with a commercially-available
external microphone.
K Recording and Playing back Voice Memos
364
When [86: J/K button function] is set to [Play memo (Hold: Rec.
memo)] (p.438), the voice memo appended to the image can be played
back.
1Set the <J/K> button’s function.
Under the [86] tab, set [J/K
button function] to [Play
memo(Hold: Rec. memo)].
2Select the image whose voice
memo to play back.
Press the <x> button to play back
images, then turn the <5> dial to
select an image with the [ ] icon
displayed on the top of the screen.
3Play back a voice memo.
Press the <J/K> button to play
back the voice memo.
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the
sound volume.
To stop playback, press the <J/K>
button.
Playing a Voice Memo
Speaker
If the image is appended with multiple voice memos, they will be played
back consecutively.
You cannot erase only the voice memo appended to an image with the
camera.
If the image is erased (p.386), the voice memo(s) appended to the image
will also be erased.
365
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:
[J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW
image processing (1 images only)], [S: Resize (JPEG image only)],
[: Highlight alert], [N: Cropping (JPEG images only)], [ : AF point
display], and [e: Image jump w/6].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1Press the <Q> button.
During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
XThe Quick Control options will
appear.
2Select an item and set it.
Tilt <9> up or down to select a
function.
XThe setting of the selected function is
displayed at the bottom.
Turn the <5> dial to set it.
For RAW image processing, Resize,
and Cropping, press <0> and set
the function. For details, see page
392 for RAW image processing, page
397 for Resize, and page 399 for
Cropping.
To cancel, press the <M> button.
3Exit the setting.
Press the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control.
Q Quick Control for Playback
Q Quick Control for Playback
366
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be restricted.
367
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
By connecting the camera to a TV set
with HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately), you can play back the
camera’s still photos and movies on the
TV set.
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor.
You can also edit out the movie’s first
and last scenes, grab still photos from
the 4K movie, and play back the still
photos and movies on the card in an
automatic slide show.
k Enjoying Movies
Playback on a TV Set (p.379)
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.369)
Even if the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable and a
4K movie is played back, it will be played back in Full HD quality.
(Playback in 4K quality is not possible.)
Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN port, the camera
cannot be connected with an HDMI cable to a hard disk recorder.
Even if the camera is connected with a USB cable to a hard disk
recorder, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera.
k Enjoying Movies
368
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a computer and played
back or edited with pre-installed or
general-purpose software compatible
with the movie’s recording format.
Playback and Editing with a Computer
To play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use
software compatible with MOV-format and MP4-format movies. For
details on commercially-available software, contact the software
manufacturer.
MOV-format movies can also be played back with EOS MOVIE Utility
(EOS software, p.551).
369
1Play back the image.
Press the <x> button to play back
images.
2Select a movie.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played back.
In the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the
upper left indicates a movie.
In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
back from the index display, press
<0> to switch to the single-image
display.
3In the single-image display, press
<0>.
XThe movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
4Play back the movie.
Turn the <5> dial to select [7]
(Play), then press <0>.
XThe movie will start playing back.
You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>. Press it again to
resume the playback.
You can adjust the sound volume
during movie playback by turning the
<6> dial.
For more details on the playback procedure, see the next page.
k Playing Back Movies
Speaker
Before listening to a movie through headphones, turn down the volume
to avoid hurting your ears.
The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another camera.
k Playing Back Movies
370
Movie Playback Panel
Operation Playback Description
7 Play Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the <5> dial.
The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right
of the screen.
5 First frame Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the
movie.
6 Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-
by-frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward
the movie.
4 Last frame Displays the movie’s last frame.
X Edit Displays the editing screen (p.372).
Frame Grab
Selectable when a 4K movie is played. You can grab
the frame displayed on the screen and save it as a
JPEG still photo (p.374).
Playback position
mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds with [Movie play
count: Rec time] set)
hh:mm:ss.ff (DF)
hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF)
Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with
[Movie play count: Time code] set)
9 Volume Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
speaker (p.369) or headphones.
32Press the <M> button to return to the single-image
display.
371
k Playing Back Movies
Full HD movies shot at a high frame rate (119.9 fps or 100.0 fps) will be
played back at 1/4-speed slow motion (29.97 fps or 25.00 fps). No
sound will be played because no sound is recorded when shooting High
Frame Rate movies. Note that each second of playback time and the
time code count up equals to 1/4 sec. in real time.
Playing High Frame Rate Movies
If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie (p.379),
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not
change the sound volume.) If there is audio feedback, place the camera
farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume.
If you detach or attach the lens, the card’s writing speed is slow, or the
movie file contains corrupted frames during movie playback, the movie
playback will stop.
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be approx. 4 hr. 30 min. (with L
6/5/B/4X set).
By connecting commercially-available headphones equipped with a 3.5
mm diameter stereo mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal
(p.28), you can listen to the movie sound (p.324).
372
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
1On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
XThe movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2Specify the part to be edited out.
Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
Tilt <9> to the left or right to see the
previous or next frames. Holding
down the key will fast forward or fast
rewind the frames. Turn the <5> dial
for frame-by-frame playback.
After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in white on the top of the screen is
what will remain.
3Check the edited movie.
Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
To change the editing part, go back to
step 2.
To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation dialog.
X
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
373
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
4Save the edited movie.
Select [W], then press <0>.
XThe save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] to save the edited movie and
return to the movie playback screen.
Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fully-
charged battery.
Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
You cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.
X
374
From a 4K movie, you can select any desired frame to save it as an
approx. 8.8 megapixel (4096x2160) still photo (JPEG image). This
function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”.
1Play back the image.
Press the <x> button to play back
images.
2Select a 4K movie.
Turn the <5> dial and select a 4K
quality movie.
On the shooting information screen
(p.350), the 4K movie is indicated
with the [H] icon.
With the index display, press <0> to
switch to the single-image display.
3In the single-image display, press
<0>.
XThe movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
4Select a frame to grab.
Use the movie playback panel to
select the frame to grab as a still
photo.
For details on using the movie
playback panel, see page 370.
5Select [ ].
Turn the <5> dial to select [ ],
then press <0>.
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies
375
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies
6Save the frame.
Select [OK] to save the frame
displayed on the screen as a still
photo (JPEG image).
Check the destination folder and
image file number.
7Select the image to be displayed.
Select [View original movie] or
[View extracted still image].
XThe selected image will be displayed.
Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies or 4K movies shot
with a different camera.
Frame grabbing is not possible if the camera is connected to a computer.
376
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1Select [Slide show].
Under the [32] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
2Select the images to be played
back.
Select the desired option on the
screen, then press <0>.
All images/Movies/Stills/Protect
Turn the <5> dial to select one of
the following: [jAll images]
[kMovies] [zStills] [JProtect].
Then press <0>.
Date/Folder/Rating
Turn the <5> dial to select one of
the following: [iDate] [nFolder]
[9Rating].
When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Number of images to
be played back
Date Folder Rating
377
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
3Set the playback as desired.
Select [Set up], then press <0>.
Set the [Display time] and [Repeat]
settings for still photos.
After completing the settings, press
the <M> button.
Item Playback Description
jAll images All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
iDate Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
nFolder Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
kMovies Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
JProtect Only the protected still photos and movies on the card will be
played back.
9Rating Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
Display time Repeat
The images on the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.] will be played back.
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
378
4Start the slide show.
Select [Start], then press <0>.
XAfter [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
5Exit the slide show.
To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
During the automatic playback of still images, you can press the <B>
button to switch the display format (p.344).
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
The display time may vary depending on the image.
To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 379.
379
By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can play back the camera’s still photos and movies on
the TV set. For the HDMI cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately)
is recommended.
If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, make sure to check if
the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL]
(depending on the video system of your TV set).
1Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
2Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set.
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set’s HDMI IN port.
3Turn on the TV set and switch the
TV set’s video input to select the
connected port.
4Set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
5Press the <x> button.
XThe image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected TV set.
By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
To play back movies, see page 369.
Viewing Images on a TV Set
Viewing Images on a TV Set
380
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1 Select [Ctrl over HDMI].
Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
2Select [Enable].
3Connect the camera to a TV set.
Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV set.
X
The TV set’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera. If it does not
switch automatically, use the TV set’s
remote control to select the HDMI IN
port the cable is connected to.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
When the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, even 4K
movies will be played back in Full HD quality (they cannot be played
back in 4K quality).
Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies.
381
Viewing Images on a TV Set
4Press the camera’s <x> button.
XAn image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV set’s
remote control for playback.
5Select an image.
Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
6Press the remote control’s Enter
button.
XThe menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
Press the remote control’s /
button to select the desired option,
then press the Enter button. For a
slide show, press the / button to
select an option, then press the Enter
button.
If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback menu
Movie playback menu
: Return
: 9-image index
: Play movie
: Slide show
: Display shooting info
: Rotate
Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s Instruction Manual.
Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],
and use the camera to control the playback operation.
382
You can copy the images recorded on one card (save duplicates) to the
other card.
1Select [Image copy].
Under the [31] tab, select [Image
copy], then press <0>.
2Select [Sel.Image].
Check the copy source card’s number
and the target card’s number and its
remaining capacity.
Select [Sel.Image], then press <0>.
a Copying Images
3 Copying a Single Image
Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
If you are copying images from a CFast card (g) to a 128 GB or smaller
CF card (f) formatted in FAT32, movie files exceeding 4 GB cannot be
copied.
Movie files exceeding 4 GB can be copied between a CFast card (g)
and CF card (f) as long as the latter has a total capacity of 128 GB or
greater and is formatted in exFAT.
The copy source is the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.].
383
a Copying Images
3Select the folder.
Select the folder containing the image
you want to copy, then press <0>.
Check the images displayed on the
right to select the desired folder.
XThe images in the selected folder will
be displayed.
4 Select the images to be copied.
Turn the <5> dial to select an image
to be copied, then press <0>.
XThe [X] icon will appear on the upper
left of the screen.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-
image display. To return to the single-
image display, turn the dial clockwise.
To select another image to be copied,
repeat step 4.
5Press the <J/K> button.
After selecting all the images to be
copied, press the <J/K> button.
6Select [OK].
Check the card where the images will
be copied to, then select [OK].
Number of images in folder
Folder name
Lowest file number
Highest file number
Total images selected
a Copying Images
384
7Select the target folder.
Select the target folder to which you
want to copy the images, then press
<0>.
To create a new folder, select [Create
folder].
8Select [OK].
Check the information of the source
card and target card, then select
[OK].
XThe copying will start and the
progress will be displayed.
When the copying is completed, the
result will be displayed. Select [OK] to
return to the screen in step 2.
You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [x1: Image copy], when you
select [Sel.n] or [All image], you can
copy all the images in the folder or on a
card.
3 Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
385
a Copying Images
If an image is being copied to a target folder/card which has an image
with the same file number, the following will be displayed: [Skip image
and continue] [Replace existing image] [Cancel copy]. Select the
copying method, then press <0>.
•[Skip image and continue]: Any images having the same file number
will be skipped and not copied.
•[Replace existing image]: Any images having the same file number
(including protected images) will be overwritten.
If an image with a print order (p.413) is overwritten, you will have to set
the print order again.
If [Sel.n] or [All image] is selected and the folder or card has a movie
file exceeding 4 GB that cannot be copied to the target, a message will
appear. Only the still photos and the movie files not exceeding 4 GB will
be copied.
The image’s print order information or image transfer information will not
be retained when the image is copied.
Shooting is not possible during the copying process. Select [Cancel]
before shooting.
The file name of the copied image will be the same as the source
image’s file name.
If [Sel.Image] is set, you cannot copy images in multiple folders at once.
Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder.
Any voice memos appended to the image will also be copied over.
386
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.358) will not be erased.
1Select the image to be erased.
Press the <x> button to play back
images.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be erased.
2Press the <L> button.
XThe Erase menu will appear.
3Erase the image.
Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
L Erasing Images
Erasing a Single Image
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no
longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images
from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a RAW+JPEG
image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.
Setting [87: Default Erase option] to [[Erase] selected] makes it faster to
erase images (p.441).
387
L Erasing Images
By adding checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can erase
multiple images at once.
1Select [Erase images].
Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
2Select [Select and erase images].
XAn image will be displayed.
3Select the images to be erased.
Turn the <
5
> dial to select the image
to be erased, then press <
0
>.
XA checkmark [X] will be displayed on
the upper left of the screen.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-
image display. To return to the single-
image display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
4Erase the image.
Press the <L> button, then press
[OK].
XThe selected images will be erased at
once.
3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
L Erasing Images
388
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [31: Erase images] is set to [All
images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on
the card will be erased.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
To erase all images including protected images, format the card (p.74).
When [All images on card] is selected, the images in the card selected
under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] with [Record/play] or
[Playback] will be erased.
389
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to
view.
1Select [LCD brightness].
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>.
2Adjust the brightness.
While referring to the gray chart, turn
the <5> dial, then press <0>.
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram is
recommended (p.351).
During playback, pressing the <U> button will display the screen in step
2.
Changing Image Playback Settings
390
Images shot in vertical orientation are rotated
automatically to the proper orientation for viewing,
so they will not be displayed in horizontal
orientation when played back on the camera’s LCD
monitor or viewed on a computer screen. You can
change the setting of this feature.
1Select [Auto rotate].
Under the [51] tab, select [Auto
rotate], then press <0>.
2Set the display orientation.
Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
OnzD
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both
the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
OnD
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.
Off
The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.
The image displayed immediately after shooting will not be automatically
rotated.
If a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, automatic
rotation to the proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.
If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen, it
means the software you are using does not support image rotation for display.
Using the EOS software is recommended.
391
10
Post-Processing
Images
This chapter explains RAW image processing, JPEG
image resizing, and JPEG image cropping.
The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
performed when the camera is connected to a computer via an
interface cable.
392
You can process
1
images with the camera and save them as JPEG
images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply different
processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.550) to
process those images.
1Select [RAW image processing].
Under the [32] tab, select [RAW
image processing], then press
<0>.
X1 images will be displayed.
2
Select the image to be processed.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to process.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
3Set the desired processing
conditions.
Press <0> to make the RAW-
processing options appear in a while
(p.394).
Use <9> to select an option, then
turn the <5> or <6> dial to switch
the setting.
XThe displayed image will reflect such
settings as “Brightness adjustment”,
“White balance”, etc.
To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <B>
button.
R
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
393
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera
Displaying the setting screen
Press <0> to display the selected
function’s setting screen. Turn the
<5> or <6> dial to change the
setting. Press <0> to finalize the
setting and return to the previous
screen.
4 Save the image.
Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
When you select [OK], the JPEG
image created by processing will be
saved to the card.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To process another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The
magnification will differ depending on the [RAW image processing]
screen’s [Image quality] setting. With <9>, you can scroll around the
magnified image.
To cancel magnified view, press the <u> button again.
Magnified View
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera
394
Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.
White balance (p.177)
You can select the white balance. If you select [Q] and press the
<B> button, you can select [Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto:
White priority]. If you select [P] and press the <B> button, you
can set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect the
setting’s effect.
Picture Style (p.169)
You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the <B> button, you
can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other parameters. The
displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.189)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will
reflect the setting’s effect.
High ISO speed noise reduction (p.190)
You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds.
The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is
difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.393).
3 Image quality (p.155)
You can set the image-recording quality (image size and JPEG
quality) of the JPEG image to be created. Tilt <9> up or down to
select the image size and JPEG quality.
RAW Image Processing Options
395
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera
Color space (p.200)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the
image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set.
Lens aberration correction
Peripheral illumination correction (p.194)
A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to
the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to
discern, magnify the image (p.393) and check the four corners.
The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will
be less pronounced than that applied with the Digital Photo
Professional (p.550) at maximum correction amount. If the effects
of correction are not apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to
apply the peripheral illumination correction.
Distortion correction
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image
periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the
sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting
as necessary.
Digital Lens Optimizer
By using optical design values, the lens aberrations, diffraction,
and degraded resolution due to the low-pass filter can be
corrected. Check the effects of the [Enable] setting with the
magnified view (p.393). The unmagnified view (normal view) will
not show the effects of the Digital Lens Optimizer. When [Enable]
is selected, although the chromatic aberration correction and
diffraction correction options will not be displayed, both will be
applied to the processed image.
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera
396
Chromatic aberration correction (p.195)
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline)
due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set,
the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to
discern, magnify the image (p.393).
Diffraction correction
The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image
sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected
image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify
the image (p.393).
Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the
same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensified with the
effects of correction.
When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, certain shooting conditions may
cause strong outlines to appear in the image. If necessary, adjust the
Picture Style’s Sharpness.
When processing images with [Distortion correction] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.351) or Dust Delete Data (p.403) will not
be appended to the image.
The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered
(stored) in the camera.
The effect of the lens aberration correction will vary depending on the
lens used and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to
discern depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.
The Digital Lens Optimizer’s correction data for lenses newly released
can be added with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.550).
If [Invalid correction data for Digital Lens Optimizer.] is displayed,
use EOS Utility (EOS software) to add the correction data for the Digital
Lens Optimizer to the camera.
397
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it
as a new image. Resizing an image is possible with JPEG 3/K/5
images. JPEG 6 images, RAW images, and frame-grab images
from 4K movies saved as still photos cannot be resized.
1Select [Resize].
Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
XAn image will be displayed.
2Select the images to be resized.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to resize.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
3Select the desired image size.
Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
Select the desired image size, then
press <0>.
S Resizing JPEG Images
Target sizes
S Resizing JPEG Images
398
4Save the image.
Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
Resize Options by Original Image Size
Original Image Size Available Resize Settings
K 5 6
3k*kk
Kkk
5k
The item marked with an asterisk will be cropped slightly when resized.
399
You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.
You can crop the JPEG images captured in 3, K, 5, and 6. RAW
images and frame-grab images from 4K movies saved as still
photos cannot be cropped.
1Select [Cropping].
Under the [x2] tab, select
[Cropping], then press <0>.
XAn image is displayed.
2Select an image.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to crop.
If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
3Set the cropping frame size,
position, and orientation.
Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller
the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired
image area.
N Cropping JPEG Images
N Cropping JPEG Images
400
Switching the Cropping Frame Orientation
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame between
the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you to crop the
image shot in horizontal orientation to look as if it was shot in vertical
orientation.
4Check the image area to be
cropped.
Press the <Q> button.
XThe image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
Press the <Q> button again to return
to the original image.
5Save the cropped image.
Press <0> and select [OK] to save
the cropped image.
Check the destination folder and
image number, then select [OK].
To crop another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
AF point display information (p.351) and Dust Delete Data (p.403) will
not be appended to the cropped images.
Depending on the image and the size it is cropped to, the cropped image
file may not be smaller than the original.
401
11
Sensor Cleaning
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to
automatically shake off dust adhered to the image
sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the
image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.550).
Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases,
lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of
the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor
cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
402
Whenever you set the power switch to <1/R> or <2>, the
Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is activated to automatically shake off the
dust on the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to
this operation. However, you can manually perform sensor cleaning or
can disable this unit as follows.
1Select [Sensor cleaning].
Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
2Select [Clean nowf].
Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
Select [OK].
XThe screen will indicate that the sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there will be a mechanical sound of
the shutter, no picture is taken.
XAfter sensor cleaning is finished, the camera will automatically turn
off and on.
In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
XThe sensor cleaning will no longer be performed when you set the
power switch to <1/R> or <2>.
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Cleaning the Sensor Now
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option remains disabled temporarily.
Dots of light may appear on images if the sensor has been affected by
cosmic rays, etc. By selecting [Clean nowf], their appearance may
be suppressed (p.518).
403
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (EOS software, p.550) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to
infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to
face toward you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
1Select [Dust Delete Data].
Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
2Select [OK].
XAfter the automatic self-cleaning of
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a
mechanical sound of the shutter,
during the cleaning, no picture is
taken.
3 Appending Dust Delete Data
Preparation
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
3 Appending Dust Delete Data
404
3Shoot a solid-white object.
At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.
- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
X
The picture will be taken in aperture-
priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
XWhen the picture is taken, the
camera will start collecting the Dust
Delete Data. When the Dust Delete
Data is obtained, a message will
appear.
If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear. Follow
the “Preparation” procedure on the
preceding page, then select [
OK
].
Take the picture again.
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG and
RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,
p.550) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual (p.4).
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Dust Delete Data
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If
the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software).
405
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be
cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
1Select [Sensor cleaning].
Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
2Select [Clean manually].
3Select [OK].
XIn a moment, the reflex mirror will lock
up and the shutter will open.
“CLn” will blink on the top LCD panel.
4Clean the sensor.
5End the cleaning.
Set the power switch to <2>.
3 Manual Sensor Cleaning
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.
It is recommended to use household power outlet accessories (sold
separately, p.483).
3 Manual Sensor Cleaning
406
While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air
may damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
407
12
Transferring Images to a
Computer and Print Ordering
Transferring Images to a Computer (p.408)
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the
camera alone to transfer images recorded on the card to
the computer.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.413)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a
print order for a photofinisher.
408
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to
transfer images on the card to the computer. This is called direct image
transfer.
You can perform the direct image transfer with the camera while
looking at the LCD monitor.
The images transferred to the computer will be saved in the [Pictures]
or [My Pictures] folder and organized in folders by shooting date.
1Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
2Connect the camera to a
computer.
Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.38). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
< > icon facing the back of the
camera.
Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
d Transferring Images to a Computer
Preparing Image Transfer
Before connecting the camera to a computer, install EOS Utility (EOS
software) to your computer (p.550-551) .
Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.485). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.38).
409
d Transferring Images to a Computer
3Set the power switch to <1>.
When the computer displays a screen
to select the program, select [EOS
Utility].
XThe EOS Utility screen will appear on
the computer.
For RAW+JPEG images, you can
specify which image to transfer.
On the next page in step 2, select
[RAW+JPEG transfer], then select the
image to be transferred: [JPEG only],
[RAW only], or [RAW+JPEG].
3 Transferring RAW+JPEG Images
After the EOS Utility screen appears, do not operate EOS Utility. If any
screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed, [Direct transfer]
in step 5 on page 411 will not be displayed. (You cannot transfer images to
the computer.)
If the EOS Utility screen does not appear, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual (p.4).
Before disconnecting the cable, turn off the camera. Hold the plug (not
the cord) to pull out the cable.
You can also transfer images to an FTP server via a wired LAN
connected to the Ethernet RJ-45 terminal (p.28). For details, refer to the
“Wired LAN Instruction Manual” (p.4).
This [RAW+JPEG transfer] setting is linked to the [RAW+JPEG transfer]
setting under [53: Communication settings] 9 [Network settings] 9
[Function settings] 9 [FTP transfer settings] 9 [Transfer type/size],
and the two will always remain synchronized.
d Transferring Images to a Computer
410
Sel.Image
1Select [Image transfer].
Under the [32] tab, select [Image
transfer], then press <0>.
2Select [Image sel./transfer].
3Select [Sel.Image].
4Select the images to be
transferred.
Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be transferred, then press
<0>.
Turn the <5> dial to display the [X]
on the screen’s upper left, then press
<0>.
If you press the <
u
> button and turn
the <
6
> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <
6
> dial clockwise.
To select another image to be
transferred, repeat step 4.
3 Selecting the Images to be Transferred
When [Sel.Image] is selected, you can check the image’s transfer status
on the upper left of the screen: No mark: Not selected. X: Selected for
transfer. l: Transfer failed. k: Transfer succeeded.
The procedures for [
RAW+JPEG transfer
] (p.409) and steps 1 to 4 above
can also be performed while the camera is not connected to a computer.
411
d Transferring Images to a Computer
5Transfer the image.
On the computer screen, check that
EOS Utility’s main window is
displayed.
Select [Direct transfer], then press
<0>.
On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] to transfer the images to the
computer.
Images selected with [Sel.n] and
[All image] can also be transferred in
this way.
Sel.n
Select [Sel.n] and select [Folder
images not transfer’d]. When you
select a folder, all the images in that
folder not yet transferred to the computer
will be selected.
Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] will select the selected folder’s
images that failed to transfer.
Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] will clear the transfer history of
the images in the selected folder. After clearing the transfer history, you
can select [Folder images not transfer’d] and transfer all the images
in the folder again.
d Transferring Images to a Computer
412
All image
If [All image] is selected and you select
[Card images not transferred], all the
images on the card not yet transferred to
a computer will be selected.
For a description of [Card images failed
transfer] and [Clear card’s transf.
history], see “Sel.n” on the preceding
page.
If any screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed on the
computer, [Direct transfer] is not displayed.
During the image transfer, certain menu options cannot be used.
You can also transfer movies.
Up to 9,999 images can be transferred in one batch.
When transferring an image having a voice memo, the voice memo will
also be transferred.
Shooting is possible during the image transfer.
For [Transfer with caption] under [x2: Image transfer], see the
“Wired LAN Instruction Manual” (p.4).
413
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images
recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the
image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in
one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file
number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all print-
ordered images. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)
1Select [Print order].
Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
2Select [Set up].
3Set the options as desired.
Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Setting the Printing Options
Print type Date File No.
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
414
4Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button.
XThe print order screen will reappear.
Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
Print type
KStandard Prints one image on one sheet.
LIndex Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
LBoth Prints both the standard and index prints.
Date On [On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
Off
File number On [On] imprints the file number on the print.
Off
RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered.
If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both]
setting (p.415), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In
such a case, resize the image (p.397), then print the index print.
Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.
With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
are set. It cannot be printed with the specified print order if you just
extract images from the card and try to print them.
Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s Instruction
Manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
Do not specify a new print order for a card containing images whose print
order was set by a different camera. All the print orders may be
overwritten inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible,
depending on the image type.
415
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
If you press the <u> button and turn the
<6> dial counterclockwise, you can
select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
Standard / Both
Press <0> to print a copy of the
displayed image. By turning the <5>
dial, you can set the number of copies to
be printed up to 99.
Index
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the
folder. A print order for one copy of all
the images in the folder will be specified.
If you select [Clear all in folder] and
select the folder, the print order for all the
images in the folder will be canceled.
Specifying Images for Printing
Quantity
Total images selected
Index icon
Checkmark
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
416
All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one
copy of all the images on the card will be
set for printing.
If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on
the card.
Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [By n] or [All image].
417
13
Customizing the
Camera
You can make fine adjustments to various camera
functions and change the functionality of buttons and
dials to suit your picture-taking preferences with
Custom Functions and Custom Controls.
You can also save the current camera settings to a card
or register them under the <w1>, <w2>, or <w3>
shooting mode.
418
3 Custom Functions
81: Exposure A LV
Shooting
k Movie
Shooting
Exposure level increments
p.421
k k
ISO speed setting increments kIn a
Bracketing auto cancel
p.422
k
Bracketing sequence k
Number of bracketed shots
p.423
k
Spot metering link to AF point
82: Exposure
Safety shift p.424 k
Same exposure for new aperture p.425 k
83: Exposure
Restrict shooting modes
p.427
kk
Restrict metering modes k
Metering used in manual exposure
Set shutter speed range
p.428
kk
Set aperture range kk
AE Microadjustment p.429 kk
FE Microadjustment p.430 k
Shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV) shooting or
movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
419
3 Custom Functions
84: Drive A LV
Shooting
k Movie
Shooting
Continuous shooting speed p.431 k
Limit continuous shot count
p.432
k
Restrict drive modes k
85: Display/Operation
Focusing screen p.433
Viewfinder info. during exposure p.434
LCD panel illumination during Bulb k
Recording card, image size setting p.435 kk
86: Operation
Warnings z in viewfinder p.436
Dial direction during Tv/Av kk
Av setting without lens
p.437
kk
Multi function lock kk
Custom Controls Depends on setting
J/Kbutton function p.438 (During playback)
3 Custom Functions
420
*1: [Timer after release] only
Selecting [88: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] will clear all the
Custom Function settings.
87: Others A LV
Shooting
k Movie
Shooting
Add cropping information p.439 k
Timer duration
p.440
*1
Shutter release time lag
Memo audio quality
p.441
Default Erase option (During playback)
Retract lens on power off p.442 kk
88: Clear
Even if [88: Clear all Custom Func.(C.Fn)] is performed, the settings for
[85: Focusing screen] and [86: Custom Controls] will remain
unchanged. Although the [83: AE Microadjustment] and [83: FE
Microadjustment] settings will not be cleared, [Disable] will be set.
421
Under the [8] tab, you can customize
various camera features to suit your
picture-taking preferences. Any settings
different from the default will be
displayed in blue.
3 Custom Function Settings
C.Fn1: Exposure
Exposure level increments C.Fn1
1/3: 1/3-stop, Exposure compensation 1/3-stop
Sets 1/3-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB level, and flash exposure compensation.
1/1: 1-stop, Exposure compensation 1/3-stop
Sets whole-stop increments for the shutter speed and aperture,
and 1/3-stop increments for exposure compensation, AEB level,
and flash exposure compensation.
1/2: 1/2-stop, Exposure compensation 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB level, and flash exposure compensation.
ISO speed setting increments C.Fn1
1/3: 1/3-stop
You can set the ISO speed manually in 1/3-stop increments.
1/1: 1-stop
You can set the ISO speed manually in 1-stop increments.
When [1/2-stop, Exposure compensation 1/2-stop] is set, the exposure
level will be displayed as shown below.
Even if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop
increments when ISO Auto is set.
3 Custom Function Settings
422
Bracketing auto cancel C.Fn1
ON: Enable
When you set the power switch to <2>, the AEB and white
balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be
canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie
shooting.
OFF: Disable
The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be
canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash
is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be
canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)
Bracketing sequence C.Fn1
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence
can be changed.
0-+: 0, -, +
-0+: -, 0, +
+0-: +, 0, -
AEB White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction M/G Direction
0 : Standard exposure
0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
- : Decreased exposure - : Blue bias - : Magenta bias
+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias + : Green bias
423
3 Custom Function Settings
Number of bracketed shots C.Fn1
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can
be changed from the default 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [81: Bracketing sequence: 0, -, +] is set, the bracketed shots
will be taken as shown in the table below.
3: 3 shots 5: 5 shots
2: 2 shots 7: 7 shots
(1-stop/step increments)
Spot metering link to AF point C.Fn1
You can enable AF point-linked spot metering in the <r> shooting
mode.
Center AF point only
Regardless of the AF area selection mode and selected AF point,
the spot metering will always be performed at the viewfinder
center.
Linked to active AF point
Spot metering will be linked to the manually-selected AF point. If
the AF area selection mode has been set to Automatic selection
AF, Zone AF, or Large Zone AF, spot metering will be performed
at the viewfinder center.
With an external Speedlite, you can use FE lock linked to a
manually selected AF point. (You can also use it for metered
manual flash exposure (p.262).)
1st Shot 2nd Shot 3rd Shot 4th Shot 5th Shot 6th Shot 7th Shot
3: 3 shots Standard (0)
-1 +1
2: 2 shots Standard (0)
±1
5: 5 shots Standard (0)
-2 -1 +1 +2
7: 7 shots Standard (0)
-3 -2 -1 +1 +2 +3
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB
range. With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted toward the minus
direction for either B/A or M/G.
3 Custom Function Settings
424
C.Fn2: Exposure
Safety shift C.Fn2
OFF: Disable
Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture
Takes effect in the shutter-priority AE <s> and aperture-priority
AE <f> modes. If the subject brightness changes and the
standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure
range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected
setting to obtain the standard exposure.
ISO: ISO speed
Works in the Program AE <d>, shutter-priority AE <s>, and
aperture-priority AE <f> modes. If the subject brightness
changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the
autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the
manually set ISO speed to obtain the standard exposure.
When [ISO speed] is set, safety shift will also work with AEB shooting in
the <a> mode.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], even if [Range for stills] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO
speed will be determined by the [Auto range] setting (p.167). However, if
the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto range], the safety shift
will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed.
Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used.
If [ISO speed] is set, the camera’s internal temperature is low, and the
safety shift sets the ISO speed to ISO 32000 or higher automatically, the
maximum continuous shooting speed will decrease (except when you use
AC Adapter Kit ACK-E4). For details, see page 148.
425
3 Custom Function Settings
Same exposure for new aperture C.Fn2
If the <a> mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO
speed is set manually (except when set to ISO Auto), the open
aperture value may change to a higher number (a smaller aperture) if
you perform any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2. Attach an
Extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose open aperture value
(f/number) changes. If you then shoot while the maximum aperture is
set, the image will be underexposed by the amount the maximum
aperture f/number changes to a higher number. However, by changing
the ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically, you can obtain the
same exposure that would be obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3.
OFF: Disable
Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure
will not be applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture
already set will be used for shooting. If you perform 1, 2, or 3 and
the maximum aperture becomes slower, adjust the ISO speed and
shutter speed before you shoot.
ISO: ISO speed
If you perform 1, 2, or 3, a higher ISO speed will be set
automatically to compensate for the number of stops the maximum
aperture has become slower. The same exposure that would be
obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained. The ISO
speed will change automatically within the range set with [Range
for stills].
ISO/Tv: ISO speed/Shutter speed
If you perform 1, 2, or 3, a higher ISO speed will be set
automatically to compensate for the number of stops the maximum
aperture has become slower. If the ISO speed reaches the upper
limit of the range set with [Range for stills], a slower shutter
speed will be set automatically. The same exposure that would be
obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained. The
shutter speed will change automatically within the range set with
[83: Set shutter speed range].
3 Custom Function Settings
426
Tv: Shutter speed
If you perform 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically
be set to compensate for the number of stops the maximum
aperture has become slower. The same exposure that would be
obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained. The
shutter speed will change automatically within the range set with
[83: Set shutter speed range].
This function also works in the reverse of the above: When the
maximum aperture f/number changes to a smaller number (larger
aperture opening).
This function does not work with macro lenses whose effective aperture
value changes when the magnification changes.
This function does not work during movie shooting.
If [ISO speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the
range set with [Range for stills], the same exposure that would be
obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 cannot be obtained.
If [Shutter speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within
the range set with [83: Set shutter speed range], the same exposure
that would be obtained without performing 1, 2, or 3 cannot be obtained.
If you perform 1, 2, or 3 and the camera turns off (power switch is set to
<2>, etc.) while the exposure is being maintained, the standard
exposure will be updated to the exposure at the moment the camera
turns off.
This function also works with changes in the highest f/number (minimum
aperture).
With [ISO speed] or [Shutter speed] set, if you perform 1, 2, or 3 and
then return to the state before performing 1, 2, or 3 without manually
changing the ISO speed, shutter speed, or aperture, the original
exposure setting will be restored.
If [ISO speed] is set and the ISO speed increases to an expanded ISO
speed, the shutter speed may change to maintain the exposure.
427
3 Custom Function Settings
C.Fn3: Exposure
Restrict shooting modes C.Fn3
You can restrict the shooting modes selectable with the <W>
button.
Select a shooting mode <d>/<f>/<a>/<s>/<BULB>/<w1>/
<w2>/<w3>, then press <0> to add a checkmark <X>. Then select
[OK] to register the setting.
Restrict metering modes C.Fn3
You can restrict the metering modes selectable with the <Q>
button.
Select a metering mode <q> <w> <r> <e>, then press <0> to
add a checkmark <X>. Then select [OK] to register the setting.
Metering used in manual exposure C.Fn3
You can set the metering mode to be used in the <a> shooting mode.
Xq: Specified metering mode
The currently-set metering mode is used.
q: Evaluative metering
w: Partial metering
r: Spot metering
e: Center-weighted average metering
The restricted shooting mode settings are not registered to <w1>,
<w2>, or <w3>.
You cannot remove the [X] mark for all eight modes.
You cannot remove the [X] mark for all four modes.
If <q> <w> <r> <e> is set, pressing the <Q> button during
manual exposure shooting will not select the metering mode.
3 Custom Function Settings
428
Set shutter speed range C.Fn3
You can set the shutter speed range. In the <s> and <a> modes,
you can set the shutter speed manually within the range you have set.
In the <d> and <f> modes, the shutter speed will be set
automatically within the set shutter speed range (except for movie
shooting). Then select [OK] to register the setting.
Highest speed
You can set it from 1/8000 sec. to 15 sec.
Lowest speed
You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec.
Set aperture range C.Fn3
You can set the aperture range. In the <f>, <a>, and <bulb>
modes, you can set the aperture manually within the range you have
set. In the <d> and <s> modes, the aperture will be set
automatically within the set aperture range (except for movie
shooting). Then select [OK] to register the setting.
Min. aperture (Max. f/)
You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.
Max. aperture (Min. f/)
You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.
The settable aperture range varies depending on the lens’s maximum and
minimum apertures.
429
3 Custom Function Settings
AE Microadjustment C.Fn3
You can fine-tune the standard exposure level. The adjustment can
help if the camera’s “standard exposure level” always seems to be
underexposed or overexposed.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
Select [Enable], then press the <Q> button. The adjustment
screen will appear. The adjustment can be made up to ±1 stop in
1/8-stop increments. If the shot images tend to be underexposed,
set it to the plus side. If they tend to be overexposed, set it to the
minus side.
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment
only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent
obtaining an accurate exposure.
Even if you use AE Microadjustment to adjust the standard exposure level,
the effective exposure compensation range you can set for movie shooting
remains unchanged while the standard exposure level alone will be
changed. For movie shooting, if the effective exposure compensation range
is exceeded, the exposure compensation amount equivalent to the AE
Microadjustment amount will not be reflected in the resulting image.
(Example: If AE Microadjustment is set to +1 stop and exposure
compensation is set to +3 stops, an exposure compensation amount of +1
stop will not be applied.)
For viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting, you can set exposure
compensation up to ±5 stops from the adjusted standard exposure.
3 Custom Function Settings
430
FE Microadjustment C.Fn3
You can fine adjust the camera’s standard flash exposure level. The
adjustment can help if the camera’s “standard flash exposure level”
(without flash exposure compensation) always seems to underexpose
or overexpose the subject.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
Select [Enable], then press the <Q> button. The adjustment
screen will appear. The adjustment can be made up to ±1 stop in
1/8-stop increments. If the flash exposure level tends to
underexpose the subject, set it to the plus side. If it tends to
overexpose, set it to the minus side.
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment
only if necessary. Note that doing this adjustment may prevent
obtaining the correct flash exposure.
431
3 Custom Function Settings
C.Fn4: Drive
Continuous shooting speed C.Fn4
You can set the continuous shooting speed for <
o
> High-speed
continuous shooting, <
p
> Low-speed continuous shooting, <
6o
>
Silent high-speed continuous shooting, and <
6p
> Silent low-speed
continuous shooting. Then select [
OK
] to register the setting.
High speed
The default setting is 14 fps. For viewfinder shooting, you can set
2 fps to 14 fps. For Live View shooting, you can set 2 fps to 14 fps
or 16 fps. The “(16)” indicates the continuous shooting speed for
Live View shooting.
Low speed
The default setting is 3 fps. You can set it from 1 to 13 fps.
Silent HS continuous
The default setting is 5 fps. You can set it from 2 to 5 fps.
Silent LS continuous
The default setting is 3 fps. You can set it from 1 to 4 fps.
For viewfinder shooting, if the ISO speed is H1 (equivalent to ISO
102400) or higher (ISO 32000 or higher if the camera’s internal
temperature is low), the maximum continuous shooting speed will be
approx. 10.0 fps even if [High speed] is set to [14 (16) fps] - [11 fps] or
[Low speed] is set to [13 fps] - [11 fps]. (With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E4,
the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx. 8.0 fps
regardless of the ISO speed (p.148).)
For Live View shooting, if the ISO speed is H1 (equivalent to ISO
102400) or higher (ISO 32000 or higher if the camera’s internal
temperature is low), the maximum continuous shooting speed will be
approx. 14.0 fps even if [High speed] is set to [14 (16) fps]. (With ACK-
E4, the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx. 14.0 fps
regardless of the ISO speed. (p.148).)
If you use a Speedlite with Live View shooting and set [
High speed
] to [
14
(16) fps
], the flash will not be fired during high-speed continuous shooting.
If [z3: Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to [Enable] (p.198), you may not be
able to shoot at the continuous shooting speed you have set.
3 Custom Function Settings
432
Limit continuous shot count C.Fn4
You can limit the maximum burst for continuous shooting. With
continuous shooting set, while you keep holding down the shutter
button, the camera automatically stops shooting after the set number
of continuous shots is taken.
You can set it from 2 to 99 exposures. Pressing the <L> button will
return the setting to [Disable].
If [Disable] is set, continuous shooting can continue up to the
maximum burst displayed on the right side of the viewfinder.
Restrict drive modes C.Fn4
You can restrict the drive modes selectable with the <o>
button.
Select a drive mode <u> < > <p> <B> <V> <M> <k>
<l>, then press <0> to add a checkmark <X>. Then select [OK]
to register the setting.
You cannot remove the [X] mark for all eight modes.
433
3 Custom Function Settings
C.Fn5: Display/Operation
Focusing Screen C.Fn5
You can change the focusing screen with an Ec-series focusing screen
(sold separately) more suited for the techniques in the photography.
If you change the focusing screen, make sure to change this
setting to match the focusing screen type. This is to obtain a
correct exposure.
Std.: Ec-C6
Standard focusing screen.
: Ec-A, B, L
For Laser-matte screens.
The focusing screen setting will not be cleared even if you select [88:
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) ].
To change the focusing screen, refer to the Instruction Manual of the
focusing screen.
Since the Ec-A/B/L focusing screens have a prism at the center, correct
exposures cannot be obtained with evaluative metering and spot
metering at the center. Use either center-weighted average metering or
AF point-linked spot metering (except for at the center).
Since the Ec-A/B/L focusing screens have a prism in the center, AF
based on color or facial information may not be achieved if the subject is
near the center of the viewfinder, even if [24: Auto AF pt sel.: EOS
iTR AF] is set to [EOS iTR AF (Face priority)] or [EOS iTR AF] (p.127).
Although an Ec-C/CII/CIII/CIV/CV/D/H/I/N/R/S focusing screen can be
installed in the camera, the correct exposure will not be obtained. Use a
commercially-available light meter to shoot with manual exposure or
exposure compensation.
If [Ec-A, B, L] is set, the spot metering circle will not be displayed at the
viewfinder center.
The Area AF frame displayed on the Ec-CIII/CIV/N/S focusing screens
does not match this camera’s AF Area.
3 Custom Function Settings
434
Viewfinder info. during exposure C.Fn5
For viewfinder shooting, you can set whether to display the shooting
information in the viewfinder during the exposure.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
The shooting information will be displayed in the viewfinder even
during exposure. This function is useful when you want to check
the exposure, possible shots, etc. during continuous shooting.
LCD panel illumination during Bulb C.Fn5
You can set how the LCD panel behaves if you start a Bulb exposure
with its illumination lit: either to stay on, or to turn off when the
exposure starts and light up for a short period if the <U> button is
pressed.
OFF: Off
When the Bulb exposure starts, the LCD panel illumination turns
off. Pressing the <U> button during a Bulb exposure illuminates
the LCD panel for approx. 6 sec.
ON: On during Bulb
The LCD panel illumination remains on until the Bulb exposure
ends. This is useful when you are taking a Bulb exposure in low
light and want to check the exposure time.
When the shooting mode is set to “Bulb”, the viewfinder information will not
be displayed even if [Enable] is set.
435
3 Custom Function Settings
Recording card, image size setting C.Fn5
When you press the <H> button to select the card or set the image
size, you can select to do it with the rear LCD panel or with the LCD
monitor.
Rear LCD panel
You can press the <H> button, then turn the <6> or <5> dial
while looking at the rear LCD panel.
LCD monitor
When you press the <H> button, the [Img type/size] or [Record
func+card/folder sel.] screen will appear. Pressing the button
toggles between the two screens.
OFF: Disable H button
You cannot select the card or set the image size by pressing the
<H> button. It can prevent the image size or recording card from
changing when the <H> button is pressed accidentally. Select
the card or set the image size from the menu screen.
3 Custom Function Settings
436
C.Fn6: Operation
Warnings z in viewfinder C.Fn6
When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be
displayed in the viewfinder (p.30).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, then
press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
When monochrome V is set
If the Picture Style is set to [Monochrome] (p.170), the warning
icon will appear.
When WB is corrected
If white balance correction is set (p.186), the warning icon will
appear.
When one-touch image quality is set
If you change the image-recording quality with the one-touch
image quality setting function (p.455), the warning icon will appear.
When spot metering is set
If the metering mode is set to <r> spot metering (p.239), the
warning icon will appear.
Dial direction during Tv/Av C.Fn6
: Normal
: Reverse direction
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture
can be reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and
<5> dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning
direction of only the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s
turning direction in the <a> mode and the turning direction to set
the exposure compensation in the <d>, <s>, and <f> modes
will be the same.
437
3 Custom Function Settings
Av setting without lens C.Fn6
You can set whether the aperture can still be set when no lens is
attached to the camera.
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
You can set the aperture with the camera even while no lens is
attached. Convenient when you want to set the aperture in
advance when you know which aperture to use.
Multi function lock C.Fn6
When the power switch is set to <R>, it can prevent the <6>,
<5>, and <9> from accidentally changing a setting.
Select the camera control(s) you want to lock with <R>, then
press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
6 Main Dial
The Main Dial and vertical-grip Main Dial will be locked.
5 Quick Control Dial
The Quick Control Dial will be locked.
9 Multi-controller
The Multi-controller and vertical-grip Multi-controller will be locked.
Custom Controls C.Fn6
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences. For details, see page 443.
If you try to use any of the locked camera controls, <3> will appear in
the viewfinder and on the top LCD panel. Also, [LOCK] will appear on
the Quick Control screen (p.67) and Custom Quick Control screen
(p.461).
By default, with the power switch is set to <R>, the <5> dial will
be locked.
Even if the [X] is added to lock the <5> dial, you can still use the
touch pad <h>.
3 Custom Function Settings
438
J/Kbutton function C.Fn6
You can change the function of the <J/K>button. During image
playback, you can protect images, record a voice memo, and rate
images.
J/K: Protect (Hold: Record memo)
To protect an image, press the <J/K> button. To start recording
a voice memo, hold down the <J/K> button for approx. 2 sec. To
end the recording, let go of the button.
K : Rec. memo (J disabled)
Pressing the <J/K> button starts recording a voice memo
immediately, and letting go of the button ends the recording. To
protect an image, use the [x1: Protect images] screen.
7/K: Play memo (Hold: Rec. memo)
When you play back an image having a voice memo, press the
<J/K> button to hear the voice memo. To start recording a voice
memo, hold down the <J/K> button for approx. 2 sec. To end the
recording, let go of the button. To protect an image, use the [x1:
Protect images] screen.
9: Rating (J and K disabled)
To rate an image, press the <J/K> button. Each time you press
the button, the rating will change as follows: OFF, l, m, n,
o, p. To protect an image, use the [x1: Protect images]
screen.
If [Rating (J/K disabled)] is selected and you press the <Q> button,
you can set the ratings selectable (usable) with the <J/K> button.
439
3 Custom Function Settings
C.Fn7: Others
Add cropping information C.Fn7
If you set the cropping information, vertical lines for the aspect ratio
you set during the Live View shooting will be displayed on the screen.
You can then compose the shot as if you were shooting with a
medium- or large-format camera (6x6 cm, 4x5 inch, etc.).
When you take a picture, the aspect ratio information for cropping the
image with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.550) will be
appended to the image. (The image is recorded to the card without
being cropped.)
If you transfer the image to a computer, you can use Digital Photo
Professional to easily crop the image to the aspect ratio that was set at
the time of shooting.
OFF : Off (aspect ratio 3:2) 6:7 : Aspect ratio 6:7
6:6 : Aspect ratio 6:6 5:6 : Aspect ratio 10:12
3:4 : Aspect ratio 3:4 5:7 : Aspect ratio 5:7
4:5 : Aspect ratio 4:5
Cropping information will also be appended for viewfinder shooting.
However, the cropping range will not be displayed.
Even if a RAW image with cropping information added is processed with
the camera (p.392), the JPEG image cannot be saved as a cropped
image. When the RAW image is developed, the JPEG image with
cropping information will be saved.
3 Custom Function Settings
440
Timer duration C.Fn7
You can change how long a function setting associated with a button
remains in effect after you let go of that button. You can set the timer
duration within 0 sec. to 59 sec. or within 1 min. to 60 min.
6-sec. timer
You can set how long the metering and AE lock are to be
maintained.
16-sec. timer
You can set how long the FE lock and multi-spot metering are to
be maintained.
Timer after release
You can set how long the metering is to be maintained after
shutter release. Normally, the timer length is approx. 2 sec. after
the shutter release. A longer timer length will make it easier to
keep using the AE lock for shooting at the same exposure.
Shutter release time lag C.Fn7
Normally, stabilization control is performed to stabilize the shutter-
release time lag. By setting [Shortened], this stabilization control can
be disabled to make the shutter-release time lag shorter.
: Standard
: Shortened
The shutter-release time lag is normally approx. 0.055 sec. at the
shortest. By shortening it, it can be as short as approx. 0.036 sec.
The shutter-release time lag will vary depending on the shooting conditions,
lens type, aperture, etc.
441
3 Custom Function Settings
Memo audio quality C.Fn7
When you record a voice memo, you can set the audio quality.
High quality (48 kHz)
You can record the voice memo at the same audio quality as a
movie.
Low quality (8 kHz)
The voice memo’s file size is smaller than with [High quality (48
kHz)].
Default Erase option C.Fn7
During image playback and image review immediately after shooting,
when you press the <L> button, the erase menu appears (p.386).
You can set which option, [Cancel] or [Erase], is to be preselected on
this screen.
If [Erase] is set, you can just press <0> to quickly erase the image.
: [Cancel] selected
L: [Erase] selected
If you record another voice memo to an image that already has a voice
memo, the audio quality will be the same as the first voice memo regardless
of this setting.
If [Erase] is set, be careful not to erase an image accidentally.
3 Custom Function Settings
442
Retract lens on power off C.Fn7
This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven
STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera.
You can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the
camera’s power switch is set to <2>.
ON : Enable
OFF : Disable
When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s
focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
443
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences.
1Select [Custom Controls].
Under the [86] tab, select [Custom
Controls], then press <0>.
XThe Custom Controls setting screen
will appear.
2Select a camera button or dial.
Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
XThe name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
XThe diagram on the left will show the
location of the selected button or dial.
3Assign a function.
Select a function, then press <0>.
If the [z] icon appears on the
screen’s bottom left, you can press
the <B> button and set other
related options.
4Exit the setting.
When you press <0> to exit the
setting, the screen in step 2 will
reappear.
Press the <M> button to exit.
7 Custom Controls
With the screen in step 2 displayed, you can press the <L> button to revert
the Custom Control settings to their defaults. Note that the [86: Custom
Controls] settings will not be canceled even if you select [88: Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
7 Custom Controls
444
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
Metering and AF start 448 k k*1k*1
AF stop 449 kk
Switch to registered AF function
450
ONE SHOT z AI SERVO k*3k*3
Switch to registered AF point
AF point direct selection
451
Select AF point
OzS (
during metering)
Pause Movie Servo AF 452
Metering start
452
k
AE lock k k
AE lock (while button pressed) k
AE lock (hold) k k
AE lock, AF stop k k
FE lock
453
kk
ISO speed
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn )
Set ISO speed ( during metering)
Set ISO, Ozg ( during metering)
Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
)
454Shutter speed setting in M mode
Aperture setting in M mode
AFExposure
445
7 Custom Controls
k
kk k
k*2k*2k*2
k*3k*3k*3
k*4k*4k*4
k*5k*6
k*7
kkk
k k k k
k k k k
kkk
k
k
k
k
k
kk
kk
< > stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses
equipped with Image Stabilizer.
7 Custom Controls
446
Function
Page
Image size selection 454
One-touch image quality setting
455
One-touch image quality (hold)
Record function+card/folder selection
Picture Style
White balance selection
Depth-of-field preview
456
IS start
Menu display
Register/recall shooting function k*9k*9
Unlock while button pressed
457
Start movie recording (when k set)
Switch to Custom shooting mode
Image replay
Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn )
Magnify/Reduce button
Playback button
Info button
458
Erase button
Protect button
Cycle between the set functions
Flash function settings
No function (disabled) k k
ImagesOperation
447
7 Custom Controls
k
k*8k*8k*8
k*8k*8k*8
k
k
k
k k
k k k
k
k k
kkkk
k
k
k
k k
k k
k k
k k
k k
k*10
k
k kkkkkk
< > stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses
equipped with Image Stabilizer.
7 Custom Controls
448
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are performed.
*1: When assigned to the <p> or <A> button,
pressing the <B> button while the setting
screen is displayed will enable you to set the
detailed AF settings. When shooting, pressing the
<p> or <A> button will perform AF as it was
set.
AF start position
When [Registered AF point] is set, you can press the <p> or
<A> button to switch to the registered AF point.
Registering the AF Point
1. Set the AF area selection mode to one of the following: Single-point
Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF (manual selection), AF
point expansion (manual selection ), AF point expansion (manual
selection, surrounding points), or Automatic selection AF. Zone AF
and Large Zone AF cannot be selected.
2. Select an AF point manually.
3. Hold down the <S> button, then press the <i> button. A beep
will sound, and the AF point will be registered. If the AF area
selection mode is set to any setting other than Automatic selection
AF, the registered AF point will blink.
: Metering and AF start
When the AF point is registered, the following will be displayed:
• Automatic selection AF: HP (HP: Home Position)
• Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF (manual
selection), AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point
expansion (manual selection, surrounding points): SEL (Center),
SEL HP (Off center)
To cancel the registered AF point, hold down the <S> button, then
press the <O> button. The registered AF point will also be canceled if
you select [54: Clear all camera settings].
449
7 Custom Controls
AI Servo AF characteristics (p.113)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set case
from [Case 1] to [Case 6].
AF operation (p.88)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
operation.
AF area selection mode (p.91)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
area selection mode.
If you want to keep using the currently selected AF point when you
press the <p> or <A> button, set [AF start position] to
[Manually selected AF point]. If you want to keep the currently set AI
Servo AF characteristics, AF operation, and AF area selection mode,
select [Maintain current setting].
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this
function. Useful when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.
: AF stop
If [24: Orientation linked AF point] is set to [Separate AF pts:
Area+pt] or [Separate AF pts: Pt only], you can separately register the
AF points to be used for vertical (grip up or down) and horizontal
shooting.
If [Registered AF point] and [AF area selection mode] are both set for
[AF start position], [Registered AF point] will take effect.
7 Custom Controls
450
After setting and assigning this function to a button, you can apply the
following settings by holding down the assigned button for AF: AF area
selection mode (p.91), Tracking sensitivity (p.118), Acceleration/
deceleration tracking (p.119), AF point auto switching (p.120), Servo 1st
image priority (p.122), and Servo 2nd image priority (p.123). Useful
when you want to change the AF characteristics during AI Servo AF.
*2: With the setting screen displayed, press the
<B> button to display the detailed settings
screen. Turn the <5> or <6> dial to select the
parameter to be registered, then press <0> to
add a checkmark [X]. When you select a
parameter, then press <0>, you can adjust the
parameter setting. By pressing the <L> button,
you can revert the settings to their defaults.
You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you
press the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches
to AI Servo AF mode. If you press the button in the AI Servo AF mode,
the camera switches to One-Shot AF mode. Useful when you need to
keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo AF for a subject
that keeps moving and stopping.
*3: With the setting screen displayed, when you press the <B> button, you can select
[Switch only when btn is held] or [Switch each time btn is pressed].
During metering, when you press the button assigned to this function,
focusing point can be switched to the registered AF point.
*4: With the setting screen displayed, when you press the <B> button, you can select
[Switch only when btn is held] or [Switch each time btn is pressed]. To register
the AF point, see page 448.
: Switch to registered AF function
: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
: Switch to registered AF point
451
7 Custom Controls
During metering, you can select an AF point directly with the <5> or
<9> dial without pressing the <S> button.
*5: With the Quick Control Dial setting screen
displayed, you can press the <B> button, then
set the direction for switching the AF point for when
the <5> dial is turned. The [Direction: AF point
switching] settings for [Horizontal] and [Vertical]
will work for Single-point Spot AF, Single-point AF,
Man. select.: AF point expansion, and Expand AF
area: Surround. The [Direction: Zone AF frame
switch] settings for [Cycle through the zones],
[Horizontal], and [Vertical] will work with Zone AF.
*6: On the Multi-controller setting screen, press the <B> button and you can select
the AF point ([Switch to center AF point] or [Switch to registered AF point]) the
camera will switches to when you press the center of <9>. To register the AF point,
see page 448.
During metering, you can select an AF point directly with <5> without
pressing the <S> button. When this function is set, the functions of the
<O> and <S> buttons will be switched between them. By holding
down the <S> button and turning the <6> dial, you can set the
exposure compensation or aperture.
*7: With the setting screen displayed, you can press the <B> button, then set the
direction for switching the AF point for when the <5> dial is turned. The [Direction:
AF point switching] settings for [Horizontal] and [Vertical] will work for Single-point
Spot AF, Single-point AF, Man. select.: AF point expansion, and Expand AF area:
Surround. The [Direction: Zone AF frame switch] settings for [Cycle through the
zones], [Horizontal], and [Vertical] will work with Zone AF.
: Direct AF point selection
: Select AF point O z S ( during metering)
7 Custom Controls
452
During Movie Servo AF, you can pause the AF when you press the
button assigned to this function. Press the button again to resume
Movie Servo AF.
When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is
performed (AF is not performed).
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during metering. Useful when you want to focus and
meter the shot separately.
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter
button.
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the
button again. Useful when you want to focus and meter the shot
separately or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting.
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) and the AF will stop. Useful during AI Servo AF if
you want AE lock at the same time when AF stops.
: Pause Movie Servo AF
: Metering start
: AE lock
: AE lock (while button pressed)
: AE lock (hold)
: AE lock, AF stop
If you assign [AE lock (while button pressed)] to the shutter button, any
buttons assigned to [AE lock] or [AE lock (hold)] will also work as [AE lock
(while button pressed)].
453
7 Custom Controls
For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will
fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
You can press <0> to change the ISO speed. Set while looking at the
top LCD panel or viewfinder.
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <0> and turning the
<6> dial. If this control is used with ISO Auto set, manual ISO speed
setting will take effect. It is not possible to revert to the ISO Auto setting.
If you use this function in the <a> mode, you can adjust the exposure
with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter speed and
aperture value.
During metering, you can set the ISO speed by turning the <5> dial.
The settable range is the same as with [Set ISO speed (hold
btn,turn )].
During metering, you can set the ISO speed by turning the <5> dial.
When this function is set, the functions of the <O> and <i> buttons
will be switched between the two. By pressing the <i> button and
turning the <6> dial, you can set the exposure compensation or
aperture value.
: FE lock
: Set ISO speed
: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn )
: Set ISO speed ( during metering)
Set ISO, O z g ( during metering)
7 Custom Controls
454
You can set the exposure compensation by holding down <0> and
turning the <6> dial. Useful when you want to set exposure
compensation in <a> manual exposure with ISO Auto set.
In manual exposure <a> mode, you can set the shutter speed with the
<6> or <5> dial.
In manual exposure <a> mode, you can set the aperture with the
<5> or <6> dial.
While looking at the rear LCD panel, you can press <0> to select the
other card or set the image size. To select the other card, turn the
<6> dial. To set the image size, turn the <5> dial.
: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn )
: Shutter speed setting in M mode
: Aperture setting in M mode
: Image size selection
The operations for [Set ISO speed (hold btn, turn )] (p.453) and [Expo
comp (hold btn, turn )] are possible even when the power switch is set
to <R> (Multi-function lock, p.66).
455
7 Custom Controls
Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the image
size set here. While the camera switches the image size, the p1
icon will blink in the viewfinder and the image size will blink on the rear
LCD panel. After the shooting ends, the One-touch image quality
setting will be canceled and the camera will switch back to the previous
image size.
*8: With the setting screen displayed, by pressing the <B> button, you can set the
image size for this function.
Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the image
size set here. While the camera switches the image size, the p1
icon will blink in the viewfinder and the image size will blink on the rear
LCD panel. Even after shooting, the One-touch image quality setting
will not be canceled. To revert to the previous image size, press the
button assigned to this function again.
*8: With the setting screen displayed, by pressing the <B> button, you can set the
image size for this function.
Press <0> to display the Record func+card/folder selection screen on
the LCD monitor (p.152).
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the
LCD monitor (p.169).
You can press <0> to change the white balance. Set it while looking
at the top LCD panel or viewfinder.
: One-touch image quality setting
: One-touch image quality (hold)
: Record function+card/folder selection
: Picture Style
: White balance selection
7 Custom Controls
456
Pressing the button assigned to this function will stop down the lens
aperture so you can check the depth of field (p.235).
If you press the button assigned to this function when the lens’s IS
switch is set to <1>, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will operate.
Press <0> to display the menu on the LCD monitor.
You can manually set the main shooting functions, such as the shutter
speed, aperture, ISO speed, metering mode, and AF area selection
mode, and can register them to the camera. Only while you hold down
the button assigned to this function, you can recall and use the
registered shooting function settings to take a pictue.
*9: With the setting screen displayed, press the
<B> button to display the detailed settings.
Turn the <5> or <6> dial to select the function
to be registered, then press <0> to add a
checkmark [X] to it. When you select a function
and press <0>, you can adjust the setting. By
pressing the <L> button, you can revert the
settings to their defaults.
By selecting [Register current settings], the
camera’s current settings will be registered. To
register the AF point, see page 448.
: Depth-of-field preview
: IS start
: Menu display
: Register/recall shooting function
457
7 Custom Controls
Even when the power switch is set to <R>, as long as the button
assigned to this function is held down, you can use the camera control
buttons and dials restricted by [86: Multi function lock].
For movie shooting, pressing the button assigned to this function will
start the movie shooting. To stop the movie shooting, press the button
again.
When the shooting mode is not <w1>, <w2>, or <w3>, you can press
the <B> button to switch to the registered Custom shooting mode
(p.472). Under [83: Restrict shooting modes], if [w1], [w2], and
[w3] have a checkmark [X], each time you press the <B> button,
the mode will be changed in the following sequence: w1 9 w2 9 w3
9 current shooting mode.
Press <0> to play back the images.
Press <0> to magnify or reduce the images recorded on the card
(p.355). You can also magnify the image during Live View shooting and
movie shooting (p.290, 291).
Assigns the same function as the <u> button.
Assigns the same function as the <x> button.
: Unlock while button pressed
: Start movie recording (when k set)
: Switch to Custom shooting mode
: Image replay
: Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn )
: Magnify/Reduce button
: Playback button
7 Custom Controls
458
Assigns the same function as the <B> button.
Assigns the same function as the <L> button.
Assigns the same function as the <J/K> button.
Pressing the <B> button each time will switch the shooting function
settings in the following sequence: ISO speed, exposure compensation/
aperture, white balance, drive mode/AF operation, flash exposure
compensation/metering mode, AEB setting, shooting mode.
*10: With the setting screen displayed, press the
<B> button to display the detailed settings.
You can select the functions to switch. Turn the
<5> dial to select the desired function, then
press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. Then select
[OK] to register the setting.
Press <0> to display the flash function setting screen.
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
: Info button
: Erase button
: Protect button
: Cycle between the set functions
: Flash function settings
: No function (disabled)
459
On the standard Quick Control screen (p.67), preset shooting functions
are displayed in the default layout. On the Custom Quick Control
screen, you can customize the screen with your preferred shooting
functions and layout. This feature is called “Custom Quick Control”.
This page explains how to change the layout of the Custom Quick
Control screen. Page 68 explains how to operate the Quick Control, and
page 478 explains how to display the Custom Quick Control screen.
1Select [Custom Quick Control].
Under the [52] tab, select [Custom
Quick Control], then press <0>.
2Select [Start editing layout].
3Read the operation procedure
and select [OK].
•Q: Add item
•L: Remove
•s: Select and confirm
Items displayed on the default screen
are shown on the left.
Custom Quick Control
Custom Quick Control
460
4Add an item.
Press the <Q> button.
Turn the <5> dial or use <9> to
select the item to be added, then
press <0>.
To remove an item, select the item,
then press the <L> button.
Otherwise, select [Clear all items] in
step 2.
For items that let you select the icon
size, turn the <5> dial or use <9>
to select the size, then press <0>.
For items which can be positioned
and for display sizes, see page 462.
5Position the item.
Use <6>, <5> or <9> to move
the item (framed with directional
wedges) to the desired position.
If you want to change the size, press
the <B> button to change it.
Press <0> to place the item. If there
is already an item on that position, it
will be overwritten (deleted).
To change the position of an item,
select the item, then press <0> to
move it.
If you first want to delete all the items displayed by default, select [Clear all
items] in step 2, then go to step 4.
461
Custom Quick Control
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to position
other items as desired.
To delete an item already in position,
select it, then press the <L> button.
6Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button to exit the
setting. The screen in step 2 will
reappear.
7Check the setting screen.
Under [52: z button display
options], check that [Custom Quick
Control screen] has a checkmark
[X] (p.478).
Press the <B> button to display
the Custom Quick Control screen
(p.478) and check the layout.
Press the <Q> button to use the
Quick Control (p.68).
In step 2, selecting [Revert layout to default] will initialize the current
setting and revert the Custom Quick Control screen to the default layout
(p.459).
Selecting [Clear all items] will delete all the items set. The screen will
then become blank except for the bottom line.
Sample layout
Sample screen
Resetting the Custom Quick Control Screen or Clearing All Items
Custom Quick Control
462
Available Items and Display Sizes for the Screen Layout
(Vertical x horizontal cells)
Item and Size 1x1 1x2 1x3 1x5 2x2 2x3 3x1 4x1
Shooting mode k k
Shutter speed k k
Aperture k k
ISO speed k k
Exposure compensation/AEB setting
k k k
Flash exposure compensation k k k
Picture Style k k
White balance k k
White balance shift/bracketing k k
Auto Lighting Optimizer k
Custom Controls k
AF operation k k
AF point selection k k
Metering mode k
Drive mode k
Recording function/card
selection kk k
Date/Time/Zone k k k k
External Speedlite control k
Highlight tone priority k
Viewfinder grid k
Sensor cleaning k
Exposure level k k
GPS setting k
Depending on the items, the amount of displayable information and
settable functions for Quick Control may vary due to their display sizes.
The same item cannot be placed in multiple positions on the screen.
463
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name
the registered menu tabs and press the <M> button to display the
My Menu tab first.
1Select [Add My Menu tab].
Under the [9] tab, select [Add My
Menu tab], then press <0>.
2Select [OK].
XThe [MY MENU1] tab is created.
You can create up to five menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
1Select [Configure: MY MENU*].
Turn the <6> dial to select
[Configure: MY MENU*] (tab for
registering menu items), then press
<0>.
3 Registering My Menu
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
3 Registering My Menu
464
2Select [Select items to register].
3Register the desired items.
Select the desired item, then press
<0>.
Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
You can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want to
change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, turn the <5> dial to
change the order, then press <0>.
Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all
the registered items under the tab.
My Menu Tab Settings
465
3 Registering My Menu
Delete tab
You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete
tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.
Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1Select [Rename tab].
2Enter text.
Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
Operate the <5>, <6>, or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
You can enter up to 16 characters.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
3Exit the setting.
After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
XThe set name is saved.
If you cannot enter text in step 2, press the <Q> button and use the
character palette when the blue frame appears.
3 Registering My Menu
466
You can delete all My Menu tabs or all
My Menu items you created.
Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select
[Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY
MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
Delete all items
You can delete only but all the items registered under the [MY
MENU1] to [MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete
all items] is selected, all the items registered under all the created
tabs will be deleted.
Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items
If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names
renamed with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
467
3 Registering My Menu
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
Display only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The z, 2, 3, 5, and 8 tabs will
not be displayed.)
Menu Display Settings
468
The camera’s shooting functions, menu functions, Custom Functions,
and other camera settings can be saved to the card as a camera
settings file. When this file is loaded to the camera, the saved camera
settings will be applied. You can save your preferred settings for a
particular scene or subject and load the settings file to another EOS-1D
X Mark II.
1Select [Save/load cam settings on
card].
Under the [54] tab, select [Save/load
cam settings on card], then press
<0>.
2Select [Save to card].
3Select [OK].
XThe camera settings will be saved to
the card.
On the screen in step 3, you can
press the <B> button to change
the file name (8 characters) as
desired and save it.
For the procedure, see “Changing the
File Name” on page 203. The number
of characters that can be entered will
be different, but the procedure for
entering the file name is the same.
3
Saving and Loading Camera Settings
Saving Camera Settings
Target card
469
3 Saving and Loading Camera Settings
Shooting functions
Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation,
AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode,
Exposure compensation amount, AEB increment, Flash exposure
compensation amount
Menu display
[z1] White balance, WB correction/BKT setting (stills)/WB
correction (movies), Color space, Picture Style, Lens
aberration correction, Multiple exposure (setting)
[z2] JPEG quality, Image size, ISO speed settings, Auto Lighting
Optimizer, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO speed
noise reduction, Highlight tone priority
[z3] Image review time, Beep, Release shutter without card,
Mirror lockup, Flash firing, E-TTL II flash metering, Flash sync
speed in Av mode, Anti-flicker shooting
[z4 (Live View shooting)]
Live View shooting, AF method, Grid display, Exposure
simulation
[z5 (Live View shooting)]
LV silent shooting, Metering timer, LV touch control
Saved Settings
Camera settings files saved by a camera other than a EOS-1D X Mark II
cannot be loaded to this camera.
Up to ten camera settings files can be saved on a card. If the card already
has ten camera settings files, you can either overwrite an existing file or use
another card.
3 Saving and Loading Camera Settings
470
[z4 (Movie)]
Movie Servo AF, AF method, Grid display, Movie recording
quality, Sound recording, AF speed with Movie Servo AF,
Movie Servo AF subject tracking
[z5 (Movie)]
Metering timer, LV touch control, Silent control, V button
function, HDMI connection display
[21] Case 1, Case 2, Case 3, Case 4, Case 5, Case 6
[22] AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority
[23] Lens electronic MF, AF-assist beam firing, One-Shot AF
release priority
[24] Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF, Lens drive when AF
impossible, Selectable AF point, Select AF area selection
mode, AF area selection method, Orientation linked AF point,
Initial AF point with AI Servo AF
[25] AF point selection pattern, AF point display during focus,
Viewfinder display illumination, AF status in viewfinder, AF
Microadjustment
[x2] Image jump with 6
[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram
display, Magnification (approx.)
[51] Recording function, File numbering, File name, Auto rotate
[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness, Viewfinder display, z
button display options
[
53
] Auto cleaning, GPS settings (GPS, Auto time setting, Position
update interval, Log GPS position), HDMI output frame rate
471
3 Saving and Loading Camera Settings
[81] Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,
Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of
bracketed shots, AF point-linked spot metering
[82] Safety shift, Same exposure for new aperture
[83] Restrict shooting modes, Restrict metering modes, Metering
used in manual exposure, Set shutter speed range, Set
aperture range, AE Microadjustment, FE Microadjustment
[84] Continuous shooting speed, Limit continuous shot count,
Restrict drive modes
[85] Focusing screen, Viewfinder info. during exposure, LCD
panel illumination during Bulb, Recording card and image
size setting
[86] Warnings z in viewfinder, Dial direction during Tv/Av, Av
setting without lens, Multi function lock, Custom Controls,
J/K button function
[87] Add cropping information, Timer duration, Shutter release
time lag, Memo audio quality, Default Erase option, Retract
lens on power off
In step 2, select [Load from card]. Up to ten camera settings files
saved in the card will be displayed. When you select the desired file, it
will be loaded, and the settings will be applied to the camera.
Loading Camera Settings
Menu items under the [9] My Menu tab will also be preserved.
472
You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting
functions, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom
shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s <w1>, <w2>, and <w3>
positions. To use <w2> or <w3>, use [83: Restrict shooting modes]
to enable <w2> and <w3> (p.427).
1Select [Custom shooting mode
(C1-C3)].
Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
shooting mode (C1-C3)], then press
<0>.
2Select [Register settings].
3Register the desired items.
Select the Custom shooting mode to
be registered, then press <0>.
Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
XThe current camera settings (p.473)
will be registered under the Mode
Dial’s C* position.
If you change a setting while shooting in the <w1>, <w2>, or <w3>
mode, the respective Custom shooting mode can be updated
automatically to reflect the change in the setting (Auto update). To
enable this automatic update, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step
2.
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
473
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes
If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of respective modes
can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes
registered.
Shooting functions
Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation,
AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode,
Exposure compensation amount, AEB increment, Flash exposure
compensation amount
Menu display
[z1] White balance, WB correction/BKT setting (stills)/WB
correction (movies), Color space, Picture Style, Lens
aberration correction, Multiple exposure (setting)
[z2] JPEG quality, Image size, ISO speed settings, Auto Lighting
Optimizer, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO speed
noise reduction, Highlight tone priority
[z3] Image review time, Beep, Release shutter without card,
Mirror lockup, Flash firing, E-TTL II flash metering, Flash sync
speed in Av mode, Anti-flicker shooting
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
Settings To Be Registered
My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.
Even in the <w1>, <w2>, or <w3> shooting mode, you can still change the
shooting function settings and menu function settings.
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes
474
[z4 (Live View shooting)]
Live View shooting, AF method, Grid display, Exposure
simulation
[z5 (Live View shooting)]
LV silent shooting, Metering timer, LV touch control
[z4 (Movie)]
Movie Servo AF, AF method, Grid display, Movie recording
quality, Sound recording, AF speed with Movie Servo AF,
Movie Servo AF subject tracking
[z5 (Movie)]
Metering timer, LV touch control, Movie rec count, Movie play
count, Silent control, V button function, HDMI connection
display
[21] Case 1, Case 2, Case 3, Case 4, Case 5, Case 6
[22] AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority
[23] Lens electronic MF, AF-assist beam firing, One-Shot AF
release priority
[24] Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF, Lens drive when AF
impossible, Selectable AF point, Select AF area selection
mode, AF area selection method, Orientation linked AF point,
Initial AF point with AI Servo AF
[25] AF point selection pattern, AF point display during focus,
Viewfinder display illumination, AF status in viewfinder, AF
Microadjustment (excluding the adjustment amount)
[x2] Image jump with 6
[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram
display, Movie play count, Magnification (approx.)
475
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes
[51] File numbering, Auto rotate
[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness, Viewfinder display, z
button display options
[53] Auto cleaning, HDMI output frame rate
[81] Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,
Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of
bracketed shots, AF point-linked spot metering
[82] Safety shift, Same exposure for new aperture
[83] Restrict shooting modes, Metering used in manual exposure,
Set shutter speed range, Set aperture range, AE
Microadjustment (excluding the adjustment amount), FE
Microadjustment (excluding the adjustment amount)
[84] Continuous shooting speed, Limit continuous shot count,
Restrict drive modes
[85] Viewfinder info. during exposure, LCD panel illumination
during Bulb, Recording card and image size setting
[86] Dial direction during Tv/Av, Av setting without lens, Multi
function lock, Custom Controls (excluding <B> button
setting), J/K button function
[87] Add cropping information, Timer duration, Shutter release
time lag, Memo audio quality, Default Erase option, Retract
lens on power off
476
477
14
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.
478
When you press the <B> button with
the camera being ready to shoot, you
can switch the display as follows:
Displays camera settings (p.479),
Electronic level (p.82), Quick Control
screen (p.480), and Custom Quick
Control screen (p.461).
[z button display options] under
[52] tab enables you to select the
options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
Select the desired display option and
press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
B Button Functions
Camera settings
Electronic level
Quick Control screen
Custom Quick
Control screen
479
B Button Functions
* This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed.
Camera Settings
If you turn off the power with the Electronic level, Quick Control screen,
or Custom Quick Control screen displayed, the same screen will be
displayed when you turn on the power again. To cancel this function,
press the <B> button a number of times until the screen is blank, then
turn off the power switch.
Note that you cannot remove the [X] for all four display options.
The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English
for all languages.
Even if you set not to display the [Electronic level], it will still appear for
Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press the <B>
button.
While the Quick Control screen or Custom Quick Control screen is
displayed, pressing the <Q> button enables you to set a function with
Quick Control (p.68).
AE Microadjustment (p.429)
AF Microadjustment
(p.138)
(p.200)
(p.191)
(p.190)
Date/Time
(p.55)
(p.50, 158)
Transfer of some
images failed*
Color temperature
(p.185)
(p.186, 187)
Daylight saving time
(p.57)
(p.203)
FE Microadjustment
(p.430)
(p.50, 158)
B Button Functions
480
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
For the Custom Quick Control, see page 459.
Quick Control Screen
Custom Quick Control screen
Battery level
Aperture
Picture Style
White balance ISO speed
Custom Controls
Focus indicator
Possible shots
AF operation
White balance correction
Shutter speed
AE lock
Quick Control icon
Mirror lockup
Metering mode
Exposure level indicator
Maximum burst/Number of
remaining multiple exposures
Shooting mode
AF operation indicator/
Auto cleaning
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Exposure level indicator
Flash exposure
compensation
Drive mode
Flash-ready/FE lock/
High-speed sync
Highlight tone priority
481
B Button Functions
When you press the <W>, <o>, <Q>, <S>, <i>,
<O>, or <B> button, the setting screen will appear and you can use
<6>, <5>, <9>, and <B> to set the function.
Button Operation for the Quick Control and
Custom Quick Control Screens
Shooting mode AF operation / Drive mode
AF point selectionMetering mode/
Flash exposure compensation
ISO speed Exposure compensation
White balance AEB
482
You can check the conditions of the battery you are using on the LCD
monitor.
Select [Battery info.].
Under the [53] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
3 Checking the Battery Information
The model of the battery or household
power source accessory (sold separately)
being used is displayed.
The battery level indicator (p.54) is
displayed together with the remaining
battery level in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the current
battery. The number is reset when the
battery is recharged (p.42).
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in three levels.
(Green): Battery’s recharge
performance is fine.
(Green): Battery’s recharge
performance is slightly
degraded.
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is
recommended.
Using genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E19 or LP-E4N/LP-E4 is
recommended. If you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the
camera’s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movie shooting is
not counted.)
If [Calibration is recommended when charging battery next time] is
displayed, see page 45.
If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the message.
483
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E19 and AC Adapter AC-E19 (both sold separately).
1Insert the DC coupler.
Insert the DC coupler firmly all the way
into the camera, and turn the release
handle as shown by the arrow.
2Connect the DC coupler to the AC
adapter.
Securely connect the DC coupler’s
connector to the AC adapter’s connector.
3Connect the power cord.
X
The AC adapter’s power lamp will light.
Connect the power cord to the AC
adapter and insert the power plug into
a power outlet.
4Set the camera’s power switch to
<1> (p.53).
Using a Household Power Outlet
Disconnect button
Power lamp
Do not use an AC adapter other than the AC-E19 (sold separately).
Since the DC coupler and AC adapter are not water-resistant, do not get
them wet.
While the camera’s power switch is on, do not connect or disconnect the
power cord or connector or disconnect the DC coupler.
If the camera’s power switch is on and you do steps 2 and 3, it may take
a while before the camera turns on.
After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
To disconnect the connector, hold down the disconnect button and pull
the connector.
You can also use AC Adapter Kit ACK-E4.
484
System Map
Eyecup Eg
Anti-Fog
Eyepiece Eg
Dioptric Adjustment
Lenses Eg
Angle Finder C
Wide Strap
Hand Strap E2
Focusing Screen
Ec series
*1: Cannot be charged with a battery charger other than Battery Charger LC-E19.
Battery Pack LP-E4N/E4 can also be used to provide power.
*2: Battery Pack LP-E4N/LP-E4 can also be charged.
*3: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E4 can also be used.
Battery Pack LP-E19*1
Battery Charger
LC-E19*2
DC Coupler
DR-E19*3
AC Adapter
AC-E19*3
Cable
protector
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
ST-E2 Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX
270EX II 600EX-RT/
600EX
430EX III-RT/
430EX III
ST-E3-RT
Bundled
Accessories
485
System Map
*4: With IFC-500U II, the communication speed will be equivalent to Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0).
*5: Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E6 can also be used. To use the WFT-E6, download the
latest WFT-E6 Instruction Manual (PDF file) from Canon website.
*6: Use the latest version of the Connect Station firmware.
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
Interface Cable IFC-150U II
(1.5 m/4.9 ft.)
Interface Cable IFC-500U II*4
(4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
LAN cable
EF lenses
Timer Remote
Controller
TC-80N3
Remote
Switch
RS-80N3
Wireless
Controller
LC-5
Wireless File
Transmitter
WFT-E8*5
Wireless LAN
access point
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
TV/Video
Card reader
Headphones
Connect Station
CS100*6
USB port Computer
Ethernet port
Wireless LAN adapter
CF Card
CFast Card
EOS
Solution Disk
External
microphone
486
o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting
Function d s f a bulb
All image quality settings selectable kkkkk
ISO speed Automatically set/Auto kkkkk
Manually set kkkkk
Picture Style Automatically set/Auto kkkkk
Manual selection kkkkk
White balance
Auto kkkkk
Preset kkkkk
Custom kkkkk
Color temperature setting kkkkk
Correction/Bracketing kkkkk
Auto Lighting Optimizer kkkkk
Long exposure noise reduction kkkkk
High ISO speed noise reduction kkkkk
Highlight tone priority kkkkk
Lens
aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction kkkkk
Chromatic aberration correction kkkkk
Distortion correction kkkkk
Diffraction correction kkkkk
Anti-flicker shooting*1kkkkk
Color space sRGB kkkkk
Adobe RGB kkkkk
AF
One-Shot AF*1kkkkk
AI Servo AF*1kkkkk
AF area selection mode*1kkkkk
AF point kkkkk
Manual focusing (MF) kkkkk
AF Configuration Tool kkkkk
AF Microadjustment*1kkkkk
u+Tracking*2kkkkk
FlexiZone - Single*2kkkkk
487
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
*1: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
*2: Settable only with Live View shooting.
*3: Settable only with ISO Auto set.
*4: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*5: Touch control is possible during Live View shooting.
Function d s f a bulb
Drive
Single shooting kkkkk
High-speed continuous shooting kkkkk
Low-speed continuous shooting kkkkk
Single: Silent shooting kkkkk
Silent high-speed shooting kkkkk
Silent low-speed shooting kkkkk
Self-timer: 10 sec. kkkkk
Self-timer: 2 sec. kkkkk
Metering
Evaluative metering kkkkk
Partial metering kkkkk
Spot metering kkkkk
Center-weighted average metering kkkkk
Exposure
Program shift k
Exposure compensation kkkk*3
AEB kkkk
AE lock kkk *4
Depth-of-field preview kkkkk
Multiple exposures kkkkk
Mirror lockup*1kkkkk
External
Speedlite
Flash exposure compensation kkkkk
FE lock*1kkkkk
Flash function settings kkkkk
Custom Function settings kkkkk
GPS function kkkkk
Live View shooting kkkkk
Quick Control kkkkk
Touch control*5kkkkk
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
488
o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled
Movie Shooting
Function d/bulb s f a
kM
Select all movie recording qualities kkkk
ISO speed Automatically set/Auto oook
Manually set k
Picture Style Automatically set/Auto kkkk
Manual selection kkkk
White balance
Auto kkkk
Preset kkkk
Custom kkkk
Color temperature setting kkkk
Correction kkkk
Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer kkkk
High ISO speed noise reduction*1kkkk
Highlight tone priority kkkk
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction kkkk
Chromatic aberration correction kkkk
Distortion correction
Diffraction correction
AF
u+Tracking kkkk
FlexiZone - Single kkkk
Manual focusing (MF)
kkkk
Movie Servo AF kkkk
489
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
*1: Settable only for Full HD movie shooting (not settable for 4K movie shooting).
*2: Settable only with ISO Auto set.
*3: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
Function d/bulb s f a
kM
Metering oooo
Exposure
Program shift
Exposure compensation kkkk*2
AE lock kkk *3
Sound
recording
Auto kkkk
Manual kkkk
Line input kkkk
Time code kkkk
HDMI output kkkk
GPS function kkkk
Quick Control kkkk
Touch control kkkk
490
z: Shooting 1 (Red) Page
*1: During movie shooting, [WB Shift/Bkt.] will be set to [WB correction].
*2: During movie shooting, [Color space] will not be displayed.
*3: During movie shooting, [Distortion correction] and [Diffraction correction]
will not be displayed.
*4: During movie shooting, [Multiple exposure] will not be displayed.
Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
White balance
Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /W/
E/R/Y/U/D/O (1-5)/P (Approx. 2500 -
10000)/PC-1-5
177
179
Set Custom WB Select image on card / Record and register WB / Edit
WB name / Set as white balance 180
White balance
shift/bracketing*1
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each 186
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
single-level increments, ±3 levels 187
Color space*2sRGB / Adobe RGB 200
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / uFine Detail / SNeutral /
UFaithful / VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3
169
Lens aberration
correction*3
Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable
194
Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable
Distortion correction: Disable / Enable
Diffraction correction: Enable / Disable
Multiple
exposure*4
Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /
Number of exposures / Save source images /
Continuous multiple exposure
248
Displayed contents under [z2: Image type/size] vary according to the
[Record func.] setting of [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] (p.152). If
[Rec. separately] is set, set the image size for each card.
491
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 2 (Red) Page
*1: During movie shooting, [ISO speed settings] will be [ISO speed], [Range for
movies], and [Range for H].
*2:
During movie shooting, [
Long exposure noise reduction
] will not be displayed.
*3: Cannot be set during 4K movie shooting.
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
* During movie shooting, [Mirror lockup] and [Anti-flicker shooting] will not be
displayed.
JPEG quality Compression rate for 3, K, 5, 6162
Img type/size
1 / 41 / 61
155
3 / K / 5 / 6
ISO speed settings*1ISO speed / Range for stills / Auto range /
Minimum shutter speed
163
166
167
168
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High
189
Disabled in M or B modes
Long Exposure Noise
Reduction*2Disable / Auto / Enable 191
High ISO speed noise
reduction*3Disable / Low / Standard / High 190
Highlight tone priority Disable / Enable 193
Image review time Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 77
Beeper Enable / Disable 76
Release shutter
without card Enable / Disable 50
Mirror lockup* Disable / Enable / Enable: Mirror down w/s256
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used with Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) to delete dust spots
403
External Speedlite
control
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Flash function settings /
Flash C.Fn settings / Clear settings
263
Anti-flicker shooting* Disable / Enable 198
Menu Settings
492
z: Shooting 4 (Red) Page
z: Shooting 5 (Red)
2: AF1 (Purple)
Live View shooting Enable / Disable 273
AF method u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Single 284
Grid display Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n280
Exposure simulation Enable / During e / Disable 281
Silent LV shooting Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable 281
Metering timer 4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10
min. / 30 min. 283
LV touch control Standard / Sensitive / Disable 283
Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting 114
Case 2 Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible
obstacles 114
Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering
AF points 115
Case 4 For subjects that accelerate or decelerate
quickly 115
Case 5 For erratic subjects moving quickly in any
direction 116
Case 6 For subjects that change speed and move
erratically 117
Displayed contents under the [z4] and [z5] tabs during movie shooting is
shown on pages 500-501.
493
Menu Settings
2: AF2 (Purple) Page
2: AF3 (Purple)
AI Servo 1st image
priority Release priority / Equal priority / Focus priority 122
AI Servo 2nd image
priority
Shooting speed priority: -2/-1 / Equal priority: 0
/ Focus priority: +1/+2
123
Lens electronic MF Enable after One-Shot AF / Disable after One-
Shot AF / Disable in AF mode 124
AF-assist beam firing Enable / Disable / IR AF assist beam only 125
One-Shot AF release
priority Release priority / Focus priority 126
Menu Settings
494
2: AF4 (Purple) Page
2: AF5 (Purple)
Auto AF point
selection: EOS iTR AF
EOS iTR AF (Face priority) / EOS iTR AF /
Disable 127
Lens drive when AF
impossible Continue focus search / Stop focus search 129
Selectable AF point All points / Only cross-type AF points / 15
points / 9 points 130
Select AF area
selection mode
Manual selection: Spot AF / Manual selection:
1 point AF / Expand AF area: / Expand AF
area: Surround / Manual selection: Zone AF /
Manual select.: Large Zone AF / Auto selection
AF
131
AF area selection
method S 9 M-Fn button / S 9 Main Dial 132
Orientation linked AF
point
Same for both vertical/horizontal / Separate AF
points: Area+point / Separate AF points: Point
only
132
Initial AF point AI
Servo AF
Initial AF point selected / Manual
AF point / Auto 134
AF point selection
pattern Stops at AF area edges / Continuous 135
AF point display during
focus
Selected / All / Selected (focused, ) /
Selected (focused) / Disable display 135
AF point brightness Normal / Brighter 136
AF operation display in
viewfinder Show in field of view / Show outside view 137
AF Microadjustment Disable / All by same amount / Adjust by lens 138
495
Menu Settings
3: Playback 1 (Blue) Page
3: Playback 2 (Blue)
3: Playback 3 (Blue)
* The setting is linked to the [
Movie play count
] for [
Time code
] under the [
z5 (Movie)
] tab.
Protect images Protect images 359
Rotate image Rotate images 357
Erase images Erase images 387
Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) 413
Image copy Copy images between cards 382
RAW image processing
Process 1 images 392
Cropping Partially crop JPEG images 399
Resizing Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count 397
Rating [OFF] / l / m / n / o / p361
Slide show
Set playback description / Display time / Repeat
376
Image transfer Image selection/transfer / RAW+JPEG transfer /
Transfer with caption 410
Image jump w/61 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date / Folder /
Movies / Stills / Protect / Rating 353
Highlight alert Disable / Enable 350
AF point display Disable / Enable 351
Playback grid Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n345
Histogram display Brightness / RGB 351
Movie playback count*
Recording time / Time code 327
Magnification
(Approx.)
1x (no magnification) / 2x (magnify from center) / 4x
(magnify from center) / 8x (magnify from center) / 10x
(magnify from center) / Actual size (from selected
point) / Same as last magnification (from center)
356
Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 380
Menu Settings
496
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow) Page
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
Record function+card/
folder selection
Recording function: Standard / Auto switch
card / Record separately / Record to multiple 152
Record/playback / Playback: f / g154
Folder: Selecting and creating a folder 201
File numbering Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset 206
File name Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2 203
Auto rotate OnzD / OnD / Off 390
Format card Erase data on the card by formatting 74
Auto power off 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30
min. / Disable 76
LCD brightness Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels 389
Date/Time/Zone Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.)
/ Daylight saving time / Time zone 55
Language KSelect the interface language 58
Viewfinder Information
Electronic level: Hide / Show 83
Grid display: Hide / Show 81
Show/hide in viewfinder:
Shooting mode / Metering mode / White
balance / Drive mode / AF operation / Flicker
detection
84
z button display
options
Displays camera settings / Electronic level /
Quick Control screen / Custom Quick Control
screen
478
Custom Quick Control Start editing layout / Revert layout to default /
Clear all items 459
497
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow) Page
*1: Not settable if [24.00p] for [Movie rec quality] is set to [Enable].
*2: Displayed contents vary depending on the [Video system] setting.
Video system*1For NTSC / For PAL 312
379
Battery information Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter count
/ Recharge performance 482
Sensor cleaning
Auto cleaning f: Enable / Disable 402
Clean now f
Clean manually 405
Communication
settings
Wired LAN function and WFT-E8 (sold separately)/
WFT-E6 (sold separately) wireless LAN settings –
GPS setting GPS / Auto time setting / Position update interval /
GPS information display / GPS Logger 211
HDMI output frame
rate*1*2Auto / 59.94i/50.00i / 59.94p/50.00p / 23.98p 340
When using the GPS function or Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E8/
WFT-E6 (sold separately), be sure to check the countries and areas of
use, and observe the laws and regulations of the country or region.
To use the WFT-E6, download the latest WFT-E6 Instruction Manual
(PDF file) from Canon website.
For details on the wired LAN function, see the “Wired LAN Instruction
Manual” (p.4).
Menu Settings
498
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow) Page
8: Custom Functions (Orange)
Save/load camera
settings on card Save to card / load from card 468
Custom shooting mode
(C1-C3)
Register setting / Clear settings / Auto update
set. 472
Clear all camera
settings Resets the camera to the default settings 77
Copyright information
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
name / Enter copyright details / Delete
copyright information
208
Camera system
information
Serial number / Firmware version / Release
cycles / Camera status log 520
Certification Logo
Display
Some of the camera’s certification logos are
displayed 477
z firmware ver. Select to update the firmware of the camera,
lens, Speedlite, or Wireless File Transmitter –
C.Fn1: Exposure
Customize camera functions as desired
421
C.Fn2: Exposure 424
C.Fn3: Exposure 427
C.Fn4: Drive 431
C.Fn5: Display/
Operation 433
C.Fn6: Operation 436
C.Fn7: Others 439
C.Fn8: Clear Clear all Custom Function settings 420
499
Menu Settings
9: My Menu (Green) Page
Add My Menu tab Add My Menu tabs 1-5 463
Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs 466
Delete all items Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5 466
Menu display Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /
Display only My Menu tab 467
Menu Settings
500
z: Shooting 2 (Movie) (Red) Page
z: Shooting 4 (Movie) (Red)
* Not settable if [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking].
Movie Shooting
ISO speed settings ISO speed / Range for movies / Range for H330
Movie Servo AF Enable / Disable 331
AF method u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Single 333
Grid display Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n333
Movie recording quality
MOV / MP4 311
Movie recording size
• 4K (4096x2160) / Full HD (1920x1080)
• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p
PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p
• MJPG / ALL-I (For editing) / IPB (Standard) /
IPB (Light)
312
24.00p: Disable / Enable 317
High Frame Rate: Disable / Enable 318
Sound recording
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Line input /
Disable 322
Recording level
Wind filter: Disable / Enable 323
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
Movie Servo AF Speed*
When active: Always on / During shooting
334
AF speed: Slow (-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1)/Standard/
Fast (+1/+2)
Movie Servo AF
tracking sensitivity* Locked on (-3/-2/-1)/0/Responsive (+1/+2/+3) 335
501
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 5 (Movie) (Red) Page
*1: Setting is linked to the [Movie play count] under [x3] tab.
*2: Displayed when 2(119.9fps), 8(59.94fps), or 6(29.97fps) is set.
Metering timer 4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. /
1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min. 336
LV touch control Standard / Sensitive / Disable 336
Time code
Count up / Start time setting / Movie recording
count / Movie play count*1 / HDMI / Drop
frame*2 326
Silent control Enable h / Disable h325
V button function /- / q/- / /k / q/k337
HDMI display a / awithout information / A+a338
502
If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Provided Battery Charger LC-E19 can only charge the provided
Battery Pack LP-E19 and genuine Battery Pack LP-E4N/LP-E4.
Battery Charger LC-E4N/LC-E4 cannot charge the provided Battery
Pack LP-E19.
This is a recommendation that you calibrate (discharge) the battery so
that the camera can accurately determine its capacity and display its
battery level accurately. For details, see page 45.
If the charging starts and only the <100%> lamp lights in green right
away, it means the battery’s internal temperature is outside the
appropriate temperature range. The battery will start recharging
automatically when the internal temperature is within 5°C - 40°C / 41°F
- 104°F.
Troubleshooting Guide
Power-Related Problems
The battery does not recharge.
The charger’s <CAL> lamp blinks.
Right after attaching the battery to the charger, only
the <100%> lamp lights up.
503
Troubleshooting Guide
The charger cannot charge batteries other than the provided LP-E19
and LP-E4N/LP-E4. The three charge lamps and <CAL> lamp will
blink in green.
While charging a battery, if the three charge lamps blink in green
consecutively or if they blink consecutively in green with the <CAL>
lamp blinking in green, remove the battery from the charger. Contact
your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
While calibrating a battery, if the three charge lamps blink, remove the
battery from the charger. Contact your dealer or nearest Canon
Service Center.
Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.47).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.49).
Recharge the battery (p.42).
If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the
access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When
the image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.
Do not use any battery other than the genuine Battery Pack LP-E19 or
LP-E4N/LP-E4.
Remove and install the battery again (p.47).
If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
All three charge lamps of the charger
blink.
The camera does not operate even when
the power switch is set to <1>.
The access lamp still lights or blinks even when
the power switch is <2>.
[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?]
is displayed.
Troubleshooting Guide
504
Use a fully-charged battery (p.42).
The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery info.]
to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.482). If the
battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
•Using GPS.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.76).
Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for approx. 30 min. (The
camera’s power does not turn off.)
The battery becomes exhausted
quickly.
The camera turns off by itself.
505
Troubleshooting Guide
The camera cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses (p.59).
Install a recharged battery in the camera (p.42).
Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.49).
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.49, 386).
If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the
shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus
manually (p.62, 145).
If a card error message is displayed, see page 52 or 523.
CF cards with a capacity greater than 128 GB and CFast cards are
formatted in exFAT. This means that if you format a card with a
capacity over 128 GB with this camera and then insert it into another
camera, an error may be displayed and it may not be possible to use
the card.
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
The viewfinder is dark.
No images can be shot or recorded.
The card cannot be used.
An error message is displayed when the card is inserted
in another camera.
Troubleshooting Guide
506
Set [z3: Mirror lockup] to [Disable].
Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.59).
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.61, 62).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.231), set a higher ISO speed (p.163), use flash (p.260), or
use a tripod.
See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on page 229.
Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and
patterns and Area AF frame’s shape vary. The lenses are categorized
into 11 groups from A to K (p.102). Check which group your lens
belongs to. Using a lens in groups G to K will have fewer usable AF
points (p.105-108).
I have to press the shutter button twice
completely to take a picture.
The image is out of focus or blurred.
There are fewer AF points or the shape of
the Area AF frame is different.
507
Troubleshooting Guide
Regarding the AF points lighting up or blinking when you press the
<S> button, see page 95.
The AF point at the registered area is blinking (p.95, 448).
The manually-selected AF point (or zone) and the registered AF point
are displayed (p.94, 448).
Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF (p.88). Note that focus lock will
not work in the AI Servo AF mode (p.89).
The continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous shooting
may become slower depending on the power source type, battery
level, temperature, ISO speed, flicker reduction, shutter speed,
aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, and shooting
function settings. For details, see pages 148, 149.
If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the
file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number listed on page 158.
If [Rec. separately] is set and different image sizes are set for the CF
card (Card1) and CFast card (Card2), the maximum burst for
continuous shooting will decrease.
The AF point is blinking or two AF points are displayed.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
Troubleshooting Guide
508
The maximum burst displayed in the viewfinder does not change when
you change the card, even if it is a high-speed card. The maximum
burst shown in the table on page 158 is based on Canon’s testing
card. (The faster the card’s writing speed, the higher the actual
maximum burst will be.) Therefore, the maximum burst displayed in
the viewfinder may differ from the actual maximum burst.
If [z2: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO
speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 51200. Even if you set [Range for
stills] to expand the setting range, you cannot select L (equivalent to
ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400), H2 (equivalent to ISO
204800), or H3 (equivalent to ISO 409600). When [z2: Highlight
tone priority] is set to [Disable] (p.193), you can set ISO 100/125/
160, L, or H1/H2/H3.
Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (p.189). When
[Low], [Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased
exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image
may come out bright.
See page 237 to set the exposure compensation.
For flash shooting, exposure compensation cannot be set.
Even after I change the card, the maximum burst
displayed for continuous shooting does not change.
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
I cannot set the exposure compensation while
both manual exposure and ISO Auto are set.
509
Troubleshooting Guide
If [85: Focusing screen] is set to [Ec-A, B, L] (p.433), the spot
metering circle will not be displayed at the viewfinder center.
If [On:ContShtng] is set, image review immediately after image
capture or image playback is not possible during shooting (p.248).
When the image size is set to 41 or 61, the multiple-exposure
image will be recorded in 1 quality (p.255).
If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z3: External Speedlite control], set [Flash
sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec.
(fixed)] (p.264).
Make sure the flash (or PC sync cord) is securely attached to the
camera.
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z5:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.281).
The spot metering circle is not displayed.
The shot image is not displayed during multiple-exposure
shooting.
The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.
When I use the <f> mode with flash,
the shutter speed becomes slow.
The flash does not fire.
Troubleshooting Guide
510
If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.261).
When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering mode] is
set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the flash will always be fired at
full output (p.268).
If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, flash
exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the
external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to
0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
Under [z3: External Speedlite control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [Auto] (p.264).
If you use flash, the shutter will make two release sounds each time
you shoot (p.274).
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View
shooting will soon stop automatically (p.293).
If the image size is set to 41 or 61, the shooting images are not
displayed during continuous shooting (p.273).
The flash always fires at full output.
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <Av> mode.
The shutter makes two release sounds during Live View shooting.
During Live View shooting, a white <
s
> or red <
E
> icon is displayed.
Shot images are not displayed when continuous shooting is
performed during Live View shooting.
511
Troubleshooting Guide
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red
<E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie shooting will soon
stop automatically (p.341).
If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 316. To find
out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website.
If you shoot a movie for 29 min. 59 sec. or shoot a High Frame Rate
movie for 7 min. 29 sec., the movie shooting will stop automatically.
If you shoot with H8/7J, use a CFast card [g]. Even a
high-speed CF card [f] can only record a very short movie (approx.
10 sec. max.).
If the shooting mode is <d>, <s>, <f>, or <bulb>, the ISO speed
will be set automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO
speed (p.302).
If [z2: Highlight tone priority] has been set to [Enable], the settable
ISO speed range will start from ISO 200. Even if you set [Range for
movies] for ISO speed expansion, you cannot select H, H1, or H2.
When [z2: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable] (p.193), ISO
100/125/160 or an expanded ISO speed can be set.
During movie shooting, the red E icon is displayed.
Movie shooting stops by itself.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion
cannot be selected during movie shooting.
Troubleshooting Guide
512
ISO speed will be set according to the setting of [Range for stills] for
[z2:ISO speed settings] (p.166) during viewfinder shooting and Live
View shooting, or the setting of [Range for movies] and [Range for
H
] (p.330) during movie shooting.
If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may
result in recoding images with changes in exposure or operation
sound, or images may be out of focus.
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or
color tone may be recorded. In the <s> or <a> mode, a slow
shutter speed may reduce the problem.
If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject, the image may look distorted.
High Frame Rate movies do not record sound.
The manually set ISO speed changes when
switching to movie shooting.
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes
appear during movie shooting.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
The movie does not record the sound.
513
Troubleshooting Guide
For High Frame Rate movie shooting, if [Free run] is set for [Count
up] under [z5: Time code] (p.326), the time code will not be
appended. Also, if there is HDMI output, the time code will not be
appended to the HDMI video output (p.328).
For High Frame Rate movie shooting, it will count up by 4 sec. for
every sec. in real time (p.318).
Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still photos,
stop the movie shooting and then perform viewfinder shooting or Live
View shooting.
The time code is not appended.
The time code’s count is faster.
I cannot take still photos during movie shooting.
Troubleshooting Guide
514
Set the power switch to <1> (p.53).
Check the [86: Multi function lock] setting (p.437).
Set the vertical-grip operation switch to <1> (p.67).
Touchscreen operation cannot be performed on the menu screen and
image playback screen. For Live View shooting and movie shooting,
touchscreen operation can be performed to select AF points and to
magnify the image.
Check the [86: Custom Controls] setting (p.443).
Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display from My Menu
tab] or [Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] (p.467).
Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.200).
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the <6>, <5>, or <9>.
Vertical-grip controls like the <6> and <9> do not work.
Touchscreen operation is not possible.
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
Display Problems
The display starts with [
9
] My Menu or the [
9
] tab alone is
displayed.
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
515
Troubleshooting Guide
[51: File name] is set to [*** + image size]. Select the camera’s
unique file name (preset code) or the file name registered under User
setting 1 (p.203).
If the card already contains recorded images, the image file number
may not start from 0001 (p.206).
Make sure the correct date and time are set (p.55).
Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.56, 57).
The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing at a photofinisher, you can imprint the date and time in the
picture, using the date and time recorded in the shooting information
(p.413).
If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed.
If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
The LCD monitor display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures,
or look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room
temperature.
The fourth character in the file name changes.
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
The date and time are not in the image.
[###] is displayed.
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
Troubleshooting Guide
516
[33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.350).
[33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.351).
When you play back an image applied with distortion correction
(p.195), the AF points are not displayed.
If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.358).
Copying movie files exceeding 4 GB may not work. For details, see
page 382.
The camera may not be able to play back images taken with another
camera.
Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the
camera.
If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation sound will also be recorded. Using an external microphone
(commercially-available) is recommended (p.323).
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
A red box is displayed on the image.
During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.
The image cannot be erased.
The movie cannot be copied.
Still photos and movies cannot be played back.
Operation sound and mechnical sound can be heard
during movie playback.
517
Troubleshooting Guide
If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure
movie shooting, the recording will stop momentarily until the
brightness stabilizes. In such a case, shoot in the <a> mode (p.301).
Since the High Frame Rate movie will be recorded as a 29.97 fps/
25.00 fps movie file, it will play back in slow motion at 1/4 speed.
Make sure the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or
[For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).
Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.379).
If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.320). However, if you use a CF card exceeding 128
GB or a CFast card formatted with the camera, you can record a
movie to a single file even exceeding 4 GB.
You can grab frames only from 4K movies. Frame grabbing is not
possible with Full HD movies or 4K movies shot with a different
camera model.
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
The movie plays in slow motion.
No picture on the TV set.
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
I cannot grab frames from a movie.
Troubleshooting Guide
518
Depending on your card reader and computer OS, large-capacity CF
cards and CFast cards may not be properly recognized. In such a
case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable,
then transfer the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.550).
41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera. Use
Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.550) to process those
images.
With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG 6 images or 1/41/
61 images, or frame-grab images from 4K movies saved as still
photos (p.397).
1/41/61 images and frame-grab images from 4K movies
saved as still photos cannot be cropped with the camera (p.399).
White, red, blue, or other colored dots of light may appear on images if
the sensor has been affected by cosmic rays, etc. By selecting [Clean
nowf] (p.402), their appearance may be suppressed.
My card reader does not recognize the card.
I cannot process the RAW image.
I cannot resize or crop the image.
Dots of light appear on the image.
519
Troubleshooting Guide
If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a mechanical
sound, but no picture is taken (p.402).
If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> within a short
time period, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.53).
The camera does not have PictBridge, and direct printing is not
possible.
From the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM), install EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.550) to your computer (p.551).
Make sure EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
Printing-Related Problems
Direct printing does not work.
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot transfer images to a computer.
520
You can check the camera’s serial number, firmware version, and
shutter-release cycles on the screen. You can also check the status log
for past errors and cautions.
Use this to check the camera’s condition. If necessary, take the camera
to nearest Canon Service Center. This is to reduce camera problems.
1Select [System status display].
Under the [54] tab, select [System
status display], then press <0>.
2Check the system status.
You can check the serial number,
firmware version, and shutter-release
cycles.
You can check the history of camera’s past errors and cautions, and
can also check the lens used, use of flash, and the battery used when
the error or caution occurred.
3 Check the log.
In step 2, press the <B> button.
XThe camera’s status log will be
displayed.
“Err **” is an error message. For the
error messages, see page 523.
“Caution **” is a caution message.
For the caution messages, see the
next page.
3 System Status Display
Check the Error and Caution Log
521
3 System Status Display
4 Check the system status.
Turn the <5> dial to select an Error
or Caution, then press the <B>
button to view the message.
Turn the <5> dial to check the
message.
Caution Messages
The camera checks its important components to see if they are
operating properly. If it detects an operation that is inaccurate but not
serious enough to be an error, it will be recorded as a Caution message
in the Camera status log. Although you can continue shooting, follow
the recommendations in the Caution message and solution since the
condition may lead to a malfunction.
Caution
Number Messages Description and Solution
01
Shutter speed repeatedly
adjusted automatically.
You may continue
shooting but contacting a
service center is
recommended.
If the camera detects an error in the shutter
speed, it will make adjustments to maintain
shutter speed precision. If this adjustment is made
repeatedly, this Caution message will appear.
You can continue shooting, but consulting your
nearest Canon Service Center is recommended.
02
A sudden drop in battery
performance was
detected. If this happens
again after battery
replacement, contact a
service center.
While the camera is turned off, if the battery’s
remaining capacity decreases abnormally within
a certain period, this Caution message will
appear. If the same Caution message appears
repeatedly even after changing to a different,
fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19 or LP-E4N/
LP-E4, there may be a problem with the camera.
Consult your nearest Canon Service Center.
03
Retry operation was
performed for the shutter
charge mechanism. If
this happens repeatedly,
contacting a service
center is recommended.
The shutter- and mirror-cocking operation was
not completed normally. If this occurs again, this
Caution message will appear. You can continue
shooting, but if the same message appears
again, consulting your nearest Canon Service
Center is recommended.
522
3 System Status Display
If you press the <L> button in step 3, you can delete all the log entries
displayed.
Erasing the Camera Status Log
The Camera status log screen displays the latest five entries for Errors
and Cautions. If there are more than five entries, the oldest entries will be
deleted automatically.
The shutter-release cycles are displayed in units of 1000. If there have
been 1,000,000 or more shutter-release cycles, 1,000,000 will be
displayed.
If the same Error or Caution occurs repeatedly, consult your nearest
Canon Service Center.
523
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the on-
screen instructions.
* If the error still persists, write down the error code number and contact
your nearest Canon Service Center.
Error Codes
Number Error Message and Solution
01
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
ÎClean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.25, 26, 47).
02
Card* cannot be accessed. Reinsert or replace card * or format
card * with the camera.
ÎRemove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.49, 74).
04
Cannot save images because card* is full. Replace card*.
ÎReplace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.49, 386, 74).
06
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
ÎOperate the power switch (p.53).
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
ÎOperate the power switch, remove and install the battery again, or
use a Canon lens (p.53, 47).
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
524
•Type
Type: Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera
Recording media: CF cards (Type I, UDMA 7 supported)
CFast card (CFast 2.0 supported)
Image sensor size: Approx. 35.9 x 23.9 mm
Compatible lenses: Canon EF lenses
* Excluding EF-S and EF-M lenses
(The effective angle of view of a lens is approximately
equivalent to that of the focal length indicated.)
Lens mount: Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type: CMOS sensor
Effective pixels: Approx. 20.2 megapixels
* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.
Aspect ratio: 3:2
Dust delete feature: Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data
• Recording System
Recording format: Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),
RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible
Pixels recorded: L (Large) : Approx. 20.0 megapixels (5472 x 3648)
M1 (Medium 1) : Approx. 12.7 megapixels (4368 x 2912)
M2 (Medium 2) : Approx. 8.9 megapixels (3648 x 2432)
S (Small) : Approx. 5.0 megapixels (2736 x 1824)
RAW : Approx. 20.0 megapixels (5472 x 3648)
M-RAW : Approx. 11.2 megapixels (4104 x 2736)
S-RAW : Approx. 5.0 megapixels (2736 x 1824)
Recording function: Standard, Auto switch card, Record separately, Record
to multiple
Create/select a folder: Possible
File name: Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
File numbering: Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral,
Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3
Specifications
525
Specifications
White balance: Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset
(Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White
fluorescent light, Flash), Custom (5 settings), Color
temperature setting (approx. 2500-10000 K), Personal
white balance (5 settings)
White balance correction and white balance bracketing
features provided
* Flash color temperature information transmission
possible
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Auto Lighting Optimizer provided
Noise reduction: Applicable to high ISO speed shots and long exposures
Highlight tone priority: Provided
Lens aberration
correction:
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction, Distortion correction, and Diffraction
correction
• Viewfinder
Type: Eye-level pentaprism
Coverage: Vertical/Horizontal approx. 100% (with eyepoint approx.
20 mm)
Magnification: Approx. 0.76x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Eyepoint: Approx. 20 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Diopric adjustment
range:
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Eyepiece shutter: Built-in
Focusing screen: Ec-C6 provided, interchangeable
Grid display: Provided
Electronic level: Provided
Function setting display: Image type: JPEG/RAW, Shooting mode, Metering
mode, White balance, Drive mode, AF operation, Flicker
detection, Warning ! indicator, AF status indicator
Mirror: Quick-return type
Depth-of-field preview: Provided
• Autofocus (during viewfinder shooting)
Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
526
Specifications
AF points: Max. 61 points (Cross-type AF point: Max. 41 points)
* Number of available AF points, Dual cross-type AF
points, and cross-type AF points vary depending on the
lens used.
* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with 5 AF points
vertically aligned at the center.
(AF group: When group A lenses are used)
Focusing brightness
range:
EV -3 - 18 (Conditions: f/2.8-sensitive center AF point,
One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)
Focus operation: One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, Manual focusing (MF)
AF area selection mode: Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF
(manual selection), AF point expansion (manual
selection: up, down, left, and right), AF point expansion
(manual selection: surround), Zone AF (manual selection
of zone), Large zone AF (manual selection of zone),
Automatic selection AF
AF point automatic
selection conditions:
Based on EOS iTR AF setting
(Enables AF incorporating human face/color information)
* iTR: Intelligent Tracking and Recognition
AF Configuration Tool: Case 1 - 6
AI Servo AF
characteristics:
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,
AF point auto switching
AF function
customization:
17 functions
AF fine adjustment: AF Microadjustment (All lenses by the same amount,
Adjust by lens)
AF-assist beam: Emitted by the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite
• Exposure Control
Metering mode: Approx. 360,000-pixel RGB+IR metering sensor and
216-zone TTL open-aperture metering
EOS iSA (Intelligent Subject Analysis) system
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 6.2% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 1.5% of viewfinder at center)
* Spot metering and Multi-spot metering linkable to AF
point
• Center-weighted average metering
Metering brightness
range:
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100, with evaluative
metering)
527
Specifications
Shooting mode: Program AE, Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE,
Manual exposure, Bulb exposure, Custom shooting
modes (C1/C2/C3)
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
ISO Auto, ISO 100 - ISO 51200 manual setting (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments) and expandable to L (equivalent
to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400), H2
(equivalent to ISO 204800), and H3 (equivalent to ISO
409600) provided.
* If highlight tone priority is set, the settable ISO speed
range will be ISO 200 - ISO 51200.
ISO speed settings: Still photo shooting range, Auto range, Auto minimum
speed settable
Exposure
compensation:
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
AEB: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
AE lock: Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: With AE lock button
Flicker reduction: Possible
• Multiple Exposures
Shooting method: Function/control priority, Continuous shooting priority
Number of multiple
exposures:
2 to 9 exposures
Multiple-exposure
control:
Additive, Average, Bright, Dark
•Shutter
Type: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
Shutter speed: 1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range;
available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync
at 1/250 sec.
• Drive System
Drive mode: Single, High-speed continuous, Low-speed continuous,
Silent single shooting, Silent high-speed shooting, Silent
low-speed shooting, 10-sec. self-timer, 2-sec. self-timer
528
Specifications
Continuous shooting
speed:
High-speed continuous shooting
Viewfinder shooting:
Maximum approx. 14.0 fps (settable within 2 fps to 14
fps)
Live View shooting:
Maximum approx. 16.0 fps (settable within 2 fps to 14
fps and 16 fps)
* With ISO H1 (equivalent to ISO102400) or higher (ISO
32000 or higher if the camera’s internal temperature is
low), the maximum continuous shooting speed during
high-speed continuous shooting will be no faster than
10.0 fps during viewfinder shooting or 14.0 fps during
Live View shooting (with Battery Pack LP-E19).
* The maximum continuous shooting speed during high-
speed continuous shooting may become slower
depending on the power source type, battery level,
temperature, ISO speed, flicker reduction, shutter
speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens,
flash use, shooting function settings, etc.
* If “16 fps” is set during Live View shooting, flash will not
be fired.
Low-speed continuous shooting:
Approx. 3.0 fps (settable within 1 fps to 13 fps)
Silent high-speed continuous shooting:
Approx. 5.0 fps maximum (settable within 2 fps to 5 fps)
Silent low-speed continuous shooting:
Approx. 3.0 fps maximum (settable within 1 fps to 4 fps)
Max. burst: JPEG Large:
CF card: Standard: Approx. 140 shots
High speed: Full
CFast card: Full
RAW:
CF card: Standard: Approx. 59 shots
High speed: Approx. 73 shots
CFast card: Approx. 170 shots
RAW+JPEG Large:
CF card: Standard: Approx.48 shots
High speed: Approx. 54 shots
CFast card: Approx. 81 shots
529
Specifications
* Based on Canon’s standard testing CF card (Standard:
8 GB/High speed: UDMA mode 7, 64 GB) and CFast
card (CFast 2.0, 128 GB) and the following testing
conditions: Viewfinder shooting, High-speed
continuous shooting, JPEG quality 8, ISO 100, and
Standard Picture Style.
* “Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the card
becomes full.
• External Speedlite
Compatible Speedlites: EX-series Speedlites
Flash metering: E-TTL II autoflash
Flash exposure
compensation:
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
FE lock: Provided
PC terminal: Provided
Flash control: Flash function settings, Flash C.Fn settings
• Live View Shooting
Focus method: Dual pixel CMOS AF
AF method: Face+Tracking, FlexiZone - Single
Manual focusing (approx. 5x and 10x magnification
available for focus check)
* AF possible with touchscreen operation.
Focusing brightness
range:
EV -3 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Metering mode: Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 6.5% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.8% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
Metering brightness
range:
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100, with evaluative
metering)
Exposure compensation:
±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Silent Live View shooting:
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)
Grid display: 3 types
530
Specifications
• Movie Shooting
Recording format: MOV, MP4
Movie: 4K: Motion JPEG
Full HD: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Variable (average) bit rate
Audio: MOV: Linear PCM, MP4: AAC
Movie recording size: 4K (4096x2160), Full HD (1920x1080)
Frame rate: 119.9p/59.94p/29.97p/24.00p/23.98p (with NTSC)
100.0p/50.00p/25.00p/24.00p (with PAL)
* 119.9p/100.0p: Full HD quality High Frame Rate movie
Movie recording
method/Compression
rate:
Motion JPEG
ALL-I (For editing/I-only), IPB (Standard), IPB (Light)
* Motion JPEG and ALL-I available only when MOV is set.
* IPB (Light) available only when MP4 is set.
Bit rate: [MOV]
4K (59.94p/50.00p) : Approx. 800 Mbps
4K (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p) : Approx. 500 Mbps
Full HD (119.9p/100.0p)/ALL-I : Approx. 360 Mbps
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I : Approx. 180 Mbps
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB : Approx. 60 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I:
Approx. 90 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard):
Approx. 30 Mbps
[MP4]
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard) : Approx. 60 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard):
Approx. 30 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light) : Approx. 12 Mbps
Card performance
requirements
(Writing/reading speed):
4K (59.94p/50.00p) : CFast 2.0
4K (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p):
CF UDMA 7: 100 Mbps or faster/CFast 2.0
Full HD (119.9p/100.0p):
CF UDMA 7: 100 Mbps or faster/CFast 2.0
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I:
CF UDMA 7: 60 Mbps or faster/CFast 2.0
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB: 30 Mbps or faster
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I:
30 Mbps or faster
531
Specifications
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard):
10 Mbps or faster
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light) : 10 Mbps or faster
Focus method: Dual pixel CMOS AF
AF method: Face+Tracking, FlexiZone - Single
Manual focusing (Approx. 5x and 10x magnification
available for focus check)
Movie servo AF: Possible
* Movie Servo AF customizable
Focusing brightness
range:
EV -3 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Metering mode: Center-weighted average metering and Evaluative
metering with the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focus method
Metering brightness
range:
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100, with center-
weighted average metering)
Exposure control: Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie
shooting), Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE,
Manual exposure
Exposure
compensation:
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
[Full HD]
P/Tv/Av/B: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 25600,
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 32000/40000/51200), H1
(equivalent to ISO 102400), H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800)
M: ISO Auto (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO
25600), ISO 100 - ISO 25600 set manually (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments), expandable to H (equivalent to
ISO 32000/40000/51200), H1 (equivalent to ISO
102400), H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800)
[4K]
P/Tv/Av/B: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 12800,
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 16000/20000/25600/
32000/40000/51200), H1 (equivalent to ISO 102400), H2
(equivalent to ISO 204800)
M: ISO Auto (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO
12800), ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set manually (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments), expandable to H (equivalent to
ISO 16000/20000/25600/32000/40000/51200), H1
(equivalent to ISO 102400), H2 (equivalent to ISO 204800)
532
Specifications
ISO speed settings: Range for movie shooting and 4K settable
Time code: Appendable
Drop frames: Compatible with 119.9p/59.94p/29.97p
Sound recording: Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo
microphone terminal, and line input provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Headphones: Headphone terminal provided, sound volume adjustable
Grid display: 3 types
Still photo shooting: Not possible during movie shooting.
2-image display: LCD monitor and HDMI output can be displayed
simultaneously.
HDMI output: Image without information can be output.
* Auto / 59.94i/50.00i / 59.94p/50.00p / 23.98p selectable.
* When [24.00p: Enable] is set, the movie image is
output at 24.00p via HDMI.
* Time code appendable
Accessory mount:
Bottom equipped with positioning hole to prevent rotation.
• LCD Monitor
Type: TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Monitor size and dots: Width 3.2 in. (3:2) with approx. 1.62 million dots
Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)
Electronic level: Provided
Interface languages: 25
Touchscreen: Capacitive sensing
* Works to move the AF point during Live View and
movie shooting (AF enabled), and with magnified view.
Help display: Possible
Camera system
information:
Provided
533
Specifications
•Playback
Image display format:
Single-image display (without shooting information),
Single-image display (with basic information), Single-
image display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed
information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture Style
1, Picture Style 2, Color space/noise reduction, Lens
aberration correction 1, Lens aberration correction 2,
GPS information), Index display (4/9/36/100 images)
Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink
AF point display: Provided (may not be displayed depending on shooting
conditions)
Grid display: 3 types
Magnified view: Approx. 1.5x-10x, initial magnification and position
settable
Image browsing
method:
Single image, Jump by 10 or 100 images, By shooting
date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By protected
images, By rating
Image rotation: Provided
Image protection: Provided
Rating: Provided
Voice memo: Recording/Playback possible
Movie playback: Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI), built-in speaker provided
Start/end movie scene
editing:
Possible
4K Frame Grab: Frame Grab can be saved as JPEG image.
Slide show: All images, By date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By
protected images, By rating
Copying images: Possible
• Post-Processing of Images
In-camera RAW image
processing:
Brightness adjustment, White balance, Picture Style,
Auto Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,
JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Lens
aberration correction (Peripheral illumination correction,
Distortion correction, Digital lens optimizer, Chromatic
aberration correction, Diffraction correction)
Resize: Provided
Cropping: Provided
534
Specifications
• Image Transfer
Transferrable files: Still photos (JPEG, RAW, RAW+JPEG images), Movies
• Print Ordering
DPOF: Version 1.1 compliant
• GPS Function
Compatible satellites: GPS satellites (USA), GLONASS satellites (Russia),
Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) MICHIBIKI
(Japan)
GPS signal reception
modes:
Mode 1, Mode 2
Geotag information
appended to image:
Latitude, Longitude, Elevation, Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC), Satellite signal acquisition status
Position update interval: 1 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 5
min.
Time setting: GPS time data set to camera
Log data: One file per day, NMEA format
* Change in time zone creates another file.
* The log data saved in internal memory can be
transferred to a card or downloaded to a computer as a
log file.
Log data deletion: Possible
• Customization Features
Custom Functions: 34
Custom Quick Control: Provided
Saving camera settings: Up to ten settings can be registered on a card
Custom shooting
modes:
Register under C1, C2, or C3
My Menu: Up to 5 screens can be registered
Copyright information: Text entry and appending possible
• Interface
DIGITAL terminal: SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0)
Computer communication, Connect Station CS100
connection
HDMI mini OUT
terminal:
Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
535
Specifications
External microphone
input/Line input terminal:
3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
Headphone terminal: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
Remote control
terminal:
For N3-type remote control units
System extension
terminal:
Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E8/WFT-E6 connection
Ethernet terminal: RJ-45 terminal, gigabit Ethernet compatible
•Power
Battery: Battery Pack LP-E19/LP-E4N/LP-E4, quantity 1
* AC power usable with household power outlet
accessories.
Battery information: Power source, Battery level, Shutter count, Recharge
performance indicated
Number of possible
shots:
With viewfinder shooting:
Approx. 1210 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 1020 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting:
Approx. 260 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 240 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19.
Movie shooting time: Total approx. 2 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C/
73°F)
Total approx. 2 hr. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E19, Movie Servo
AF disabled, and Full HD 29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p
IPB (Standard).
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Approx. 158.0 x 167.6 x 82.6 mm / 6.22 x 6.60 x 3.25 in.
Weight: Approx. 1530 g / 53.97 oz. (Based on CIPA Guidelines),
Approx. 1340 g / 47.27 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
0°C - 45°C / 32°F - 113°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
536
Specifications
• Battery Pack LP-E19
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated voltage: 10.8 V DC
Battery capacity: 2700 mAh
Working temperature
range:
During recharging: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
During shooting: 0°C - 45°C / 32°F - 113°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 68.45 x 34.2 x 92.8 mm / 2.69 x 1.35 x 3.65 in.
Weight: Approx. 185 g / 6.53 oz. (excluding protective cover)
• Battery Charger LC-E19
Compatible battery
packs:
Battery Pack LP-E19/LP-E4N/LP-E4
Recharge time
(at room temperature):
LP-E19: Approx. 2 hr. 50 min. per battery
LP-E4N/LP-E4: Approx. 2 hr. 20 min. per battery
Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output: 12.6 V DC, 1.63 A
Power cord: Approx. 2.0 m / 6.6 ft.
Working temperature
range:
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 155.0 x 51.0 x 95.0 mm / 6.10 x 2.01 x 3.74 in.
Weight: Approx. 335 g / 11.82 oz. (excluding power cord and
protective covers)
All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for
camera body only).
Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
537
Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Canon is an authorized licensee of the CFast 2.0TM trademark, which may be
registered in various jurisdictions.
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
538
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories
(e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this
warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable
basis.
Battery Pack LP-E19 and LP-E4N/LP-E4 are dedicated to Canon products
only. Using it with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in
malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
539
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway,
Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery
Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation
implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol
shown above, in accordance with the Battery
Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb
= Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an
applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on
an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an
authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this
type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your
local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste
disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or
www.canon-europe.com/battery.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
15
Software Overview
I
550
EOS Solution Disk
Various software for EOS cameras is contained on the
EOS Solution Disk.
(Software Instruction Manuals are not contained on the
EOS Solution Disk.)
With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to
transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.
You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot
remotely from the computer connected to the camera.
This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images. You
can view, edit, and print RAW and JPEG images.
* Some functions differ between the version to be installed on a 64-bit computer
and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.
You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style
files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
image processing.
Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen by
using the geotag location information recorded. Note that Internet
connection is required to install and use Map Utility.
Software Overview
EOS Utility
Digital Photo Professional
Picture Style Editor
Map Utility
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
©
C
A
N
O
N
I
N
C
.
2
0
X
X
.
M
a
d
e
i
n
t
h
e
E
U
.
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
551
Installing the Software
Downloading from the Canon website
You can download the following software and Software Instruction
Manuals from the Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
This software enables you to play back the movies you shot,
consecutively play back movie files that were split up, and merge the
split movie files and save it as a single file. You can also grab movie
frames and save them as still photos.
EOS MOVIE Utility
1
Insert the EOS Solution Disk into the computer.
For Macintosh, double-click to open the CD-ROM icon displayed
on the desktop, then double-click on [setup].
2Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen
instructions to install.
3After the software is installed, remove the CD-ROM.
Installing the Software
Do not connect the camera to a computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
If there is a previous version of the software already installed on the
computer, follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The
previous version will be overwritten.)
552
Numerics
10- or 2-sec. self-timer.................. 150
4, 9, 36, or 100 images.................352
H 4096x2160 (movie)................312
A
AC adapter....................................483
Acceleration/deceleration
tracking ......................................... 119
Access lamp .............................51, 52
Accessories ......................................3
Adjust all by same amount (AF)....138
Adobe RGB................................... 200
AE lock.......................................... 245
AE Microadjustment......................429
AEB
(Auto Exposure Bracketing)..243, 422
AF ...................................................87
AF area selection mode .91, 93, 96
AF-assist beam ........................125
AF Configuration Tool...............113
AF groups .................................102
AF method ........................284, 333
AF Microadjustment .................138
AF operation...............................88
AF operation indicator ................90
AF point brightness ..................136
AF point selection............... 94, 451
AF sensor .................................100
Area AF frame ......................92, 98
Beeper........................................76
Color information ......................127
Cross-type focusing..................100
Customization...........................122
Difficult subjects for AF.....144, 289
Direct selection of AF point ......451
Dual cross-type focusing ......... 100
f/8 AF ....................................... 100
Facial information .................... 127
Focusing point (AF point) auto
switching .................................. 120
Manual focusing (MF) ...... 145, 291
Number of AF points ................ 102
Out of focus ................. 61, 62, 506
Recomposing ........................... 245
Registering and using an
AF point ................................... 448
Spot AF point ....................... 30, 96
AF point expansion
Manual selectionc.............. 91, 96
Manual selection, surrounding
points ................................... 92, 97
AF-ON (AF start)
button ............................. 62, 444, 446
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ............... 90
Acceleration/deceleration
tracking .................................... 119
AF point auto switching............ 120
Initial position ........................... 134
Tracking sensitivity................... 118
ALL-I (For editing/I-only) .............. 315
Ambience priority (AWB) .............. 179
Anti-flicker shooting...................... 198
Aperture-priority AE.............. 233, 298
Area AF frame.......................... 92, 98
Attenuator..................................... 323
Auto (D) ................................... 169
Auto Lighting Optimizer................ 189
Auto playback............................... 376
Auto power off .......................... 53, 76
Auto reset..................................... 207
Auto rotate vertical images........... 390
Auto switch card........................... 153
Index
553
Index
Auto time setting (GPS) ................221
Autofocus 9 AF
Automatic selection (AF)...........92, 98
Av (Aperture-priority AE).......233, 298
B
B/W .......................................170, 174
Basic information display ..............346
Battery 9 Power
Beep (Beeper).................................76
Bit rate...........................................530
Black-and-white images........170, 174
Bracketing
AEB (Auto exposure
bracketing)........................243, 422
FEB
(Flash exposure bracketing).....267
White balance
bracketing .........................187, 422
bulb (Bulb exposures)...........246, 296
buSY (BUSY) ........................161, 192
C
C1/C2/C3 (Custom Shooting) .......472
Cable protector ...............................38
Calibration (battery) ..................45, 46
Camera
Camera shake ....................61, 229
Camera vibration blurr ......229, 256
Clearing the camera settings......77
Holding the camera ....................61
Saving/loading camera
settings .....................................468
Settings display ........................479
System status ...........................520
Caption (name) .............................184
Cards ......................5, 25, 49, 74, 316
Card reminder ............................ 50
Formatting.................................. 74
Requirements........................... 316
Troubleshooting ................... 52, 75
Cases (AI Servo AF) .................... 113
Caution log/status................. 520, 521
Center-weighted average
metering ....................................... 239
CF card 9 Cards
CFast card 9 Cards
Charger .................................... 36, 42
Chromatic aberration correction ... 195
Cleaning (image sensor) .............. 401
Clearing the camera settings.......... 77
AI Servo AF characteristics...... 121
Camera function settings ........... 77
Custom Controls ...................... 443
Custom Functions .................... 420
Custom Quick Control.............. 461
Flash function settings ............. 268
My Menu .................................. 466
Clipped highlights ......................... 350
CLn............................................... 405
Color space .................................. 200
Color temperature ................ 177, 185
Color tone..................................... 173
Compression rate
(JPEG quality) .............................. 162
Continuous (file numbering) ......... 206
Continuous shooting..................... 146
Contrast................................ 173, 189
Copyright information ................... 208
Cropping....................................... 399
Cropping information .................... 439
Cross-type focusing...................... 100
Custom Controls........................... 443
554
Index
Custom Functions................. 418, 421
Custom Quick Control...................459
Custom shooting modes ............... 472
Custom white balance .................. 180
D
D+ .................................................193
Date/time ........................................55
Daylight saving time........................57
DC Coupler ...................................483
Default settings tables ..77, 78, 79, 80
Depth-of-field preview................... 235
Dials
Main Dial ....................................63
Quick Control Dial ......................64
Diffraction correction.....................196
Digital Lens Optimizer...................395
Digital terminal ..................28, 38, 408
Dioptric adjustment .........................61
Direct selection (AF point) ............451
Distortion correction......................195
DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format) ..........413
Drive mode ...................................146
Dual cross-type focusing ..............100
Dust Delete Data ..........................403
E
Electronic level..........................82, 83
Erasing images.............................386
Err (error codes) ........................... 523
Error log ........................................ 520
Ethernet 9 Wired LAN Instructions
Evaluative metering ......................238
exFAT......................................75, 320
Expanded ISO speed............163, 166
Exposure compensation............... 241
Exposure compensation
with ISO Auto ............................... 237
Exposure level increments ........... 421
Exposure level
indicator.................... 31, 33, 275, 305
Exposure maintained for
new aperture ................................ 425
Exposure simulation..................... 281
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Eyecup ........................................... 61
Eyepiece shutter .......................... 258
F
L1920x1080 (movie)................ 312
Faithful (U) .............................. 170
FAT32 ..................................... 75, 320
FE lock ......................................... 260
FE Microadjustment ..................... 430
File extension ............................... 205
File name ..................................... 203
Underscore “_” ................. 200, 205
File size ........................ 158, 319, 347
Filter effect (Monochrome) ........... 174
Final image simulation ......... 277, 308
Fine Detail (u) ......................... 170
Fineness (Sharpness) .................. 173
Firmware ...................................... 498
First-curtain synchronization ........ 267
Flash (Speedlite) .......................... 259
Custom Functions.................... 268
External flash units .................. 260
FE lock..................................... 260
Flash control
(function settings) .................... 263
555
Index
Flash exposure bracketing
(FEB) ........................................267
Flash exposure
compensation ...................260, 267
Flash mode...............................265
Flash sync contacts ....................27
Flash sync speed..............261, 264
Manual flash .............................265
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain)........................267
Wireless....................................266
Flash exposure bracketing (FEB) .267
Flash sync. speed in Av mode......264
Focus indicator................................89
Focus lock.......................................89
Focus mode switch .....6, 59, 145, 291
Focusing 9 AF
Focusing area
(AF area selection mode)....91, 93, 96
Focusing point
(AF point) ....................91, 94, 96, 100
Focusing screen............................433
Folder creation/selection.......201, 202
For editing (ALL-I) .........................315
Formatting (card initialization).........74
Frame Grab...................................374
Frame rate ............................312, 340
Free run ........................................326
Full High-Definition (Full HD)
(movie) ..................................295, 312
Functions available by shooting
mode .............................................486
G
GPS ..............................................220
Geotag update interval .............220
Grid .........................81, 280, 333, 345
H
H/H1/H2/H3
(expanded) ................... 163, 166, 330
HDMI .............................. 38, 367, 379
Connected indicator................. 338
HDMI CEC ............................... 380
Output .............................. 338, 340
Time code ................................ 328
Headphones ................................. 324
Help ................................................ 85
High Frame Rate .......................... 318
High ISO speed noise reduction... 190
Highlight alert ............................... 350
Highlight tone priority.................... 193
High-speed continuous
shooting........................ 146, 148, 431
Histogram ..................... 275, 305, 351
Hot shoe ................................. 27, 260
Household power ......................... 483
I
ICC profile .................................... 200
Icons................................................. 8
Illumination (LCD panel)................. 67
Image dust prevention.................. 401
Image review time .......................... 77
Image-recording quality........ 155, 311
Image size........................ 155, 312
JPEG quality ............................ 162
Images
AF point display ....................... 351
Auto playback .......................... 376
Auto reset................................. 207
Auto rotation............................. 390
Continuous (file numbering)..... 206
Copying.................................... 382
556
Index
Erasing .....................................386
Highlight alert ...........................350
Histogram ................................. 351
File numbering..........................206
Index display ............................352
Jump display (image browsing) 353
Magnified view.......................... 355
Manual reset............................. 207
Manual rotation.........................357
Playback...................................343
Protecting images.....................358
Rating ....................................... 361
Shooting information ................347
Size ..........................155, 158, 312
Slide show ................................ 376
Transfer .................................... 408
Viewing on a TV set .........367, 379
Voice memo..............................363
Index display.................................352
INFO. button ...67, 275, 305, 344, 478
Initial AF Point...............................134
Initial magnification ratio/position..356
IPB (Light).....................................315
IPB (Standard) ..............................315
ISO speed.....................163, 299, 302
H range .................................330
Auto range ................................ 167
Automatic setting (Auto) ........... 165
ISO expansion ..........................166
Manual setting range................166
Minimum speed for auto...........168
Movie shooting range...............330
Setting increments....................421
Still image shooting range ........166
iTR AF...........................................127
J
JPEG.................................... 155, 158
Jump display ................................ 353
L
LAN 9 Wired LAN Instruction Manual
Landscape (R)......................... 170
Language ....................................... 58
Large (image size) ....... 155, 158, 397
Large Zone AF ......................... 92, 98
LCD monitor ................................... 24
Brightness adjustment ............. 389
Electronic level................... 82, 478
Image Playback ....................... 343
Menu display...................... 71, 490
Quick Control ..................... 68, 480
LCD Panel
Illumination................................. 67
Rear ........................................... 34
Top ............................................. 32
Lens ......................................... 25, 59
Aberration correction ............... 194
AF group designations............. 102
Chromatic aberration
correction ................................. 195
Diffraction correction ................ 196
Digital Lens Optimizer.............. 395
Distortion correction................. 195
Focus mode
switch..................... 6, 59, 145, 291
Lock release .............................. 60
Peripheral illumination
correction ................................. 194
Light (IPB) .................................... 315
Line input...................................... 322
Live View Shooting....................... 271
Exposure simulation ................ 281
557
Index
Face+Tracking..........................285
FlexiZone - Single.....................287
Grid display...............................280
Information display ...................275
Manual focusing (MF)...............291
Metering timer...........................283
Possible shots ..........................273
Quick Control............................279
Silent LV shooting.....................281
LOCK ......................................66, 437
LOG ..............................................221
Logging .........................................222
Log Data ...................................223
Long exposure noise reduction.....191
Long exposures (Bulb)..................246
Low-speed continuous
shooting ................................146, 431
LV 9 Live View shooting
M
M (Manual exposure)............236, 301
Magnified view ..............290, 291, 355
Main Dial .........................................63
Malfunction....................................502
Manual exposure ..................236, 301
Manual focusing (MF) ...........145, 291
Manual reset .................................207
Manual selection
(AF point) ............................91, 94, 96
Maximum burst .....................158, 161
Medium (image size).....155, 158, 397
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu ...............................................71
Dimmed menu items...................73
My Menu...................................463
Setting procedure .......................72
Settings.....................................490
3 icon......................................... 8
Metered manual flash................... 262
Metering mode ............................. 238
Metering timer ................ 62, 283, 336
M-Fn ....................... 93, 132, 445, 447
M-Fn2 ................................... 445, 447
Microadjustment........... 138, 429, 430
Microphone
Built-in ...................................... 296
External.................................... 323
Voice memo ............................. 363
Mirror lockup................................. 256
Monochrome (V)...................... 170
Motion JPEG (J) ...................... 315
MOV ............................................. 311
Movies .......................................... 295
24.00p ...................................... 317
AE lock..................................... 300
AF method ....................... 310, 333
AF speed during Movie Servo
AF ............................................ 334
Aperture-priority AE ................. 298
Attenuator ................................ 323
Autoexposure shooting ............ 296
Compression method............... 315
Drop frame ............................... 329
Editing out first and last
scenes...................................... 372
Enjoying movies ....................... 367
External microphone ................ 323
File size............................ 319, 320
Frame Grab.............................. 374
Frame rate ....................... 312, 340
Free run ................................... 326
Grid display .............................. 333
HDMI output..................... 338, 340
Headphones............................. 324
558
Index
High Frame Rate ......................318
Information display ...................305
Line input..................................322
Manual exposure shooting .......301
Metering timer ..........................336
Microphone.......................296, 323
MOV/MP4 .................................311
Movie recording method ...........315
Movie Servo AF tracking
sensitivity..................................335
Movie shooting button ......296, 337
Playback ...........................367, 369
Playback count .........................327
Quick Control............................310
Rec run.....................................326
Record command ..................... 328
Recording quality (size)............312
Recording time .........................319
Recording/playback count........327
Servo AF ..................................331
Shutter speed ...........297, 301, 304
Shutter-priority AE ....................297
Silent control............................. 325
Sound Recording/
Sound-Recording Level............322
Time code.................................326
Viewing on a TV set .........367, 379
Wind filter .................................323
MP4 .............................................. 311
M-RAW
(Medium RAW) .............155, 158, 160
Multi-controller ................................65
Multi function...........93, 132, 445, 447
Multi function 2......................445, 447
Multi function lock ...................66, 437
Multi-spot metering .......................240
Multiple exposure..........................248
My Menu ...................................... 463
N
Neutral (S)............................... 170
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ....................... 190
Long exposures ....................... 191
Nomenclature................................. 26
Non-Canon flash units.................. 261
NTSC ........................... 312, 379, 497
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) ............ 89
One-touch image quality
setting................................... 161, 455
P
P (Program AE).................... 228, 296
PAL............................... 312, 379, 497
Partial metering ............................ 238
PC terminal .................................. 261
Peripheral illumination correction. 194
Personal white balance ................ 178
Picture Style ................. 169, 172, 175
Pixel count............................ 156, 158
Playback....................................... 343
Portrait (Q)............................... 169
Possible recording time
(movie) ................................. 307, 319
Possible shots ................ 54, 158, 273
Power ............................................. 53
Auto power off...................... 53, 76
Battery information................... 482
Battery level ....................... 54, 482
Calibration............................ 45, 46
Charging .................................... 42
Household power..................... 483
559
Index
Possible shots ............54, 158, 273
Recharge performance.............482
Pressing completely........................62
Pressing halfway.............................62
Print order (DPOF)........................413
Program AE ..........................228, 296
Program shift ............................229
Protecting images .........................358
Q
Q (Quick Control) ..68, 279, 310, 365
Quick Control Dial ...........................64
R
Rating mark...................................361
RAW..............................155, 158, 160
RAW image processing ................392
RAW+JPEG ..........................155, 158
Rear LCD panel ..............................34
Rec run .........................................326
Rec. separately .............................153
Recharging......................................42
Record function.............................152
Rec. to multiple .............................153
Reduced display ...........................352
Release shutter without card ..........50
Remote control terminal................258
Remote switch ..............................258
Resizing ........................................397
Rotation (image) ...................357, 390
S
Safety precautions ..........................20
Safety shift ....................................424
Saturation......................................173
Second-curtain synchronization....267
Self-timer.......................................150
Sensitivity 9 ISO speed
Sensor cleaning............................ 401
Sepia (Monochrome).................... 174
Servo AF
AI Servo AF................................ 90
Movie Servo AF ....... 331, 334, 335
Sharpness .................................... 173
Shooting information display ........ 347
Shooting modes ............................. 32
Av (Aperture-priority AE).. 233, 298
Bulb.......................................... 296
C1/C2/C3 (Custom Shooting) .. 472
M (Manual exposure) ....... 236, 301
P (Program AE)................ 228, 296
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) .... 231, 297
Shooting orientation registration... 132
Shutter button................................. 62
Shutter release time lag ............... 440
Shutter synchronization................ 267
Shutter-priority AE ................ 231, 297
Silent shooting
Silent HS shooting ........... 147, 431
Silent LS shooting............ 147, 431
Silent LV shooting .................... 281
Single: Silent shooting ............. 147
Single shooting............................. 146
Single-image display .................... 344
Single-point AF................. 91, 96, 287
Single-point Spot AF................. 91, 96
Slide show .................................... 376
Small (Image size)........ 155, 158, 397
Software ....................................... 550
Instruction Manual........................ 4
Sound recording/
Sound-Recording Level................ 322
Speaker .......................... 27, 364, 369
560
Index
Specifications................................ 524
Spot AF point ............................30, 96
Spot metering........................ 239, 423
S-RAW (Small RAW) .... 155, 158, 160
sRGB ............................................ 200
Standard (IPB) ..............................315
Standard (P)............................. 169
Stop down aperture.......................235
Strap ...............................................37
Strength (Sharpness)....................173
System extension terminal..............28
System map.................................. 484
T
Temperature warning ............293, 341
Threshold (Sharpness) .................173
Time code .....................................326
Time zone ....................................... 55
Tone priority ..................................193
Toning effect (Monochrome) .........174
Top LCD panel ................................32
Touch control ................283, 284, 336
Touch pad ...............................66, 325
Tracking sensitivity .......................118
Tripod socket ..................................26
Troubleshooting ............................502
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) .........231, 297
U
Ultra DMA (UDMA) ................. 50, 158
Underscore “_”......................200, 205
USB (DIGITAL) terminal ...28, 38, 408
User Def. (W)............................ 170
UTC ..............................................212
V
Vertical-grip ON/OFF switch........... 67
Video system................ 311, 379, 497
Viewfinder
Dioptric adjustment .................... 61
Electronic level........................... 83
Grid ............................................ 81
Information display..................... 84
Viewing on a TV set ............. 367, 379
Voice memo
Playback .................................. 364
Recording ................................ 363
Volume (movie playback) ............. 370
W
Warning icon ................................ 436
White balance (WB) ..................... 177
Auto ......................................... 179
Bracketing................................ 187
Color temperature setting ........ 185
Correction ................................ 186
Custom .................................... 180
Personal................................... 178
White priority (AWB)..................... 179
Wind filter ..................................... 323
Wired LAN 9 Wired LAN Instruction
Manual
Z
Zone AF ................................... 92, 97
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
PO Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of February 2016. For
information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SW6CA210 © CANON INC. 2016

Navigation menu